JP7792671B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute display effects using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines mentioned above, there was still room for improvement in terms of technology to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems and aims to increase the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate correspondence with the embodiments described below to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not in any way limit the present invention.

[Application Example 1]
a display screen for displaying an image;
When the effect pattern fluctuating on the display screen is fixed and stopped, in the next fluctuation, it is possible to execute a fluctuation straddle effect, which is an effect having continuity from the end of the current fluctuation to the next fluctuation,
The variation straddle effect includes an effect in which, when the effect pattern varying on the display screen is fixed and stopped in a specific manner, a specific effect is executed in the next variation so as to be continuous with the fixed stop,
The combination of the performance symbols that has been determined and stopped in the specific mode includes a special image,
The special image is an image in which no other image is displayed integrally with the special image,
After the start of the next variation, within the period of the specific performance executed in the next variation, the number image included in the performance pattern that has been fixed and stopped is made difficult to see, and a performance is executed in which the area occupied by the special image is made larger than when the special image was fixed and stopped in the previous variation, using the special image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

This invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining decision tables T1 to T4. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 when the time is not reduced. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a V-type opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 10 is a flowchart of a main control process. 10 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 2 pre-determination processing. This is a flowchart of the preliminary judgment processing of Special Figure 1. 10 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 10 is a flowchart of a special action process. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 10 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. This is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 10 is a flowchart of a game state reset process. 10 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 10 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 10 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 10 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart of a pre-reading effect determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a pre-determination information storage area. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. 10 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 10 is a flowchart of a display control process. An explanatory diagram illustrating the movement pattern of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the frame movable device 69. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screen 64. FIG. A diagram to explain the pattern duplication movement performance A. A diagram to explain the pattern duplication movement performance B. A diagram to explain the pattern duplication movement performance C. A diagram to explain the sequential pattern change effect A. A diagram to explain the sequential pattern change effect B. A diagram to explain the sequential pattern change presentation C. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern special effect A. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern special effect B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern special effect C. A diagram to explain decorative pattern alignment performance A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern alignment performance B. A diagram to explain decorative pattern alignment performance C. A diagram to explain the temporary stop pattern movement effect A. A diagram to explain the temporary stop pattern movement effect B. A diagram to explain the temporary stop pattern movement effect C. A diagram to explain the variable display effect A through a transparent area. A diagram to explain the variable display effect B through a transparent area. A diagram to explain the variable display effect C through a transparent area. A diagram to explain the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A. A diagram to explain the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B. A diagram to explain the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C. A diagram for explaining decorative pattern competition presentation A. A diagram for explaining decorative pattern competition presentation B. 10 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern competition presentation C. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating logo moving contact effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating logo moving contact effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a logo moving contact effect C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the symbol count continuous performance A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the symbol count continuous performance B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the symbol count continuous performance C. A diagram to explain the image reversal expectation suggestion effect A. A diagram to explain the image reversal expectation suggestion effect B. A diagram to explain the image reversal expectation suggestion effect C. A diagram to explain a specific pseudo-consecutive performance A. A diagram to explain specific pseudo-consecutive performance B. A diagram to explain a specific mode pseudo consecutive performance C. A diagram to explain the change-over continuous performance A. A diagram to explain the change-over continuous performance B. A diagram to explain the change-over continuous performance C. A diagram to explain the pending icon linked effect A. A diagram to explain the pending icon linked effect B. A diagram to explain the pending icon linked effect C. A diagram to explain special hold change effect A. A diagram to explain special hold change effect B. A diagram to explain special hold change presentation C. A diagram to explain the pending expectation presentation A. A diagram to explain the pending expectation presentation B. A diagram to explain the hold expectation presentation C. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an operation means operation state notification effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an operation means operation state notification display B. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an operation means operation state notification display C. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a load imposing effect A. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a load imposing effect B. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining load application effect C. A diagram to explain the game state continuation suggestion effect A. A diagram to explain the game state continuation suggestion effect B. A diagram to explain the game state continuation suggestion effect C. A diagram to explain the in-game mode change effect A. A figure to explain the in-game mode change presentation B. A figure to explain the in-game mode change presentation C. A diagram to explain group preview performance A. A diagram to explain group preview performance B. A diagram to explain group preview performance C.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the Gaming Machine Figure 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

Gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires gaming balls based on the player's firing operation, and when a gaming ball lands on a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls is paid out to the player based on that winning. Gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, with the gaming board 2 attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, gaming machine frame 50 comprises an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame inside the outer frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located at the front of the outer and inner frames, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, an effect button 63, sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 69. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, through which the play area 3 of the game board 2 can be seen.

The handle 60 is located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 and launches game balls with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation angle. Movable frame movable bodies 69 (also called frame movable gadgets 69), which are movable gimmicks, are provided on the right and left sides of the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69 are configured so that two members, located on the left and right sides of the handle 60, can move left and right in the left and right directions. Each of the two members is formed from a flexible, flat member, and its main surface is configured to move toward and away from the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69 normally remain stationary in retracted positions (Figure 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides, respectively. They can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the handle 60 and come to rest in a position where they touch the handle 60. When in the advanced position, the frame movable bodies 69 come into contact with the handle 60 or the right hand of a player operating the handle 60.

The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is located below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operating unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is located inside the effect button 63 and is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right in response to effects, etc. The sword member 65 is an operating unit shaped like a sword and can be pressed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation in which the entire sword member 65 is pressed downward, and a second operation in which the entire sword member 65 is pressed upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs across the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamps 66 include a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and are arranged above the front frame 53 to provide light effects during play. The right frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a play area 3, rail members 4, board lamps 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, a fixed winning device (center hole) 19, a regular variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a regular winning opening 27 (regular winning opening 27), an outlet 16, and indicators 40.

The play area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple protruding game pegs that guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is located at the left end of the play area 3 and guides game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the play area 3. The board lamps 5 are located on the rear side of the play area 3 and emit light from the rear side of the play area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured to have continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is located near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, plasma display, projector, or dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance symbol display area in which performance symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a hold image display area in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold digestion image display area (the hold display area) in which a hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images that represent a hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image that represents the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C, the hold icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply referred to as the hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: left, center, and right. The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of multiple symbols representing the numbers "1" through "9," for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first and second special symbols, described below. By combining the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas, the image display device 7 can clearly display to the player the results of the variable display of the first and second special symbols, displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and second special symbol display device 41b, described below (the jackpot lottery results).

For example, if a jackpot is won, a static display of a repeating number such as "777" will be displayed. If a loss occurs, a static display of a random number such as "637" will be displayed. This makes it easier for players to understand the progress of the game. Players can understand the results of the jackpot lottery from the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The variable display of the variable symbol may be a vertical scrolling display or another display. The combination of variable symbol symbols displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbol symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable symbol display," "variable decorative symbol display," or simply "variable display" or "variable display." Note that this decorative pattern variation effect counts the effect from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops (also called the special pattern variation period) as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops, the effect of that temporary stop is included in the decorative pattern variation effect.

In addition to the effect symbol change effect, the image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a jackpot effects that are performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), demo effects for waiting customers, and the like. In the effect symbol change effect, in addition to the effect symbol, effect images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, in addition to the effect symbol, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can indicate that a special symbol is changing or the result of a special symbol lottery. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the play area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved image 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols (described below), and a second reserved display area that displays reserved image 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols (described below). By displaying reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols (displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a) and the number of reserved second special symbols (displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b) can be clearly displayed to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. Reserve consumption image 9C corresponds to the effect symbol (effect symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on display screen 7a or display screen 7b, and by displaying reserved consumption image 9C, it can be clearly displayed to the player that the reserved first or reserved second special symbol is being consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described below).

A first movable board 14 (also referred to as the first movable gadget 14), which is a movable gimmick, is provided on the left side of the image display device 7. The first movable gadget 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member that is movable left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable gadget 14 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Figure 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right edge of the display screen 7a and stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable gadget 14 is formed to be approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and in the advanced position it covers part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured with a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" that can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position above the image display device 7 (Figure 1), and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped in the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that allows it to guide game balls rolling on the top surface of the stage section 11 to the first starting hole 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow in and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is located below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always has the same ease of entry for game balls. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers a lottery for the first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number, etc., and the determination of a jackpot, etc.

The normal variable entry device (electric chute) 22 is located below the first start hole 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second start hole (second start entry hole, second ball entry hole, variable start hole) 21. Entry of a game ball into the second start hole 21 triggers a lottery for the second special symbol (jackpot lottery). The electric chute 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second start hole 21, which opens and closes the second start hole 21 by operating the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open position. It is sufficient for the electric chute 22 to make it easier for a ball to enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open position than when it is in the closed position; it may also be possible for a ball to enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed position.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the gaming area 3 and is configured to allow gaming balls to pass through. The passage of a gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal symbol random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, "special symbol lottery" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining the special symbol when a gaming ball enters the first starting slot 20 or the second starting slot 21, and comparing this obtained random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won. The result of this "jackpot" lottery is not immediately notified to the player; rather, the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b (described below) displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined variation time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the display of effect symbols changes in synchronization with the display of the variable special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result.

Furthermore, "drawing a normal symbol" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining a normal symbol when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, and comparing this obtained random number with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win" to determine whether or not a win has occurred. The result of this normal symbol drawing is not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28; rather, a fluctuating display of the normal symbol is performed on normal symbol display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the drawing result is displayed as a confirmed result (lit or extinguished), and the player is notified of the drawing result.

The first large prize device (first attacker, first special variable prize device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize hole (first special prize hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V-shaped opening/closing member 71. The first large prize hole 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special prize hole opening/closing member) 32 that swings open and close to allow or block the reception of game balls. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open position.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped internally with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning opening sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V-opening/closing member 71, and a V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas within the first large prize winning device 31 through which a gaming ball that has passed through the first large prize winning opening 30 can pass. The first large prize winning opening sensor 30a is positioned upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first large prize winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is positioned in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of a gaming ball into the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member 71 distributes gaming balls that have passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening/closing member 71. The V-opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise relative to the gaming board 2), and when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to enter a first state (rotating state) in which it distributes gaming balls to the V area 39. When the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it enters a second state (stopped state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes gaming balls to the non-V area 70. The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have any function other than distributing game balls passing through the first large prize opening 30 to either the V-zone 39 or the non-V-zone 70. For example, it may be configured to move left and right relative to the game board 2. That is, when the V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it enters a retreat state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V-zone 39. When the V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 is deenergized, it enters an advance state (second state) in which game balls are distributed to the non-V-zone 70. In the gaming machine 1, the passage of a game ball into the V-zone 39 triggers a transition to the high-probability state described below. In other words, the V-zone 39 is a probability variable activation port. On the other hand, the non-V-zone 70 is not a probability variable activation port. The first large prize opening 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large prize opening discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large prize opening 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is located at the point where the V area 39 and non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize device (second attacker, second special variable prize device) 36 is located above and to the right of the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and includes a second large prize opening (second special prize opening) 35. The second large prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special prize opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that blocks or allows the reception of game balls with a swing-type opening/closing action. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second large prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open position.

The large prize opening start port 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when a gaming ball passes through. However, the gaming machine 1 does not necessarily have to be equipped with the large prize opening start port 17.

The general winning opening 27 is located at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is located at the bottom of the play area 3 and ejects game balls that do not enter any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The indicators 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the bottom right of the play area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The gaming area 3 has a left gaming area 3A to the left of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right gaming area 3B to the right. Shooting a gaming ball so that it flows down through the left gaming area 3A is called a "left hit." On the other hand, shooting a gaming ball so that it flows down through the right gaming area 3B is called a "right hit." The gaming machine 1 is configured so that a left hit allows a player to aim for a win at the first starting gate 20. On the other hand, a right hit allows a player to aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting gate 21, the first large winning gate 30, and the second large winning gate 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserve display 43a, a second special symbol reserve display 43b, and a normal symbol reserve display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserve display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserves) stored in the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserve display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserves) stored in the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reserve indicator 44 displays the number of reserved activations (normal symbol reserves) stored in the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." Furthermore, the first special symbol indicator 41a and the second special symbol indicator 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol indicator 41." Furthermore, the first special symbol reserve indicator 43a and the second special symbol reserve indicator 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve indicator 43."

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (changing display) and then displays it in a stopped state, thereby announcing the results of a lottery (special symbol winning lottery, jackpot lottery) based on a win at the first start slot 20 or the second start slot 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first large prize slot 30 or the second large prize slot 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that is won). The opening patterns of the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30 and second large prize slot 35) in the special game are described below.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight horizontally arranged LEDs, whose illumination patterns display special symbols corresponding to the results of the special symbol lottery. For example, in the event of a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), a jackpot symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). In the event of a loss, a losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, such as "●●●●●●●○." A losing symbol may be displayed with all LEDs turned off. Before the special symbol is statically displayed, a variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined variable period. The variable display pattern may be, for example, such that each LED lights up in a repeated flow of light from left to right. The variable display pattern is not limited to the above pattern and can be any illumination pattern as long as each LED is not statically displayed (illuminated in a specific pattern). For example, all LEDs may flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers, such as the jackpot random number, obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special symbol reserve memory area 85 (Figure 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored as a first special symbol reserve in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (Figure 5), and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored as a second special symbol reserve in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (Figure 5). There is a limit to the number of special symbol reserves that can be stored in each special symbol reserve memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the limit is four for both the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a and the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The special symbol reserves stored in the special symbol reserve memory area 85 are consumed when variable display of the special symbol based on that special symbol reserve becomes possible. "Consuming a reserved special symbol" refers to determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to that reserved special symbol and executing a variable display of a special symbol to indicate the result of the determination. Therefore, in gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of a special symbol based on a winning game ball entering first start slot 20 or second start slot 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning ball enters the game, i.e., even if a winning ball is entered while the variable display of special symbols is being executed or a special game is being executed, the right to enter a jackpot lottery for that winning ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on special symbol reserve indicator 43. First special symbol reserve indicator 43a and second special symbol reserve indicator 43b each consist of, for example, four LEDs. Each special symbol reserve indicator 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of a gaming ball through gate 28. After variably displaying (variably displaying) the normal symbol, normal symbol display device 42 displays it in a static state, thereby announcing the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the gaming ball through gate 28. The statically displayed normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from multiple types of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol with a predetermined stop pattern, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening pattern of second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by changing the lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is displayed, as in "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing symbol with only the right LED lit is displayed, as in "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off may also be used to indicate a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is displayed as a static symbol, a variable display of the normal symbol is displayed for a predetermined variable time. The variable display pattern may, for example, be such that both LEDs are lit alternately. The variable display pattern is not limited to the above patterns and can be any lighting pattern as long as each LED is not displayed as a static symbol (a lit display in a specific pattern). For example, the variable display pattern may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) obtained for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal symbol reserve in normal symbol reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal symbol reserves that can be stored in normal symbol reserve memory area 86, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four. The normal symbol reserves stored in normal symbol reserve memory area 86 are consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal symbol based on that normal symbol reserve. Consumption of a normal symbol reserve refers to determining the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal symbol reserve and executing variable display of the normal symbol to indicate the result of that determination. Therefore, in gaming machine 1, even if variable display of the normal symbol based on the gaming ball's passage through gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, i.e., even if a prize is won while variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or while an auxiliary game is being executed, the right to draw a normal symbol for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved general maps is displayed on the reserved general map display 44. The reserved general map display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of reserved general maps by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved general maps.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 3 and 4. Figure 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine 1. Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Figure 3), a sub-control board 90 (Figure 4), an image control board 100 (Figure 4), a lamp control board 107 (Figure 4), a sound control board 106 (Figure 4), and a payout control board 110 (Figure 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery draws and game state transitions, and constitutes the main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a presentation control board that controls presentations executed as the game progresses, and constitutes the sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, lamp control board 107, and sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of play on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of play, a main RAM 84 used as work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port unit) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start gate sensor 17a, the first start gate sensor 20a, the second start gate sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize gate sensor 30a, the second large prize gate sensor 35a, the V-area sensor 39a, the non-V-area sensor 70a, and the regular prize gate sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize gate solenoid 33, the second large prize gate solenoid 38, and the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects game balls that have entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27 and detects game balls that have entered the regular prize opening 27. The regular prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed through the regular prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize device 31.

Displays 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserve display 43a, the second special symbol reserve display 43b, and the normal symbol reserve display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is also connected to the launching device 112 via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid-out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball dispensing motor 131 of the ball dispensing device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. Dispensed balls are detected by a ball dispensing sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is located adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball dispensing based on information from an inserted prepaid card, etc. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (Figure 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects contact with the handle 60 using the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 using the launching volume 115. The launching motor 113 is then driven to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launching volume 115.

The main control board 80 is connected to the sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting communication direction.

The sub-control board 90 includes a presentation control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The presentation control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer implemented on the sub-control board 90, and controls the presentation of games on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The presentation control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling presentations as games progress, a sub-RAM 94 used as work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The presentation control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc., via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the presentation control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

Image control board 100 includes image control microcomputer 101, input circuit 105a, and output circuit 105b. Image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer implemented on image control board 100, and controls the display of image display device 7 and sub-display screen 64 according to a program. Image control microcomputer 101 includes CPU 102, ROM 103, and RAM 104. ROM 103 stores programs for display control as well as still image data and video data to be displayed on image display device 7 and sub-display screen 64, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect designs) and background images. RAM 104 is used as memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes the programs stored in ROM 103. Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. Based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from ROM 103 and controls the display based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may also have a CPU implemented, and the CPU may be caused to execute audio control based on commands. The audio control board 106 may also have a ROM implemented, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to execute audio control. The audio data may also be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to and controls the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the frame movable role element 69. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates lighting pattern data (data determining the on/off status, light color, etc., also known as lamp data) that determines the lighting mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 according to the lighting pattern data. The lighting pattern data is created using data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the frame movable role element 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the frame movable role element 69, and controls the operation of the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the frame movable role element 69 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be configured to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable role elements 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data related to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Connected to the relay board 108 are a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. A vibration motor is also attached to the performance button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the performance button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Also connected to the relay board 108 is a sword component detection switch which detects when the sword component 65 has been pressed.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5(A) is a diagram illustrating tables stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5(B) is a diagram illustrating storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6(A) is a diagram illustrating tables stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6(B) is a diagram illustrating storage areas provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (Figure 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described below) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (Figure 5(B)) is provided with a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special symbol reserve memory area 85, and a normal symbol reserve memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit are set during the main control main processing (described below), and is set with commands such as a pre-determination command, reserved ball count command, variable start command, variable stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, and customer waiting standby command. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and game state are set during the main control main processing (described below), and is set with a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, and time-saving flag. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control processing (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, round counter, ceiling counter, probability variable counter, and time-saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area where statuses in the special action processing (described later) are set. The special symbol reserve memory area 85 includes a first special symbol reserve memory area 85a in which the first special symbol reserve is stored, and a second special symbol reserve memory area 85b in which the second special symbol reserve is stored. The first special symbol reserve memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random value groups (reserved information) such as special symbol winning random numbers corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special symbol reserves, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b has a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth reserved second special symbols, respectively. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 has a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth reserved normal symbols, respectively. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also has a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the movable gimmicks 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the gaming machine 1 is turned on or off and remains unchanged. In other words, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information do not change state even when the power is turned ON or OFF, and the information is maintained. Meanwhile, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Furthermore, the ceiling counter is set to "500" and the other counters are set to "0" as the initial state of the counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (Figure 6(A)) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main processing (described below) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (Figure 6(B)) is provided with a command memory area 94a, a display command set area 94b, a pre-determination information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) where commands input from the main control unit during the sub-control main processing (described below) are stored, and includes pre-determination commands, reserved ball count commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V-pass commands, and customer waiting commands. The display command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 during the sub-control main processing (described below) are set, and includes a fluctuation display start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation display end command, an opening display start command, a round display start command, and an ending display start command. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reserved effect counter, a second special symbol reserved effect counter, a normal symbol reserved effect counter, a ceiling effect counter, an overnight effect counter, a probability variable effect counter, and a time-saving effect counter. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, all but the overnight effect counter are maintained and not cleared even when the gaming machine 1 is turned on or off. In other words, the above commands, counters other than the overnight effect counter, and pre-determination information are maintained and their status is not changed even when the gaming machine 1 is turned on or off. The overnight effect counter is reset by turning the gaming machine 1 on or off, and is set to 0 as its initial state. The information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to 0.

Figure 7 is a diagram explaining the various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the presentation control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The game control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "variable pattern random number," and a "normal pattern random number (win random number)" at the timing described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred (jackpot determination), and takes on a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes on a value ranging from 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the symbol variation effect that indicates a jackpot result when the jackpot determination is a miss. It ranges from 0 to 127. A reach refers to a state in which only one of the multiple display symbols (decorative symbols) remains, and depending on which of the display symbols freezes, a combination of symbols indicating a jackpot win (e.g., a "7↓7" state) may result. Note that the display symbol frozen in the reach state may appear to fluctuate within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variation pattern, including the variation time. It ranges from 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (win random number)" is used in the lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play the auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal symbol random number ranges from 0 to 255. "Jackpot random number," "jackpot type random number," "reach random number," and "variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21). A group of random numbers obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 20 is stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a, and a group of random numbers obtained based on the ball entering the second start port 21 is stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. "Normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is obtained based on passing through gate 28. The obtained normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-reading performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "pre-reading performance random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-reading performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-reading performance random number" is acquired based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number group is stored in sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a variation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number value is stored in sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. Figure 8(A) shows a diagram explaining the jackpot determination table T1, Figure 8(B) shows a diagram explaining the reach determination table T2, Figure 8(C) shows a diagram explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and Figure 8(D) shows a diagram explaining the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number value (any value between 0 and 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss." Figure 8 (A) shows that in the "normal probability state," if the jackpot random number value is between 0 and 164, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number value is a number other than 0 and 164 (165 to 65535), it is determined to be a "miss." It also shows that in the "high probability state," if the jackpot random number value is between 0 and 649, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number value is a number other than 0 and 649 (650 to 65535), it is determined to be a "miss." The details of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired reach random number value (any value between 0 and 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach." Figure 8 (B) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," a reach random number value between 0 and 13 is determined to be "reach," while a reach random number value other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127) is determined to be "no reach." Also, in the "time-saving state," a reach random number value between 0 and 5 is determined to be "reach," while a reach random number value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127) is determined to be "no reach." The details of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" are described below. In the reach determination table T2, a reach is less likely to occur when a miss occurs in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because when in time-saving mode, more no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, speeding up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The normal symbol win determination table T3 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any value between 0 and 255) corresponds to a "win" or a "lose." Figure 8 (C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is between 0 and 2, it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is a "number other than 0 and 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "lose." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is between 0 and 254, it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is a "number other than 0 and 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "lose."

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 references during the main control main processing (described below) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and in the "time-saving state," the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "1 second."

Figure 9 is a diagram illustrating the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main process (described below) to determine the "jackpot type" and "special symbol type" according to the acquired jackpot type random number value (any value between 0 and 127). In Figure 9, when a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is between 0 and 24, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1." If the jackpot type random number value is between 25 and 49, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2." When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 15R) V-scheduled passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled non-passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 82," the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV scheduled passing jackpot," and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1." If the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127," the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V scheduled non-passing jackpot," and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5." By referencing the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stopping symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stopping symbol, as well as the "opening (OP) command," "round designation command," and "ending (ED) command" of the special game can also be identified. The specific details of the "16RV scheduled to pass jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not scheduled to pass jackpot" will be discussed later.

Figure 10 is a diagram illustrating the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 when the time-saving mode is not active. Figure 11 is a diagram illustrating the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 when the time-saving mode is active. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described below) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). Figure 10 shows, for example, that when the first starting hole 20 is won when the time-saving mode is not active, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss," the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "reach," the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 60," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7." FIG. 11 shows, for example, that when a ball enters the second starting slot 21 during time-saving mode, the jackpot determination table T1 determines a "jackpot," the jackpot type determination table T5 determines a "jackpot expected to pass 16RV," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-10," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61." As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Furthermore, when a reach occurs, whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach) is also determined. A super reach is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time after the reach than a normal reach. Five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, and SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. SP1 to SP3 are executed in a progressive manner after a normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-consecutive combination.

Figure 12 is a diagram illustrating the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 12 (A) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11," and in the "time-saving state," the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12." Figure 12 (B) shows the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (maximum of 10), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

Figure 13 is a diagram illustrating the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control process (described below) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop symbol data (Figure 9). Figure 13 (A) shows that when the special symbol stop symbol data is "11H," "12H," or "21H," the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "Opening Pattern 21." When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H," "15H," or "22H," the opening pattern is determined to be "Opening Pattern 22." When the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H," the opening pattern is determined to be "Opening Pattern 23." Figure 13 (B) shows the contents of Opening Pattern 21, Opening Pattern 22, and Opening Pattern 23. In opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 14 and 16. In opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in rounds 14 and 16, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 15. In opening pattern 23, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 14, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in round 16. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (the specified number of winning balls, up to 9), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 will be closed even if there is remaining opening time.

14 is a diagram illustrating the V-shaped opening/closing member release pattern determination table T9. The V-shaped opening/closing member release pattern determination table T9 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine the release pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop symbol data ( FIG. 9 ). In FIG. 14(A), when the special symbol stop symbol data is "11H,""12H," or "21H," the release pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "release pattern 31." When the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 32." When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 33." When the special symbol stop symbol data is "15H" or "22H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 34." 14(B) shows the details of opening pattern 31, opening pattern 32, opening pattern 33, and opening pattern 34. In opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the tenth and twelfth rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long mode with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds. In opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long mode with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 seconds.
The port will be opened.

4. Explanation of Jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as the results of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot," a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss," a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30 and second large prize slot 35) are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round of play begins, and an ending (ED) after the final round of play ends. Each round of play begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round of play and ends with the start of the next round of play. The time (interval time) during which the big prize opening is closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are shown in Figure 9. Here, jackpots are broadly divided into two types: "V-passing jackpots" and "V-non-passing jackpots." A "V-passing jackpot" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass into the V-zone 39 during the jackpot play. Here, a jackpot with special symbol stop data of 11H to 14H or 21H corresponds to a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)." When the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in Figure 13 is combined with the opening pattern of the V-opening member 71 shown in Figure 14 as (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass into the V-zone 39 during the jackpot play. A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that prevents the game ball from passing through the V area 39 during the jackpot play. Here, a jackpot with special stop symbol data of 15H or 22H corresponds to a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot." When the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 is combined with the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot play. As described above, opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both a V passing scheduled opening pattern and a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

"V Passing Jackpot" includes "16RV Passing Jackpot," "16R (Actually 13R) V Passing Jackpot," and "16R (Actually 15R) V Passing Jackpot." A "16RV Passing Jackpot" has a total effective number of rounds of 16R. Rounds 1 through 13 and Round 15 open the first large prize opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per Round. Rounds 14 and 16 open the second large prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per Round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 21). Rounds 10 and 12 open the V-opening member 71 for a long time (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 31), allowing easy passage to the V-zone 39 within the first large prize opening 30.

In a "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the total number of rounds is 16, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize slot 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short from round 14 to round 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, a "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot" is effectively a 13R jackpot. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In a "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot," the total number of rounds is 16, but the actual total number of rounds is 15. In other words, from R1 to R13 and R15, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in R16, the second major prize slot 35 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in R14, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short in R14, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, a "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot" is effectively a 15R jackpot. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" with opening pattern 22, which has a total number of rounds of 16, but an effective total of 13 rounds. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize slot 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short from rounds 14 to 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is effectively a 13R jackpot. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it nearly impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" have the same opening pattern (opening pattern 22) for the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 (opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37), with only the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 differing (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be explained later, the "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are designed to involve a time-saving game (100 times in this example) after the jackpot game ends. In other words, with the "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot," it is nearly impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-zone 39 in the first large prize opening 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" allows the game ball to easily pass through the V area 39 in the first large prize slot 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" and a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot," making it difficult to determine whether the game state after the jackpot will become a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability, high-base state) or a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state). Furthermore, after the time-saving game ends, the game state becomes a low-probability, low-base state (normal state) in the "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot," while the game state becomes a seemingly normal high-probability, low-base state in the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot." That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large prize slot 30, when the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a latent state (latent probability change state) in which the high probability is hidden despite being in a high probability low base state, and this latent probability change state is difficult for the player to distinguish. In other words, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability, high-base state) after the jackpot play of a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and a "16R (effectively 13R) V passing jackpot", the high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state) after the jackpot play of a "16R (effectively 13R) V passing jackpot", and the low-probability, low-base state after the time-saving play of a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the high-probability, low-base state after the time-saving play of a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing jackpot" end are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Also, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for V-passing jackpots and 60/128 (approximately 47%) for V-non-passing jackpots. In contrast, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for V-passing jackpots and 45/128 (approximately 35.2%) for V-non-passing jackpots. In this way, the gaming machine 1 is set up so that the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when a gaming ball enters the second start slot 21 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when a gaming ball enters the first start slot 20.

5. Description of Game States The game states of the gaming machine 1 will now be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variable state)," and the state in which probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply referred to as the "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 achieves the high probability state by determining a jackpot using a jackpot determination table ( FIG. 8(A) ) in which the number of jackpot random number values determined as a jackpot is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display device 41, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display device 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

The state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the time-shortening of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "time-shortening state," while the state in which the time-shortening control is not controlled is simply referred to as the "non-time-shortening state." In the time-shortening state, the special symbol's time of fluctuation (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derived display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figures 10 and 11), which is determined so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected more frequently in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the time-shortening of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41, a short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation time for the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the time-shortening control is not being executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of reserved special symbols is accelerated, making it more likely that a valid win (a win that can be stored as a reserved special symbol) will occur in the starting slot. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. Note that the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-shortened state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortened state. As the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols, the game control microcomputer 81 performs hit determination (determination of the normal symbol) using a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (Figure 8 (C)), in which the number of normal symbol random number values (win random number values) determined to be a hit is higher in the time-shortened state than in the non-time-shortened state. Therefore, in the time-shortened state, the probability of a hit is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 42, the probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 42 will be a winning symbol is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed. In the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but 1 second in the time-saving state ( FIG. 8 (D) ). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state ( FIG. 12 ). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 opens in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state ( FIG. 12 ). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. When the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, as well as control to extend the opening time and increase the number of openings for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 opens more frequently, and game balls land more frequently in the second starting hole 21 than when these controls are not being executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of balls fired, becomes higher. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state," and a state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state." In the high base state, players can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing their available game balls. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports the electric chute 22 in landing in the second starting hole 21) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not necessarily require the execution of all of the above controls. In other words, by executing one or more of the following controls: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22, it is sufficient if the electric chute 22 is made more likely to open than when that control is not being executed. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game resulting from winning a V-passing jackpot is a high-probability state, a time-saving state, and a high-base state if passage to V area 39 occurs during that jackpot game. This game state is specifically referred to as a "high-probability, high-base state" or a "high-probability, time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpots that result in a high-probability, high-base state after a jackpot game are the "16RV-passing jackpot," "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," and "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" jackpots shown in Figure 9. For the "16RV-passing jackpot" and "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," the high-probability, high-base state ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In the case of a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot," the high-probability, high-base state ends when, after a jackpot game, the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), resulting in a high-probability, low-base state (latent probability variable state), or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and that jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, the game state after a jackpot game resulting from a win of a non-V-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (a non-high probability state, i.e., a low probability state), a time-saving state, and a high-base state, unless the V region 39 is passed during that jackpot game (which is almost never the case). These game states are specifically referred to as a "low-probability, high-base state" and a "low-probability, time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpot that results in a low-probability, high-base state after a jackpot game is a "16R (effectively 13R) V-nonpassing scheduled jackpot," among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9 . During this jackpot, the low-probability, high-base state ends when the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and that jackpot game is executed. When playing gaming machine 1 for the first time, the game state after powering on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is specifically referred to as the "low-probability, low-base state." The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as the "normal game state" or the "low-probability, non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as the non-time-saving state)." The state during which a special game (jackpot game) is being executed is sometimes referred to as the "special game state (jackpot game state)." Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high-probability state and the high-base state is sometimes referred to as a "specific game state."

In a high-base state, such as a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state, hitting with the right to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (Figure 1) can be advantageously played. This is because the electric support control makes the electric chute 22 more likely to open than in a low-base state, making it easier to win in the second start hole 21 than in the first start hole 20. For this reason, in a high-base state, hitting with the right is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery. This allows for more start wins (winning in the start hole) than hitting with the left. Note that with gaming machine 1, play is performed with the right even during jackpot play. On the other hand, in a low-base state, hitting with the left to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (Figure 1) can be advantageously played. Because electric support control is not being executed, the electric chute 22 is less likely to open than in the high base state, making it easier to win in the first start hole 20 than in the second start hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, you hit the ball to the left in order to get the game ball to win in the first start hole 20. This allows you to get more start wins than if you hit it to the right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be explained based on Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/loss determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/loss advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). The initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, etc. The initial value of a flag is "1" (i.e., "ON") for the ceiling flag, and "0" (i.e., "OFF") for the other flags. The initial value of a status is "1." The initial value of a counter is "500" for the ceiling counter, and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial settings are performed only once after the power is turned on and are not performed thereafter.

After the initial settings, the game control microcomputer 81 disables interrupt processing (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, and normal symbol random number value) shown in FIG. 7(A) by incrementing them by 1. When each random number counter value reaches its set upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 4 msec). In other words, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (e.g., every 4 msec). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is disabled, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update process of the various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning slot in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting slot sensor 20a, the second starting slot sensor 21a, the first large winning slot sensor 30a, the second large winning slot sensor 35a, the regular winning slot sensor 27a, and the regular winning slot sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 sequentially executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and reserved ball count process (step S107). Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball count process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands, etc., set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 described below, the second special symbol reserved indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating that number, and based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the first special symbol reserved indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating that number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If a game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved normal symbols. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls among the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), processing skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is the number of reserved second symbol symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved second symbol symbols. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), processing skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 (step S207), and then a special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 among the first to fourth memory areas of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b for the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described below. After the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The special symbol 2 pre-determination process will be described in detail later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 20. This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. If a game ball has entered the first start hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (step S212), and then a special symbol 1-related random number acquisition process is performed (step S213). Here, similar to the special symbol 2-related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above, the values of the jackpot random number counter, the jackpot type random number counter, the reach random number counter, and the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 among the first to fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) separate from the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a for the special symbol 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described below. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination processing (step S214). Details of the special chart 1 pre-determination processing will be described later.

[Special diagram 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. In other words, if the probability variable flag is OFF, no pre-determination is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the referenced jackpot determination table T1 ( FIG. 8 ) and the jackpot random number value to make a preliminary determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Because the high probability state (the probability variable flag is ON) is being assumed here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1 to make a preliminary determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649," a "jackpot" is preliminarily determined, and when the value is any other value, a "miss" is preliminarily determined. Note that in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is made using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process ( FIG. 23 ) described later. However, in other embodiments, the preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), processing skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type (step S305). In the pre-determination of the jackpot type, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (Figure 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (Figure 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127," the pre-determination is a "16RV passing jackpot." In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is made using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described below, but in other embodiments, the preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as judgment values temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-shortened state (the time-shortened flag is ON) is in effect, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-shortened state (FIG. 11) and identifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot preliminary determination result of step S304, the reach preliminary determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Note that in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the selected fluctuation pattern may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that could be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no-reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60," the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64," which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," and fluctuation pattern "P68," which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4." In this embodiment, the advance determination is made using fluctuation pattern determination table T6, which is used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described below. However, in other embodiments, the advance determination may be made using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a win, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308) and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-Determination Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special symbol 2 pre-determination process described above, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, no pre-determination is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the normal probability state (the probability variable flag is OFF) is in effect, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value: "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, a "jackpot" is pre-determined when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164," and a "miss" is pre-determined when the value is any other value. Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a pre-determination jackpot determination table different from the jackpot determination table T1. The following steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 in the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, and therefore will not be described here.

[Normal operation processing]
20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is one or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is decremented by one (step S504). Therefore, if a gaming ball passes through gate 28 while the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "0," the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is temporarily set to "1" in step S203 of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 17). Then, the reserved balls are consumed in step S504, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols immediately becomes "0." The same applies to the number of reserved balls for special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls for special symbols is temporarily set to "1." Then, in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), the reserved balls are consumed and the number of reserved balls for special symbols becomes "0." Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a win has occurred by referring to the normal symbol win determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 as a determination value. Then, it determines whether or not a win has occurred by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time-saving state is active), and the normal symbol win determination table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is between "0" and "2," it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is anything other than that, it is determined to be a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (Figure 8 (D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and then selects the normal symbol variation time as a normal symbol variation pattern using the game state determination result and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Here, when it is not in a time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and when it is in a time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the normal symbol variation display (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see Figure 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) results in a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination results in a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is not in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts operating the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512) and ends this processing.

If the electric chute 22 is in operation in step S501 described above (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is met (step S520). The closing condition here is met when either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 reaches a specified maximum number of winning balls (e.g., six balls), or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it is time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is not met (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is met (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and ends this processing.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process for the special symbol display 41 and the special prize device (first special prize device 31 and second special prize device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which is referred to as a "special operation status" of "1,""2,""3," and "4." When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a jackpot determination and a variation pattern selection are performed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol variation process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol variation process, a variation stop command is output after the variation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), i.e., if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired as a result of winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "1" or greater (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variable pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variable pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first through fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b from their current locations toward the read side, and clears the reserved information stored in the location farthest from the read side in the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, if reserved information is stored in the first through third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared; if reserved information is stored in the first through fourth storage areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through these steps, the reserved second symbols are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) is shifted toward the reserved consumption image display area and displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. Additionally, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are each shifted one position to the left (Figure 1). This allows the player to recognize that one reserved second special symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, which starts the display of the second special symbol variation and sets the variation time timer. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. Additionally, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2." In addition, the fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information regarding the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained as a result of winning at the first starting hole 20, processing proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "1" or greater (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random number values stored in the first through fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a by one position from their current positions toward the read side, and clears the reserved information stored in the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a in the location farthest from the read side (step S1411). Through these steps, the first reserved symbols are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first memory area of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a (the rightmost reserved image 9A of the four reserved images 9A) shifts toward the reserved consumption image display area and is displayed as reserved consumption image 9C. Furthermore, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second through fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left of the four reserved images 9A) each shift one position to the right (Figure 1). This allows the player to recognize that one reserved first symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the display of the first special symbol variation is started, and a variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing (special symbol 1 variation start command) includes information related to the special symbol stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination processing (step S1408) and information related to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information related to the variation time).

If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" in step S1407 (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). A standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make this determination, for example, by checking the ON/OFF status of a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If the screen is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, sets a standby command for displaying the standby screen in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and then ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved first special symbol is executed only when the reserved second special symbol is "0." In other words, the consumption of the second special symbol reservation is executed before the consumption of the first special symbol reservation. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, a lottery based on the second special symbol reservation makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass through V) that is more profitable for the player than a lottery based on the first special symbol reservation.

[Jackpot detection process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process for special symbol 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1 (step S1408) follow similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines a jackpot by referencing the high-probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special symbol 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved second symbol) of the second reserved symbol storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first symbol) of the first special symbol storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value it references. Here, since the high probability state (probability variable flag is ON) is in effect, the jackpot determination is determined based on the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (Figure 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, because the normal probability state is being reached (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special symbol 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read out jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (Figure 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination in step S1503 or step S1505 is a "miss," the special stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the miss symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process for special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process for special chart 1 (step S1409) have similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600). The determination of whether the game state is in a time-saving state is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), processing proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), processing proceeds to step S1607. If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot is a special symbol 2 or not (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special symbol 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V-passing jackpot, so processing skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is a special symbol 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot or not (step S1604). The determination of the jackpot type is made based on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

If the jackpot type is a V-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referencing the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for a non-time-saving V-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special symbol 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (corresponding to the first reserved second symbol). In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special symbol 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (corresponding to the first reserved first symbol). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for non-time-saving state V-pass scheduled jackpots, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving states shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to V-pass scheduled jackpots (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in Special Chart 1, and the portion with fluctuation patterns "P21" to "P23" in Special Chart 2) is referenced (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern for Special Chart 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" is selected for Special Chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S1606). Here, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion "P4" to "P6"). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number value is a reach-established random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (corresponding to the first second special symbol reserve) is read. In the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (corresponding to the first first special symbol reserve). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a reach is established using the reach determination table T2 (Figure 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number value is a reach-established random number value (step S1607: YES), i.e., if there is a reach but not a miss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for reach but not a miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10). Here, as the table for reach but not a miss in the non-time-saving state, the section of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to reach but not a miss (the section with fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" for special chart 1, and the section with fluctuation patterns "P24" to "P31" for special chart 2) is referenced. In special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of balls reserved for special chart 1 (1 to 4). For Special Chart 2, one of the fluctuation patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Because the selected fluctuation pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened fluctuation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, for both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times are selected more frequently than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This allows for faster consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number value is not a reach-established random number value (step S1607: NO), i.e., if there is a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving state, no-reach misses in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) (step S1609). Here, as the table for non-time-saving state, no-reach misses, the section of the non-time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a no-reach miss (the section with fluctuation patterns "P15" to "P16" for special chart 1, and the section with fluctuation patterns "P32" to "P33" for special chart 2) is referenced. For special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of balls reserved for special chart 1 (1 to 4). For Special Chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1-4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so a shortened variation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-shortened state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (Figure 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, and therefore explanations will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619 is different from that of the previously described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing jackpot (the portion with the fluctuation pattern "P41" to "P43" in special chart 1, and the portion with the fluctuation pattern "P61" to "P63" in special chart 2) is referenced. From the read-out fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the section of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for time-saving mode shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the section "P44" to "P46") is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information about the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variable display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing is terminated. That is, the special symbol fluctuation display started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby processing (FIG. 22) continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702) and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). The game control microcomputer 81 also performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game status management process (step S1801). The game status management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time-saving cycles, and its details will be described later. After the game status management process, it determines whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game does not start, and the process moves to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, where a jackpot determination for the next reserved jackpot is performed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (Figure 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "11H," "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. The game control microcomputer 81 also refers to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (Figure 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "11H," "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71. In conjunction with setting the opening pattern of the jackpot opening and V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. In this example, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game status reset process (step S1804). The game status reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and time-saving flag, and its details will be described later. After the game status reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening begins (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game status management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the variable probability flag is ON (step S2001). If the variable probability flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), processing skips to step S2010. If the variable probability flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the variable probability counter value is decremented by one (step S2002). The variable probability counter counts the number of special symbol changes executed during the high probability state. In this case, the variable probability counter is set to "100" upon transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 then determines whether the variable probability counter value has become "0" after decrementing it by one (step S2003). If the variable probability counter value is not "0" (step S2003: NO), processing skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), processing skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, when the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving counter is set to "100". The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), processing skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the current game state that has been set (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not the game is in a special mode, the special mode counter value, whether or not the game is in a time-saving mode, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), processing skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter counts the specified number of spins until the b time reduction (Yu-time) is reached, and counts the number of times the special pattern changes when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). In this case, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of spins. The game control microcomputer 81 then determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1 (step S2012). In other words, it determines whether the specified number of spins until the b time reduction (Yu-time) is reached has been reached. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), processing skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time-saving flag is switched ON (step S2013), and the time-saving count (number of times awarded) is set to "700". Then, the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2015). Then, processing of step S2009 is executed.

[Game status reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game status reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variable flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to step S2105. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process is terminated. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2106). In other words, during execution of a jackpot game, the ceiling flag is OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since the low base state is always established when the non-time-saving state is established, the low base state is established during execution of a jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all of the large prize winning devices (first large prize winning device 31 and second large prize winning device 36) have been opened based on the opening pattern during the ongoing jackpot game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), processing proceeds to step S2230. If the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V-opening member operation processing is performed to activate the V-opening member 71 (step S2201). In this embodiment, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large prize opening 30. In the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enters the first large prize opening 30 according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large prize openings (first large prize opening 30 and second large prize opening 35) are open (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the special prize opening is not currently open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the special prize opening includes, for example, when the opening time for the special prize opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening for the first round of play, or when the interval time (closure time) until the special prize opening is temporarily closed after opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the special prize opening (step S2203: NO), processing proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the special prize opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special prize opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the special prize opening (first special prize opening 30 or second special prize opening 35) according to an opening pattern (Figure 13) corresponding to the type of special prize. After the special prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special prize game currently being played, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. Note that in this embodiment, the special prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of play. However, in another embodiment, if the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening in one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

If the special prize opening is open in step S2202 (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special prize opening closure condition is met (step S2210). The closure condition here is met when either the number of prizes won by the special prize opening during that round of play reaches a specified maximum number of prizes (e.g., nine prizes per round), or the time to close the special prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (Figure 13) has elapsed since the special prize opening was opened). If the special prize opening closure condition is not met (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing. On the other hand, if the special prize opening closure condition is met (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the special prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the special prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends a predetermined time (here, two seconds) after the special prize opening is closed. As described above, the time (interval time) for the special prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended based on whether the predetermined interval time has passed since the special prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing.

If the round of play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter value by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds of play have not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round of play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0," the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play. In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the gaming ball passes through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the gaming ball does not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot." This allows the player to recognize that the gaming ball did not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot," even if the gaming ball did pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot." Note that the ending time when the gaming ball does not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending begins, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2200 (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, and the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the jackpot end flag OFF (step S2231), turns the jackpot flag OFF (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby processing (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation processing. After that, the game status setting processing (step S2234) described below is executed, and this processing ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round of play (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V-opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an opening round when the round counter value is "15,""13,""11,""9,""7," or "5." If the round is not the opening round of the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V-opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first large winning slot 30 in that round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), processing proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), a determination is made as to whether the first winning ball has been detected (step S2503). If the first winning ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), processing ends. This is because there has not yet been a winning ball in the first large winning slot 30 in that round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

If the first ball is detected as having won (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening/closing element 71 and performs the V-valid period setting process (step S2504). The V-opening/closing element 71 is short-opened to execute a short-opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the V-opening/closing element 71 opening pattern (Figure 14(B)) is "short-open" or "long-open." Note that with the short-opening of the V-opening/closing element 71, the opening time of the V-opening/closing element 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first large prize opening 30 passes through the non-V region 70 without passing through the V region 39. In the V-valid period setting process, the period during which the V-opening/closing element 71 is open and for several seconds after the V-opening/closing element 71 is closed is set as the V-valid period during which game ball detection by the V-region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V-effective period to the period during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is open and 1 second after it is closed. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period outside the V-effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being played) as the V-invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a to be valid" means turning on the V flag based on detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a (see the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described below). Also, "determining detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a to be invalid" means not turning on the V flag even if a game ball is detected by the V-area sensor 39a. The V valid period includes several seconds (ball clearance period) after the V-opening/closing member 71 closes. This is because there is a physical distance between the V-opening/closing member 71 and the V-area sensor 39a, and it takes into account the time until the V-area sensor 39a detects the game ball that entered the V-area 39 immediately before the V-opening/closing member 71 closes. In other words, the V flag is turned ON only when a V passage (a game ball passing into the V-area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is not turned ON when a V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, i.e., the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described below). This prevents the V flag from being turned ON and the high probability state from being set based on a V passage due to fraudulent behavior. After the V-opening member 71 is short-circuited and the V-validity period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, i.e., if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning opening 30 if the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 for that round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), processing proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 for that round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), i.e., if it is a short opening, processing proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a winning ball has been detected for the second ball (step S2522). If a winning ball for the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

If a second ball wins (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V-opening/closing element 71 for a long time and performs a V-validity period setting process (step S2523). The V-opening/closing element 71 is opened for a long time because, in the "long opening" pattern of the V-opening/closing element 71 (Figure 14(B)), a long opening (maximum of 31.5 seconds) is executed when the second ball wins. Note that the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large prize opening: 29.5 seconds + interval closing time: 2 seconds). Therefore, the time from the second ball winning to the end of the round is generally shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described below, the V-opening/closing element 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V-opening/closing element 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 is configured so that, because the V-opening/closing member 71 is kept open for a relatively long time, at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning opening 30 pass through the V region 39. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the period while the V-opening/closing member 71 is open as the V valid period, and sets the V invalid period when the V-opening/closing member 71 closes at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2550). As previously mentioned, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551) and performs the V-opening/closing member closing process and the V-invalid period setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V-opening/closing member 71, and sets the V-invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V-opening/closing member 71 is closed, and then ends this process.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short open, the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 may be that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this processing.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time-saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes a "non-high probability state," a "time-saving state," and a "high base state" (i.e., low probability, high base). This low probability, high base state ends when either the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the probability variable flag ON (step S2304), sets the probability variable counter to "100" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 also turns the time-saving flag ON (step S2307) and sets the time-saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after this jackpot game becomes a "high probability state," a "time-saving state," and a "high base state" (i.e., high probability, high base). This high probability, high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns the ceiling flag ON and sets the ceiling counter to "500" as the specified number of spins until b time reduction (Yu-time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, if the probability variable flag is OFF after a jackpot game, the game will enter b time reduction (Yu-time) after 500 spins. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this processing. The game state designation command contains information regarding the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability variable flag, probability variable counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If a game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if a game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is the period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set to a few seconds (ball sweep period) after the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball processing]
Figure 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball count processing (Figure 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbols stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball count command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball count command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbols. After setting the reserved ball count command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be explained based on Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main processing from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization processing is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 disables interrupt processing (step S4015) and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in Figure 7 (B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The presentation control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a variable presentation process (step S4305). The variable presentation process sets a pre-variation command at a specific timing during the variable presentation to execute a specific display effect on the display screen 7a. Details will be described later. After the variable presentation process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the presentation button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits the various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 during the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. Having received the various commands, the image control board 100 uses the image display device 7 to execute display performances according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106, having received the various commands, executes audio performances by outputting audio from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107, having received the various commands, executes lamp performances by controlling the illumination of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320) and terminates this process. Examples of other processing include random number update processing.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If a pre-determination command has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process that determines whether or not a pre-reading performance will be executed, and if so, the pre-reading performance pattern. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if a pre-determination command has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the newly stored reserved information in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is likely to contain a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a reserved ball count command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If so (step S4445: YES), it performs reserved ball display processing (step S4450). In the reserved ball display processing, the values of the first special symbol reserved effect counter, second special symbol reserved effect counter, and regular symbol reserved effect counter, which are provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94, are updated based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbol. This allows information on the number of reserved balls to be retained not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special symbol reserved effect counter, second special symbol reserved effect counter, and regular symbol reserved effect counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), the fluctuation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation effect start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. Details of the fluctuation effect start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect start process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a fluctuation stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a fluctuation effect end process is performed (step S4470). The "fluctuation effect end process" is a process for stopping the fluctuation effect executed while the special symbol is fluctuating. In the fluctuation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect end command to end the fluctuation effect. This causes the decorative symbol corresponding to the currently fluctuating special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 to be displayed frozen. The effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the pre-determination information shift process (Figure 39), which will be described later. Note that if a fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If so (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process for selecting the opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed when the special game (jackpot game) starts. In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information contained in the opening command regarding the special symbol stop pattern data set when the jackpot win was determined in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a preset opening effect pattern corresponding to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets an opening effect start command to start the selected opening effect in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a specified opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

The presentation control microcomputer 91 then determines whether a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the jackpot opening or during the interval between openings during a special game (jackpot game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data and the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. The presentation control microcomputer 91 then selects a pre-defined round designation pattern corresponding to the type of win and the number of rounds indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets a round designation start command to start the selected round designation in the designation command setting area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specified round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If so (step S4495: YES), an ending presentation pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending presentation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting the ending presentation pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (a big win game or a small win game). In the ending presentation pattern determination process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data contained in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, it selects an ending presentation pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets an ending presentation start command to start the selected ending presentation in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specified ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (such as a time-saving flag, time-saving counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, and ceiling counter) in the sub-RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving effect counter, probability change effect counter, and ceiling effect counter stored in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of variations (number of games) during the time-saving effect is set in the time-saving effect counter, the remaining number of variations during the probability change is set in the probability change effect counter, and the remaining number of variations until the ceiling is reached is set in the ceiling effect counter. This allows information about the number of time-saving effects, the number of probability change effects, and the ceiling number to be stored not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. Furthermore, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores the V-pass information in the sub-RAM 94. The performance control microcomputer 91 also performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (such as a customer waiting command or a RAM clear notification command), and then ends this processing.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-determination information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type pre-determination result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores the jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information described above, as well as predictive display pattern information. The predictive display pattern information indicates the content of the predictive display executed during the variation display and is selected in step S4604, described below. Figure 39(A) shows a state in which the jackpot determination information "Miss" and variation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-determination results corresponding to the first to third reserved special symbol 2 symbols, respectively, and the pre-determination results corresponding to the variations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39(B) shows a state in which, from the state shown in Figure 39(A), a special symbol 2 symbol wins, and the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special symbol 2 symbol. Here, the pre-determination information stored includes the jackpot determination information "Jackpot," the jackpot type information "21H," and the variation pattern information "P61." Additionally, "Pattern A" is set as pre-reading effect pattern information in the first through fourth storage areas corresponding to the first through fourth reserved special chart 2 symbols and the corresponding area. Figure 39(C) shows the state after the variation has ended and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed from the state shown in Figure 39(B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the corresponding area, the pre-determination information stored in the second through fourth storage areas is shifted to the first through third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed during the variation effect end process (Figure 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing is terminated. In other words, if pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c, no new pre-reading effect pattern information is selected and stored. On the other hand, if pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination (fluctuation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss with no reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 terminates this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a look-ahead effect execution determination to determine whether to perform a look-ahead effect and selects a look-ahead effect pattern (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the look-ahead effect random number counter and, by referencing the obtained random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93, determines whether to perform a look-ahead effect and, if a look-ahead effect is to be performed, the look-ahead effect pattern.

Figure 40 is a diagram illustrating the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the look-ahead effect random number value is "0-55," the look-ahead effect will be "none." If the look-ahead effect random number value is "56-67," "Pattern A" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. If the look-ahead effect random number value is "68-127," "Pattern B" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead effect random number value is "0-107," the look-ahead effect will be "none." If the look-ahead effect random number value is "108-114," "Pattern A" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. If the look-ahead effect random number value is "115-127," "Pattern B" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. The type, content, and range of random number values selected for the look-ahead effect pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead effect will be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead effect pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received look-ahead command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in that area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received look-ahead command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and that area. As a result, look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable effect corresponding to that area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to that area depends on the progress of that variable effect. In other words, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed in the variable effect, the look-ahead effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it will be executed at that time. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable effect start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information about the special symbol stop symbol data included in the variable effect start command and information about the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status and symbol information indicating the symbol as the result of the hit determination process for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. The game status information and symbol information acquired here can be referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The core effect pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and movement of specified characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, and the lighting control of lamps). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effects and pre-reading effects on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern by referencing the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram illustrating the core effect pattern determination table T52. In Figure 42, multiple types of core effect patterns that produce normal reach effects, multiple types of core effect patterns that produce SP1 effects, multiple types of core effect patterns that produce SP2 effects, multiple types of core effect patterns that produce SP3 effects, and multiple types of core effect patterns that produce no-reach, miss effects are set. The type of core effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", a core effect pattern that produces an SP1 effect is selected. Also, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a core effect pattern that produces a no-reach, miss effect is selected.

Returning to Figure 41, after determining the core effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining additional effects to be superimposed on the variable effects. The effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the obtained random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram illustrating the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of special chart 1 when the time-saving mode is not active is shown. In other words, Figure 43 shows the chance-up effect patterns that are executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16." Note that the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P33," "P41" to "P56," or "61" to "73."

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns are set as "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs count effect pattern determination processing (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination processing is processing for displaying on the display screen 7a the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the special mode, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time-saving mode, the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the number of fluctuations since the power was turned on, the number of fluctuations since the jackpot game was played, etc. During the special mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of fluctuations on the display screen 7a based on the value of the special mode effect counter. Furthermore, during the time-saving mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of fluctuations based on the value of the time-saving effect counter.

The effect control microcomputer 91 can also execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the overnight effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the number of remaining variations until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight effect counter records the number of variations since power-on. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of variations since power-on by incrementing the overnight effect counter each time it receives a variable effect end command from the main control board 80. When the value of the overnight effect counter is TH1 (e.g., TH1 = 10), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2 (e.g., TH2 = 200). If the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. This allows a player who sees the chance image to recognize that the gaming machine 1 is carrying over the number of games played from the previous day and that RAM has not been cleared. The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH3 (e.g., TH3 = 50). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also erase the display or chance image indicating the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH4 (e.g., TH4 = 100). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH5 (e.g., TH5 = 200). The performance control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling performance counter based on the value of the overnight performance counter, as described above, or may also determine the same based on the value of the ceiling performance counter. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (e.g., TH6 = 100), may turn off the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (e.g., TH7 = 70), and may display the value of the ceiling effect counter again when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (e.g., TH8 = 50).

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed as stopped symbols. This determines the type of effect to be used as a variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable effect timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) corresponding to the variable effect pattern included in the variable effect start command. For example, when the variable effect pattern is "P1," the variable effect timer is set to "40 seconds."

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the processing during the variable effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not a variable effect is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable effect timer has reached zero. If a variable effect is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a variable effect is in progress (step S4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set a pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 uses to notify the image control board 100 and other devices that a specific timing has occurred during the variable effect. Upon receiving the pre-variation end command, the image control board 100 switches the effect content, displays a specific image, or performs other actions according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set a pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the time to set a pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command not including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the corresponding variation effect. The image control microcomputer 101 then starts a preview effect that displays a preview effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no preview effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect that fades the preview image.

9. Operation of Movable Body and Display Performance of Sub-Display Screen 64 Using Figures 46 to 50, the operation of the board movable body (first movable role device 14, second movable role device 15), the operation of the frame movable body (frame movable role device 69), and the display performance of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role device 14, second movable role device 15, and frame movable role device 69 during game performance (display performance) and in initial operation when powered on. The performance control microcomputer 91 also performs display performance to display a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during game performance (display performance) and in initial operation when powered on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable part 14. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the first movable part 14. The first movable part 14 is a vertically elongated rod-shaped member, with its upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and its lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper and lower ends of the first movable part 14 are difficult to see, while the central portion is visible in front of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable part 14 can be stationary in a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, only a portion of the first movable part 14 may be retracted, leaving the remainder visible, or the entire part may be retracted, making it difficult to see. As shown in Figure 46, the first movable part 14 is configured to be movable left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable prop 14 is configured to move (advance) from a retracted position toward the right edge of the display screen 7a and move left and right in front of the display screen 7a. It can also stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement pattern of the first movable prop 14 can be set arbitrarily. As shown in Figure 47, the first movable prop 14 can move to the right edge of the display screen 7a and stop at that position (second pattern). At least a portion of the first movable prop 14 may be formed with a decorative part, or may be transparent.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable part 15 can be stopped in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a portion of the second movable part 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable part 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stopped in the extended position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops in front of the image display device 7, covering the center of the display screen 7a. By moving upward (retracting) from the extended position shown in Figure 48, the second movable part 15 can move to the retracted position shown in Figure 1 and stop there.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the movable frame device 69. The movable frame device 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on both the left and right sides of the handle 60, each of which is configured to be movable left and right. The two members are made of flexible material, and one main surface of each member is configured to move toward and away from the handle 60. As shown in Figure 1, the two members of the movable frame device 69 normally remain stationary in retracted positions (home positions) on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively, away from the handle 60 (first mode). As shown in Figure 49, the two members of the movable frame device 69 can move (advance) from their retracted positions toward the handle 60, i.e., move toward each other, and can each remain stationary in a position that touches the handle 60 (second mode). When in the advanced position, the movable frame device 69 comes into contact with the handle 60 or the player's right hand while operating the handle 60. The movable frame accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two components move away from each other, so that it changes from the second position to the first position.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating display effects on the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. They can also display effects linked to the images on the display screen 7a.

10. Examples of Presentation, Effect, Modification, and Mode of the Present Embodiment Below, each example of presentation (display presentation example, role-moving presentation example) of the present embodiment will be described. Also, examples of effects, modifications, and modes for the presentation examples will be described. As described above, the presentations described below are presentations realized by the presentation control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. The following display presentation examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. Furthermore, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display presentation examples.

The following explains symbol duplication movement effects A to C using Figures 51 to 53. These symbol duplication movement effects are executed during decorative symbol variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a symbol duplication movement effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pattern duplication and movement effect A]
51 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect A. The symbol duplication movement effect is an effect in which, after one symbol of a set of decorative symbols stops during the special symbol change, other symbols are duplicated and appear from the stopped symbol, and move toward the stopping position of the other symbols. In the symbol duplication movement effect A, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a while the special symbol is changing. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also a display in which they are invisible due to their high speed movement.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the static display of the set of symbols announces the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is statically displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the center decorative symbol 8C is statically displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is statically displayed in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the left decorative symbol 8L after it changes, the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the middle decorative symbol 8C after it changes, and the second area A2 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the right decorative symbol 8R after it changes. Also, here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state) and the special symbol 1 change is being executed. Also, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 51 (A). Here, the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L enters the frame from the top of the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is displayed as a stopped symbol in the first area A1.

As shown in Figure 51 (B), a right decorative pattern 8R appears from a left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a right decorative pattern 8R of "3", which is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, an effect is executed in which the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L.

As shown in Figure 51 (C), the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R, which is duplicated from the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Figure 51 (C) shows the state in which the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2. The "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R remains translucent while moving rightward.

As shown in Figure 51 (D), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving to the right does not stop in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, but passes through the second area A2 and frames out of the display screen 7a. This notifies the user that the right decorative pattern 8R will not stop at this "3."

A new right decorative pattern 8R appears from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is frozen in place in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a right decorative pattern 8R of "4", which is different from the previous "3", appears translucently from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, a variable effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R emerges from the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 and moves successively to the right.

As shown in Figure 51 (E), the "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R, which is copied from the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Figure 51 (E) shows the state in which the "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2. The "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R remains translucent while moving rightward.

Meanwhile, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is frozen and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a right decorative pattern 8R of "5", which is different from the previous pattern "4", appears translucently from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In this way, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a variable effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R emerges from the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 and moves successively to the right.

As shown in Figure 51 (F), the "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving to the right does not stop in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, but passes through the second area A2 and frames out of the display screen 7a. This notifies the user that the right decorative pattern 8R will not be stopped at this "4." The "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which was duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Figure 51 (F) shows the state in which the "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2.

Meanwhile, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is frozen and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a right decorative pattern 8R of "3," different from the previous pattern "5," appears translucently from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In this way, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a variable effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R emerges from the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 and moves successively to the right. Furthermore, the right decorative pattern 8R that appears from the left decorative pattern 8L in this way does not appear in a predetermined numerical order such as "3," "4," "5," and "6," but may appear in a random numerical order.

As shown in Figure 51 (G), the "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving to the right does not stop in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, but passes through the second area A2 and frames out of the display screen 7a. This notifies the user that the right decorative pattern 8R will not be stopped at this "5." The "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which was duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Figure 51 (G) shows the state in which the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward toward the second area A2 and passes through the third area A3.

Meanwhile, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is frozen and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a right decorative pattern 8R of "6," which is different from the previous "3," appears translucently from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In this way, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a variable effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R emerges from the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 and moves successively to the right. Furthermore, the right decorative pattern 8R that appears from the left decorative pattern 8L in this way may appear in a random numerical order.

As shown in Figure 51 (H), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is moving to the right, stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stops at the "3", and it is announced that a reach state has been reached. The "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Figure 51 (H) shows the state in which the "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2.

Meanwhile, a new right decorative pattern 8R appears from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is frozen and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a right decorative pattern 8R of "2," which is different from the previous pattern "6," appears translucently from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In this way, an effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R is successively duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a variable effect is executed in which the right decorative pattern 8R emerges from the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 and moves successively to the right. Furthermore, the right decorative pattern 8R that appears from the left decorative pattern 8L in this way may appear in a random numerical order.

As shown in Figure 51 (I), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, and the "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving to the right does not stop in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, but passes through the second area A2 and frames out of the display screen 7a. Similarly, the "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which was duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second area A2 and frames out of the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 51 (J), a middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1. Specifically, a middle decorative pattern 8C of "3", which is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, an effect is executed in which the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L.

As shown in Figure 51 (K), the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. Here, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward, and then passes through the second area A2 and frames out. The "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8R remains translucent while moving rightward.

Meanwhile, a new middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a middle decorative pattern 8C of "4", which is different from the previous "3", appears translucently from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In this way, an effect is executed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is successively duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a variable effect is executed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C emerges from the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 and moves successively to the right.

As shown in Figure 51 (L), the "4" in the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is copied from the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the third area A3 of the display screen 7a and stops in the third area A3. This notifies the player that the middle decorative pattern 8C has been confirmed and stopped at "4." Furthermore, as a result of the middle decorative pattern 8C being confirmed and stopped, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a "343" losing combination, and the result of the win or loss is notified. Furthermore, if a "3" stops on the middle decorative pattern 8C, a jackpot of "333" is notified.

[Pattern duplication and movement effect B]
52 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect B. The symbol duplication movement effect is an effect in which, after one symbol of a set of decorative symbols stops during the special symbol change, other symbols are duplicated and appear from the stopped symbol, and move toward the stopping position of the other symbols. In the symbol duplication movement effect B, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a while the special symbol is changing. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also a display in which they are invisible due to their high speed movement.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the static display of the set of symbols announces the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is statically displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the center decorative symbol 8C is statically displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is statically displayed in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the left decorative symbol 8L after it changes, the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the middle decorative symbol 8C after it changes, and the second area A2 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the right decorative symbol 8R after it changes. Also, here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state) and the special symbol 1 change is being executed. Also, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 52 (A). Here, the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L enters the frame from the top of the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is displayed as a stopped symbol in the first area A1.

As shown in Figure 52 (B), a right decorative pattern 8R appears from a left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a right decorative pattern 8R of "3", which is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, an effect is executed in which the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L.

As shown in Figure 52 (C), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which is copied from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. As shown in Figures 52 (C) to (E), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R changes from "3" to another pattern (number) as it rotates horizontally. Here, the pattern (number) changes with each horizontal rotation. As it rotates horizontally, the right decorative pattern 8R changes its pattern in the order "3," "2," "1," etc., passing through the third area A3 and moving into the second area A2. In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R moves rightward while changing its pattern. Note that as it starts to move rightward, the right decorative pattern 8R changes from translucent to a normal color and maintains its normal color as it rotates horizontally (changing).

As shown in Figure 52 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R, which is moving to the right while rotating (changing) horizontally, stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R stops at the symbol (number) displayed when it stops in the second area A2. In this case, it stops at "3". As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is confirmed to stop at "3", and it is announced that a reach state has been reached.

As shown in Figure 52 (G), a middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a middle decorative pattern 8C of "3", which is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, here, an effect is executed in which the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L.

As shown in Figure 52 (H), the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is copied from the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. As shown in Figures 52 (H) to (I), the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from "3" to another pattern (number) as it rotates horizontally. Here, the pattern (number) changes with each horizontal rotation. As it rotates horizontally, the middle decorative pattern 8C randomly changes its pattern from "3," "8," "5," etc., and moves to the third area A3. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves rightward while fluctuating in its pattern. Note that when the middle decorative pattern 8C starts moving rightward, it changes from translucent to a normal color and maintains its normal color as it rotates horizontally (fluctuating).

As shown in Figure 52 (J), the central decorative symbol 8C, which is moving to the right while rotating (changing) horizontally, stops in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. The central decorative symbol 8C stops at the symbol (number) displayed when it stopped in the third area A3. In this case, it stops at "5". This notifies the player that the central decorative symbol 8C has been confirmed to stop at "5". Furthermore, as a result of the central decorative symbol 8C being confirmed to stop, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as having been confirmed to stop at "353", which is a losing number, and the result of the win or loss is notified. Furthermore, if a "3" stops on the central decorative symbol 8C, a jackpot of "333" is notified.

Figures 52(K) to (L) are modified versions of Figures 52(C) to (E). In Figures 52(C) to (E), the right decorative pattern 8R changes from the (number of) "3" to another pattern (number) while rotating horizontally. However, the manner in which the right decorative pattern 8R changes is not limited to the above. In Figures 52(K) to (L), the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right while changing its pattern vertically. Such a configuration is also possible.

[Pattern duplication movement effect C]
53 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect C. The symbol duplication movement effect is an effect in which, after one symbol of a set of decorative symbols stops during the special symbol change, other symbols are duplicated and appear from the stopped symbol, and move toward the stopping position of the other symbols. In the symbol duplication movement effect C, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a while the special symbol is changing. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also a display in which they are invisible due to their high speed movement.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the static display of the set of symbols announces the special symbol lottery result. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is statically displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the center decorative symbol 8C is statically displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is statically displayed in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the left decorative symbol 8L after it changes, the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the middle decorative symbol 8C after it changes, and the second area A2 of the display screen 7a is the stop position of the right decorative symbol 8R after it changes. Also, here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state) and the special symbol 1 change is being executed. Also, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 53 (A). Here, the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L enters the frame from the top of the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is displayed as a stopped symbol in the first area A1.

As shown in Figure 53 (B), a right decorative pattern 8R appears from a left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a right decorative pattern 8R of "3", which is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, an effect is executed in which the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L.

As shown in Figure 53 (C), the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R, which is copied from the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Figure 53 (C) shows the state in which the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R passes through the third area A3 while moving rightward toward the second area A2. When the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R starts to move rightward, it changes from translucent to a normal color and moves while maintaining its normal color.

As shown in Figure 53 (D), the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R moving to the right stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. When the right decorative pattern 8R stops in the second area A2, a button image BTN is displayed superimposed on the stopped right decorative pattern 8R. The button image BTN is an image that resembles the outline of the effect button 63, and encourages the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the button image BTN may disappear and the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at a fixed "3," as shown in Figure 53(E), or the button image BTN may disappear and the right decorative pattern 8R may rotate horizontally and stop at a pattern (number) other than "3," as shown in Figures 53(J) to (K). Figures 53(J) to (K) show a state in which the right decorative pattern 8R rotates horizontally and stops at a fixed "4." In Figure 53(E), the right decorative pattern 8R stops at a fixed "3," and it is announced that a reach state has been reached.

After Figure 53 (E) or Figure 53 (K), as shown in Figure 53 (F), a middle decorative pattern 8C appears from the left decorative pattern 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C of "3", which is the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, appears in a semi-transparent state. In other words, here, an effect is executed in which the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is duplicated into the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C.

As shown in Figure 53 (G), the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is copied from the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, moves rightward toward the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. When the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C starts to move rightward, it changes from translucent to a normal color and continues moving while maintaining its normal color.

As shown in Figure 53 (H), the moving "3" of the central decorative symbol 8C stops in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a. When the central decorative symbol 8C stops in the third area A3, a button image BTN is displayed superimposed on the stopped central decorative symbol 8C. The button image BTN is an image that resembles the outline of the effect button 63, and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the button image BTN may disappear and the central decorative pattern 8C may stop at a fixed "3," as shown in FIG. 53(I), or the button image BTN may disappear and the central decorative pattern 8C may rotate horizontally and stop at a fixed pattern (number) other than "3," as shown in FIG. 53(L). In FIG. 53(I), the central decorative pattern 8C stops at a fixed "3," and a jackpot is announced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53(L), if the button image BTN disappears and the central decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally and stops at a fixed pattern (number) other than "3," a loss is announced.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the pattern duplication and movement effect.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can execute two effects: a first effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, one of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, stops in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 51(A), and a second effect in which, after the first effect, the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the left decorative symbol 8L that stopped in the first area A1, moves toward the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, and stops in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figures 51(F) to 51(H). This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects that visually entertain players and increase their interest. The same applies to Figures 52 and 53.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 51 (L), after the second effect, the center decorative symbol 8 stops in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have stopped can be used to notify the player of whether they have won or lost. This configuration allows for a new and innovative effect that is visually entertaining to the player and increases their interest. The same applies to Figures 52 and 53.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 52 and 53, in the second effect, when the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the left decorative symbol 8L, it represents the same symbol as the stopped left decorative symbol 8L. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 51, in the second effect, multiple right decorative symbols 8R appear consecutively from the left decorative symbol 8L, and each moves toward the second area A2, one stops in the second area A2, and the rest pass through the second area A2. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
53, in the second effect, when the right decorative symbol 8R that appears from the left decorative symbol 8L reaches the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed, and when the player operates the effect button 63, the symbol that appears may be the same as when the right decorative symbol 8R appeared, or may be a different symbol. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second effect, the right decorative symbol 8R moves while fluctuating as it appears from the left decorative symbol 8L and moves toward the second area A2, as shown in Figure 52. This configuration allows for a novel effect that has never been seen before to visually entertain the player and increase their interest.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the pattern duplication movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol copy movement performance A, the right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C copied from the left decorative symbol 8L are set to have the symbols (numbers) unchanged after copying. However, after copying, the symbols (numbers) may be changed and displayed variably while moving to the right.
In the symbol duplication movement effects B and C, the right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C duplicated from the left decorative symbol 8L are assumed to be the same symbol (number) as the left decorative symbol 8L. However, the duplicated right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C may be different symbols (numbers) from the left decorative symbol 8L. For example, the right decorative symbol 8R may be a "4" that appears from the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L.

[Modification 2]
In the symbol duplication movement effects B and C, a right decorative pattern 8R and a center decorative pattern 8C are duplicated one by one from the left decorative pattern 8L, and each duplicated right decorative pattern 8R and each duplicated center decorative pattern 8C always stops in the second area A2 and the third area A3, respectively. However, as in the symbol duplication movement effect A, multiple right decorative patterns 8R and multiple center decorative patterns 8C may be duplicated from the left decorative pattern 8L. For example, in the symbol duplication movement effect B, multiple right decorative patterns 8R appear consecutively from the left decorative pattern 8L, each moving to the right while rotating horizontally, with one stopping in the second area A2 and the rest passing through the second area A2 and framing out. The same applies to the center decorative pattern 8C.

[Modification 3]
In the pattern duplication and movement performances A and C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which are duplicated from the left decorative pattern 8L, do not change their patterns (numbers) while moving to the right, but as in the pattern duplication and movement performance B, the patterns (numbers) may change while moving to the right.

[Modification 4]
In the symbol duplication and movement effects A to C, the right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C are duplicated (appear) from the left decorative symbol 8L. However, other symbols may be duplicated from other than the left decorative symbol 8L. For example, the center decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L may be duplicated from the right decorative symbol 8R, or the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be duplicated from the center decorative symbol 8C.

[Modification 5]
In the pattern duplication movement performances A to C, the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C may remain semi-transparent while moving to the right, or may change in color, shape, or size.

[Modification 6]
In the symbol duplication movement effects A and B, when the right decorative symbol 8R emerging from the left decorative symbol 8L reaches the second area A2, a button image BTN is displayed, and when the button image BTN is operated, an effect in which the symbol (number) changes may be performed, as in the symbol duplication movement effect C. The same applies when the center decorative symbol 8C emerging from the left decorative symbol 8L reaches the third area A3.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify winning or losing,
a first effect in which a first symbol, which is one of the set of decorative symbols, stops in a first area of the display means;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, a second symbol appears from the first symbol stopped in the first area, moves toward a second area of the display means, and stops in the second area of the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
After the second performance, a third symbol stops in a third area of the display means, and the winning or losing is notified by the stopped first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1 or A1-2,
In the second effect, when the second symbol appears from the first symbol, the second symbol represents the same symbol as the stopped first symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
In the second effect, a plurality of the second symbols appear consecutively from the first symbol, and each of the second symbols moves toward the second area, one of the second symbols stops in the second area, and the rest of the second symbols pass through the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates the appearance of an operation means;
In the second effect, when the second symbol that has appeared from the first symbol reaches the second area, the operation means image is displayed;
When the player operates the operation means, the second symbol may appear as the same symbol as when it appeared, or the symbol may change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
In the second effect, when the second symbol appears from the first symbol and moves toward the second area, the second symbol moves while fluctuating.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains the sequential pattern change effects A to C using Figures 54 to 56. These sequential pattern change effects are executed during the decorative pattern change effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the sequential pattern change effect, it reads corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and on the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). It also reads corresponding sound data from ROM 103 and outputs sound from the speaker 67.

[Sequentially changing symbol effect A]
54 is a diagram for explaining the sequential pattern change performance A. The sequential pattern change performance is a performance in which a set of decorative patterns is displayed in the previous stop pattern during the special pattern change, one of which changes and is displayed, while the remaining patterns remain stopped in the previous stop pattern, and then the remaining patterns begin to change sequentially. In the sequential pattern change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the static display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that special symbol 1 variation is executed when the game state is normal (low probability, low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figures 54 (A) and (B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped at "356" after the special pattern changes. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the changing icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C is consumed (disappears). Then, of the pending icons 9A lined up, the rightmost pending icon 9A begins to move toward the changing icon display area where the changing icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A shift and move. Then, the next special pattern change begins. After the next special pattern change begins, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display stopped at "356" for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) without changing their display position.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, as shown in Figure 54 (C). When the variable display begins, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and frames out without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which no other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. Note that the variable display here includes not only a display in which the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen moving at high speed, but also a state in which the pattern is not visible, and a state in which the variable display is not visible. Here, it is assumed that the variable display is not visible. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) maintain their static display without changing their display positions.

Next, as shown in Figure 54 (D), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and frames out. Here, the "6" that was displayed as a static display for the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and frames out without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which no other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R is also no longer visible. The remaining decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) remains displayed as a static display without changing its display position.

Next, as shown in Figure 54 (E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and frames out without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which no other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is also made invisible. As a result, the variable displays of all decorative patterns become invisible.

In this way, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin changing in the following order: center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R, and left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, the order in which the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop is the reverse of the order of left decorative symbol 8L, right decorative symbol 8R, and center decorative symbol 8C. Also, generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin changing, they all begin changing simultaneously, or in the order of left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. Even when the left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R begin changing in order, the right decorative symbol 8R always begins moving before the left decorative symbol 8L frames out. In this embodiment, once the first symbol frames out, the remaining symbols remain stationary. This provides a sense of surprise to the player, enhancing the game's appeal.

As shown in Figure 54 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as static symbols after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a state where they are not visible due to the changing display to a state where they all appear in a static display mode of "689." This can surprise the player. As shown in Figures 54 (F) and (G), in conjunction with the static display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed (disappears). Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost reserved icon 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift. Then, the next special symbol change begins. After the next special symbol change begins, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the static "689" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) without changing their display position.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner, as shown in Figure 54 (H). When the variable display begins, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and frames out without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which no other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. Note that the variable display here includes not only a display in which the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen moving at high speed, but also a state in which the pattern is not visible, and a state in which the variable display is not visible. Here, it is assumed that the variable display is not visible. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) maintain their static display without changing their display position.

Next, as shown in Figure 54 (I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "8" of the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and frames out without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which no other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the middle decorative pattern 8C is also no longer visible. The remaining decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) remains statically displayed without changing its display position.

Next, as shown in Figure 54 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and frames out without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which no other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is also invisible. As a result, the variable displays of all decorative patterns become invisible.

Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change in the following order: right decorative symbol 8R, center decorative symbol 8C, and left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change, they all begin to change simultaneously, or in the following order: left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols begin to change is reversed from the general order. Also, generally, even if the left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R begin to change in that order, the right decorative symbol 8R always begins to move before the left decorative symbol 8L frames out. In this embodiment, once the first symbol frames out, the remaining symbols remain stationary. This provides a sense of surprise to the player, enhancing the game's appeal.

In addition, in this embodiment, the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change with each change, preventing the player from predicting which symbol will disappear, allowing for a more enjoyable variation effect. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the first symbol frames out and the remaining symbols remain stationary, the timing at which the second symbol frames out and the remaining symbols remain stationary, and the timing at which the last symbol frames out are all executed in a constant rhythm. These timings are executed at equal intervals. Sounds are output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 when each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begins to change. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when the first symbol frames out, the remaining symbols remain stationary. Therefore, the intervals at which each symbol begins to change are longer than typical intervals. Therefore, if a short sound is generated when each symbol begins to change, the sound will be generated rhythmically three times, which will attract more attention from players.

As shown in Figure 54 (K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as static symbols after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a state in which they are not visible due to the changing display to a state in which they all simultaneously appear as a static display of "234." This can surprise the player. As shown in Figures 54 (K) and (L), the variable icon (the relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed (disappears) in conjunction with the static display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost reserved icon 9A among the lined-up reserved icons 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift. Then, the next special symbol change begins. After the next special symbol change begins, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display a static display of "234" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) without changing their display position.

[Sequentially changing symbol effect B]
55 is a diagram for explaining the sequential pattern change effect B. The sequential pattern change effect is an effect in which a set of decorative patterns is displayed in the previous stop pattern during the special pattern change, one of which changes and is displayed, while the remaining patterns remain stopped in the previous stop pattern, and then the remaining patterns begin to change sequentially. In the sequential pattern change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the static display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that special symbol 1 variation is executed when the game state is normal (low probability, low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figures 55 (A) and (B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped at "356" after the special pattern changes. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C is consumed (disappears). Then, of the pending icons 9A lined up, the rightmost pending icon 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A shift and move. Then, the next special pattern change begins. After the next special pattern change begins, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to move upward while displaying the stopped "356" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds). In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move in a direction (upward) different from the changing direction (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner, as shown in Figure 55 (C). When the variable display begins, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and frames out. Here, the "6" that was displayed stationary on the right decorative pattern 8R stops moving upward and moves downward to frame out without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which another pattern (number) frames in from above. Note that the variable display here includes not only a display in which the right decorative pattern 8R is visible as it moves at high speed, but also a display in which the pattern is not visible. Here, it is assumed that the state in which different numbers move at high speed from top to bottom is visible. Note that it may also be a state in which the pattern (number) is not visible, and only the vertical line caused by the pattern moving at high speed from top to bottom is visible. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and center decorative pattern 8C) remain stationary and move in a different direction (upward) than the moving direction (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (D), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C stops moving upward and moves downward without changing color or shape, framing out, and an effect is executed in which other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the middle decorative pattern 8C also allows the viewer to see patterns with different numbers moving rapidly from top to bottom. Note that the patterns (numbers) may not be visible, and only the vertical lines caused by the patterns moving rapidly from top to bottom may be visible. The remaining decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) remains statically displayed and moves in a direction (upward) different from the variable direction (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R and middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L stops moving upward and moves downward without changing color or shape, framing out, and an effect is executed in which other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L also allows the user to see patterns with different numbers moving from top to bottom at high speed. It is also possible for the pattern (numbers) to be invisible, and only the vertical lines created by the pattern moving from top to bottom at high speed to be visible. This results in all decorative patterns being visible in the variable display.

In this way, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change in the following order: right decorative symbol 8R, center decorative symbol 8C, and left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change, they all begin to change simultaneously, or in the following order: left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols begin to change is reversed from the general order. Also, generally, even if the left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R begin to change in that order, the right decorative symbol 8R always begins to move before the left decorative symbol 8L frames out. In this embodiment, once the first symbol frames out, the remaining symbols remain statically displayed. This provides a sense of surprise to the player, enhancing the game's appeal.

After a predetermined period of fluctuation, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped symbol, as shown in Figure 55 (F). Here, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped symbol (number) of "9". The left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C continue to display as changing symbols. After that, as shown in Figure 55 (G), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped symbol (number) of "8". The left decorative pattern 8L continues to display as changing symbols. After that, as shown in Figure 55 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol (number) of "6". As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a state in which they were displayed as changing symbols to a state in which they were displayed as stopped symbols (number) of "689".

As shown in Figures 55 (H) and (I), the variable icon (the pending icon in question) 9C is consumed (disappears) in conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost pending icon 9A among the lined up pending icons 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A shift and move. Then, the next special pattern change begins. After the next special pattern change begins, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to move downward while the stopped display of "689" continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds). In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the same direction (downward) as the changing direction (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in Figure 55 (J), the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C are simultaneously displayed in a changing manner. When the changing display begins, the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C move downward and frame out. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C frame out of the statically displayed "89" at a significantly increased downward movement speed without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. Note that the changing display here refers to the visible state of patterns with different numbers moving rapidly from top to bottom. It is also possible for the patterns (numbers) to be invisible, with only the vertical lines caused by the patterns moving rapidly from top to bottom being visible. The remaining decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) remains statically displayed and moves in the same direction (downward) as the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in Figure 55 (K), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L frames out at a much faster rate of downward movement without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L also allows the viewer to see patterns with different numbers moving from top to bottom at high speed. It is also possible for the pattern (numbers) to be invisible, and only the vertical lines created by the pattern moving from top to bottom at high speed to be visible. This makes all decorative patterns visible in the variable display.

Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so that the right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C change simultaneously, followed by the left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing, they all change simultaneously, or they change in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, multiple symbols change simultaneously, and then one symbol starts changing. Also, generally, even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start changing in order, the right decorative symbol 8R always starts moving before the left decorative symbol 8L frames out. In this embodiment, once two symbols frame out, the remaining symbols remain stationary. This provides a sense of surprise to the player, enhancing the game's appeal.

In addition, in this embodiment, the manner in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change with each change, preventing the player from predicting which symbol will disappear, allowing for a more enjoyable change presentation. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which each symbol frames out as it starts to change is executed at a constant rhythm. Here, this is executed at equal intervals. Sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 when each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to change. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when some of the symbols frame out, the remaining symbols remain stationary. Therefore, the interval at which each symbol starts to change is longer than a typical interval at which each symbol starts to change. Therefore, by generating a short sound when each symbol starts to change, the sound is generated rhythmically, which can attract more attention from players.

As shown in Figure 55 (L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as static symbols after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a variable display state to simultaneously appear in a static display mode of "234." This can surprise the player. In conjunction with the static display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed (disappears). Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost reserved icon 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift. Then, the next special symbol change begins. After the next special symbol change begins, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display static "234" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) without changing their display position.

[Sequentially changing symbol effect C]
56 is a diagram for explaining the sequential pattern change effect C. The sequential pattern change effect is an effect in which a set of decorative patterns is displayed in the previous stop pattern during the special pattern change, one of which changes and is displayed, while the remaining patterns remain stopped in the previous stop pattern, and then the remaining patterns begin to change sequentially. In the sequential pattern change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the display screen 7a displays the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved icon 9A, and the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the static display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that special symbol 1 variation is executed when the game state is normal (low probability, low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round (spherical) shape.

As shown in Figures 56 (A) and (B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped at "356" after the special pattern changes. In conjunction with the stopped display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C is consumed (disappears). Then, the rightmost pending icon 9A among the pending icons 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining pending icons 9A shift and move. Then, the next special pattern change begins. After the next special pattern change begins, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to move upward while the stopped display of "356" continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds). In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move in a direction (upward) different from the changing direction (downward) of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner, as shown in Figure 56 (C). When the variable display begins, the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward and frames out. Here, the "6" that was displayed stationary on the right decorative pattern 8R stops moving upward and moves downward to frame out without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. Note that the variable display here includes not only a display in which the right decorative pattern 8R is visible as it moves at high speed, but also a display in which the pattern is not visible. Here, it is assumed that the state in which different numbers move at high speed from top to bottom is visible. Note that it is also possible for the pattern (numbers) to be invisible, and only the vertical lines caused by the pattern moving at high speed from top to bottom to be visible. The remaining decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and center decorative pattern 8C) remain stationary and move in a different direction (upward) than the moving direction (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 56 (D), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C stops moving upward and moves downward without changing color or shape, framing out, and an effect is executed in which no other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not visible. In other words, here, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are configured to have different variable display modes. The remaining decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) remains statically displayed and moves in a direction (upward) different from the variable direction (downward) of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in Figure 56 (E), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L stops moving upward and moves downward without changing color or shape, framing out, and an effect is executed in which other patterns (numbers) frame in from above. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, like the variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R, allows the viewer to see patterns with different numbers moving from top to bottom at high speed. Note that it is also possible for the pattern (numbers) to be invisible, and only the vertical lines created by the patterns moving from top to bottom at high speed to be visible. This results in a variable display of all decorative patterns.

As such, here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change in the following order: right decorative symbol 8R, center decorative symbol 8C, and left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change, they all begin to change simultaneously, or in the following order: left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order in which the symbols begin to change is reversed from the general order. Also, generally, even if the left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R begin to change in that order, the right decorative symbol 8R always begins to move before the left decorative symbol 8L frames out. In this embodiment, once the first symbol frames out, the remaining symbols remain statically displayed. This provides a sense of surprise to the player and enhances the game's appeal. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to change in different ways. This provides players with an element of surprise and increases their interest.

After a predetermined period of fluctuation, as shown in Figure 56 (F), an effect is executed in which the manner of the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L switch from a visible variable display to an invisible variable display, and the middle decorative pattern 8C switches from an invisible variable display to a visible variable display. In this way, in this embodiment, the manner of the variable display changes while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed. Here, the manner of the variable display changes randomly over time, independently of each other. This prevents the variable display from becoming monotonous, providing enjoyment for the player.

After a predetermined period of fluctuation, as shown in Figure 56 (G), the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C are simultaneously displayed as stopped. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped "9" (number), and the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped "8" (number). The left decorative pattern 8L continues to display as changing. After that, as shown in Figure 56 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped "6" (number). As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a state in which they were displayed as changing to a state in which they were displayed as stopped "689."

As shown in Figure 56 (H), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the same position without changing position for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 second) after being stopped, and then, as shown in Figure 56 (I), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to move downward while the stopped display of "689" continues. In other words, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in the same direction (downward) as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moving (downward). This notifies you that a pseudo-consecutive reel will begin.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move downward for a predetermined period of time, the right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C are simultaneously displayed again, changing, as shown in Figure 56 (J). When the changing display begins, the right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C move downward and frame out. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C, which were statically displayed as "89," frame out at a significantly increased downward movement speed without changing color or shape, and an effect is executed in which no other symbols (numbers) frame in from above. Note that the changing display here includes not only a display in which the center decorative symbol 8C can be seen moving at high speed, but also a display in which the symbol is not visible, and a display in which the changing display is not visible. Here, it is assumed that the changing display is not visible. The remaining decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) continues to move in the same direction (downward) as the right decorative pattern 8R and center decorative pattern 8C and remains stationary.

Next, as shown in Figure 56 (K), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display begins, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward and frames out. Here, the statically displayed "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L frames out at a significantly increased downward movement speed without changing color or shape, and another pattern (number) frames in from above. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L also allows the visual appearance of different numbers moving rapidly from top to bottom. Note that the pattern (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line caused by the pattern moving rapidly from top to bottom may be visible. In conjunction with the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the variable displays of the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C change in the same manner as the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, the variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C, which was previously invisible, changes to a visible state, just like the left decorative pattern 8L. As a result, all decorative patterns become visible in the variable display.

Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so that the right decorative symbol 8R and the center decorative symbol 8C change simultaneously, followed by the left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing, they all change simultaneously, or they change in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, multiple symbols change simultaneously, and then one symbol starts changing. Also, generally, even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start changing in order, the right decorative symbol 8R always starts moving before the left decorative symbol 8L frames out. In this embodiment, once two symbols frame out, the remaining symbols remain stationary. This provides a sense of surprise to the player, enhancing the game's appeal.

In addition, in this embodiment, the manner in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change with each change, preventing the player from predicting which symbol will disappear, allowing for a more enjoyable change presentation. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which each symbol frames out as it starts to change is executed at a constant rhythm. Here, this is executed at equal intervals. Sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 when each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts to change. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when some of the symbols frame out, the remaining symbols remain stationary. Therefore, the interval at which each symbol starts to change is longer than a typical interval at which each symbol starts to change. Therefore, by generating a short sound when each symbol starts to change, the sound is generated rhythmically, which can attract more attention from players.

As shown in Figure 56 (L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as static symbols after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a variable display state to simultaneously appear in a static display mode of "234." This can surprise the player. In conjunction with the static display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the variable icon (the relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed (disappears). Then, of the reserved icons 9A lined up, the rightmost reserved icon 9A begins to move toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining reserved icons 9A shift. Then, the next special symbol change begins. After the next special symbol change begins, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display static "234" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) without changing their display position.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the sequential pattern change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 54(A), a first effect is displayed in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a static display. As shown in Figure 54(B), after the next variation of the special symbol variation that resulted from the first effect is initiated, a second effect is displayed in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a static display with the same symbol "356" as the symbol displayed in the first effect. As shown in Figure 54(C), after the second effect, one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a center decorative symbol 8C, is displayed as a static display, while the remaining symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) remain static. This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects that visually entertain players and increase their interest. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 54 (D), after the third effect, one of the symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that remain stationary, i.e., the right decorative symbol 8R, is further displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) remains stationary, thereby executing a fourth effect. This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects that can visually entertain players and increase their interest. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 54 (E), after the fourth effect, a fifth effect can be executed in which the remaining symbols (left decorative symbols 8L) that remain stationary are further variably displayed. This configuration allows for a novel effect that has never been seen before to visually entertain the player and increase their interest. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 54(H) to 54(J), a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. In the third effect, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner, while the center decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L remain stationary. In the fourth effect, the center decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner, while the left decorative symbol 8L remains stationary. In the fifth effect, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. This configuration allows players to enjoy a visually entertaining and exciting gameplay through innovative effects not previously available. The same applies to Figures 55 and 56.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 54, when one of the statically displayed symbols switches to a variable display in the second, third, fourth, and fifth effects, a corresponding sound is output from the speaker 67. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can entertain the player visually and audibly, thereby increasing the player's interest. The same applies to Figs. 55 and 56.
[Effect 6]
55 and 56, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed move in a first direction (upward) that is different from the direction of movement of the symbols (downward), and in the third effect, the remaining symbols that remain stopped and displayed (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) continue to move in the first direction (upward). This configuration allows for a novel effect that has never been seen before to visually entertain the player and increase their interest.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the sequential pattern changing effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the sequential symbol variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed even after the next variation starts after being stopped. However, they may be configured to disappear once at the start of the variation, and then the previous stopped symbol may be displayed again during the variation.

[Modification 2]
In the sequential symbol change effects A to C, the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change is started is random. However, the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change may be predetermined.

[Modification 3]
In the sequential symbol change effects A to C, a short sound is emitted when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change. Each short sound may have a different tone or length. Furthermore, a long sound may be emitted and the sounds may overlap.

[Modification 4]
In the sequential symbol variation effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed move upward after the special symbol variation starts, but the direction of movement can be set arbitrarily. For example, they may move to the right, left, or diagonally.

[Modification 5]
In the sequential symbol variation effect A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed do not move after the special symbol variation starts. However, they may move in the same way as in the sequential symbol variation effects B and C.

[Modification 6]
In the sequential pattern change performances B and C, the patterns that are supposed to have visible change displays may also be in a form where the change display is not visible.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify winning or losing,
A first effect in which the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed;
After the next variation of the special pattern variation in which the first performance is executed is started, the set of decorative patterns stopped and displayed with the same patterns as the patterns stopped and displayed in the first performance are displayed.
After the second effect, one of the set of decorative symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining symbols are maintained in a stationary manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
After the third effect, one of the symbols that are still displayed is further displayed in a variable manner, and a fourth effect in which the remaining symbols are still displayed can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-2,
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect can be executed in which the remaining symbols that are still displayed are further displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-3,
The set of decorative patterns includes a left decorative pattern, a center decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern,
In the third effect, the right decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the middle decorative symbol and the left decorative symbol are maintained in a stationary manner.
In the fourth performance, the middle decorative pattern is further displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative pattern is maintained in a stopped state.
In the fifth effect, the left decorative pattern is further displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-3 or A2-4 further comprises:
a sound output means for outputting a sound;
In the second effect, the third effect, the fourth effect, and the fifth effect, when one of the stopped symbols is switched to a variable display, a corresponding sound is output from the sound output means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the second performance, the set of decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed move in a first direction that is different from the direction in which the symbols move,
In the third effect, the remaining symbols that are maintained as stopped symbols continue to move in the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains decorative pattern special effects A to C using Figures 57 to 59. These decorative pattern special effects are executed during special pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern special effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Special decorative design A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special effect A. The decorative pattern special effect A is an effect that occurs during one change of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern special effect, as shown in FIG. 57(A), first, a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a first decorative pattern group display area XAA, a second decorative pattern group display area XBB, a reserved icon XC1, the reserved icon XC2, the reserved icon XD1, the reserved icon XD2, and a character CRA are displayed. The character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three frames lined up horizontally in succession, with a decorative symbol XA displayed in each frame. The decorative symbols XA are composed of a first decorative symbol XA1, a second decorative symbol XA2, and a third decorative symbol XA3. In the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the first decorative symbol XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative symbol XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative symbol XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. The first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify whether the win is a jackpot or a loss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes two frames lined up horizontally, with a decorative symbol XB displayed in each frame. The decorative symbols XB are composed of a fourth decorative symbol XB1 and a fifth decorative symbol XB2. In the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the fourth decorative symbol XB1 is displayed in the left frame, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 is displayed in the right frame. The fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 each include a number that serves as an identifier that can identify whether the result is a jackpot or a loss.

The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed vertically adjacent to the right side of the first decorative pattern group display area XAA; that is, the hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative pattern XA. The hold icon XC1 corresponds to the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed vertically adjacent to the left side of the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, i.e., they are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The hold icon XD1 corresponds to the hold icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of hold icons XC1 is two, the number of hold icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed as circles, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed as diamonds.
In the example of FIG. 57, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, which indicates that the number of holds is four.

In addition, a first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, and a second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. Jackpot symbols or loss symbols are formed on these reach lines, respectively.

During the decorative pattern change presentation, the decorative pattern XA in the first decorative pattern group display area XAA and the decorative pattern XB in the second decorative pattern group display area XBB are both currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 57 (B), decorative pattern stop effect 1 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 1, the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 57 (B), the first decorative pattern XA1, whose identifier is "1", is displayed as stopped. The second decorative pattern XA2, third decorative pattern XA3, fourth decorative pattern XB1, and fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 57(C), decorative pattern stop effect 2 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 2, the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 57(C), the second decorative pattern XA2, whose identifier is "7", is displayed as stopped. The third decorative pattern XA3, fourth decorative pattern XB1, and fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 57 (D), decorative pattern stop effect 3 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 3, the third decorative pattern XA3 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 57 (D), the third decorative pattern XA3, whose identifier is "5", is displayed as stopped. The fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently fluctuating. At this time, the decorative pattern XA displays the losing patterns of "1", "7", and "5" on the first reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in Figure 57(E), decorative pattern stop effect 4 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 of decorative pattern XB are stopped and displayed simultaneously. In the example of Figure 57(E), the fourth decorative pattern XB1, whose identifier is "1," and the fifth decorative pattern XB2, whose identifier is "7," are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern XB displays the losing symbols "1" and "7" on the second reach line LN2. Note that the first decorative pattern XA1 of decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of decorative pattern XB always stop at decorative patterns with the same identifier, and the second decorative pattern XA2 of decorative pattern XA and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 of decorative pattern XB always stop at decorative patterns with the same identifier.

[Special decorative design B]
58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special effect B. The decorative pattern special effect B is an effect that is performed during one variation of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern special effect B, as shown in FIG. 58(A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative pattern variation effect, a first decorative pattern group display area XAA, a second decorative pattern group display area XBB, a reserved icon XC1, the reserved icon XC2, the reserved icon XD1, the reserved icon XD2, and a character CRA are displayed.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three frames lined up horizontally in succession, with a decorative symbol XA displayed in each frame. The decorative symbols XA are composed of a first decorative symbol XA1, a second decorative symbol XA2, and a third decorative symbol XA3. In the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the first decorative symbol XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative symbol XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative symbol XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. The first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify whether the win is a jackpot or a loss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes three frames lined up horizontally in succession, with a decorative symbol XB displayed in each frame. The decorative symbols XB are composed of a fourth decorative symbol XB1, a fifth decorative symbol XB2, and a sixth decorative symbol XB3. In the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the fourth decorative symbol XB1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the fifth decorative symbol XB2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. The fourth decorative symbol XB1, the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify whether the win is a jackpot or a loss.

The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed vertically adjacent to the right side of the first decorative pattern group display area XAA; that is, the hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative pattern XA. The hold icon XC1 corresponds to the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed vertically adjacent to the left side of the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, i.e., they are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The hold icon XD1 corresponds to the hold icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of hold icons XC1 is two, the number of hold icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed as circles, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed as diamonds.
In the example of FIG. 58, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, which indicates that the number of holds is four.

In addition, a first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, and a second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. Jackpot symbols or loss symbols are formed on these reach lines, respectively.

During the decorative pattern change presentation, the decorative pattern XA in the first decorative pattern group display area XAA and the decorative pattern XB in the second decorative pattern group display area XBB are both currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 58 (B), decorative pattern stop effect 1 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 1, the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 58 (B), the first decorative pattern XA1, whose identifier is "1", is displayed as stopped. The second decorative pattern XA2, third decorative pattern XA3, fourth decorative pattern XB1, and fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 58 (C), decorative pattern stop effect 2 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 2, the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 58 (C), the second decorative pattern XA2, whose identifier is "7", is displayed as stopped. The third decorative pattern XA3, fourth decorative pattern XB1, and fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 58 (D), decorative pattern stop effect 3 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 3, the third decorative pattern XA3 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 58 (D), the third decorative pattern XA3, whose identifier is "5", is displayed as stopped. The fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently fluctuating. At this time, the decorative pattern XA displays the losing patterns "1", "7", and "5" on the first reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in Figure 58 (E), decorative pattern stop effect 4 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, fifth decorative pattern XB2, and sixth decorative pattern XB3 of the decorative pattern XB are stopped and displayed simultaneously. In the example of Figure 58 (E), the fourth decorative pattern XB1 with an identifier of "1," the fifth decorative pattern XB2 with an identifier of "7," and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 with an identifier of "5" are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative patterns XB display the losing patterns of "1," "7," and "5" on the second reach line LN2. The first decorative pattern XA1 of decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of decorative pattern XB always stop at decorative patterns with the same identifier, the second decorative pattern XA2 of decorative pattern XA and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 of decorative pattern XB always stop at decorative patterns with the same identifier, and the third decorative pattern XA3 of decorative pattern XA and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 of decorative pattern XB always stop at decorative patterns with the same identifier. In other words, the identifier stop pattern is the same for decorative pattern XA and decorative pattern XB.

[Special decorative design C]
59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern special effect C. The decorative pattern special effect C is an effect that is performed during one change of the special pattern. In the decorative pattern special effect C, as shown in FIG. 59(A), first, a decorative pattern change effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect, a first decorative pattern group display area XAA, a second decorative pattern group display area XBB, a reserved icon XC1, the reserved icon XC2, the reserved icon XD1, the reserved icon XD2, and a character CRA are displayed.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three frames lined up horizontally in succession, with a decorative symbol XA displayed in each frame. The decorative symbols XA are composed of a first decorative symbol XA1, a second decorative symbol XA2, and a third decorative symbol XA3. In the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the first decorative symbol XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative symbol XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative symbol XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. The first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify whether the win is a jackpot or a loss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes three frames arranged vertically in succession, with a decorative symbol XB displayed in each frame. The decorative symbols XB are composed of a fourth decorative symbol XB1, a fifth decorative symbol XB2, and a sixth decorative symbol XB3. In the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the fourth decorative symbol XB1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the fifth decorative symbol XB2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. The fourth decorative symbol XB1, the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify whether the win is a jackpot or a loss.

The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed vertically adjacent to the right side of the first decorative pattern group display area XAA; that is, the hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative pattern XA. The hold icon XC1 corresponds to the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed horizontally immediately below the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, i.e., they are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The hold icon XD1 corresponds to the hold icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of hold icons XC1 is two, the number of hold icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed as circles, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed as diamonds.
In the example of FIG. 59, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, which indicates that the number of holds is four.

In addition, a first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, and a second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. Jackpot symbols or loss symbols are formed on these reach lines, respectively.

During the decorative pattern change presentation, the decorative pattern XA in the first decorative pattern group display area XAA and the decorative pattern XB in the second decorative pattern group display area XBB are both currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 59 (B), decorative pattern stop effect 1 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 1, the first decorative pattern XA1 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 59 (B), the first decorative pattern XA1, whose identifier is "1", is displayed as stopped. The second decorative pattern XA2, third decorative pattern XA3, fourth decorative pattern XB1, and fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 59 (C), decorative pattern stop effect 2 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 2, the second decorative pattern XA2 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 59 (C), the second decorative pattern XA2, whose identifier is "7", is displayed as stopped. The third decorative pattern XA3, fourth decorative pattern XB1, and fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently changing.

Next, as shown in Figure 59 (D), decorative pattern stop effect 3 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 3, the third decorative pattern XA3 of the decorative pattern XA is displayed as stopped. In the example of Figure 59 (D), the third decorative pattern XA3, whose identifier is "5", is displayed as stopped. The fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 are currently fluctuating. At this time, the decorative pattern XA displays the losing patterns of "1", "7", and "5" on the first reach line LN1.

Next, as shown in Figure 59 (E), decorative pattern stop effect 4 is performed. In decorative pattern stop effect 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, fifth decorative pattern XB2, and sixth decorative pattern XB3 of the decorative pattern XB are stopped and displayed simultaneously. In the example of Figure 59 (E), the fourth decorative pattern XB1 with an identifier of "1," the fifth decorative pattern XB2 with an identifier of "7," and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 with an identifier of "5" are stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative patterns XB display the losing patterns of "1," "7," and "5" on the second reach line LN2. The first decorative pattern XA1 of decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 of decorative pattern XB always stop at decorative patterns with the same identifier, the second decorative pattern XA2 of decorative pattern XA and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 of decorative pattern XB always stop at decorative patterns with the same identifier, and the third decorative pattern XA3 of decorative pattern XA and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 of decorative pattern XB always stop at decorative patterns with the same identifier. In other words, the identifier stop pattern is the same for decorative pattern XA and decorative pattern XB.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned special decorative pattern performance, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 correspond to each other, and the number of hold icons is used to represent the number of hold icons, but this is not limited to this, and the hold icon XC1 and/or the hold icon XD1 may represent the number of hold icons in a way other than the number of hold icons (for example, numbers).

In the above decorative pattern special effect, the hold icon XC1 is circular and the hold icon XD1 is diamond-shaped; that is, the hold icons have different shapes, but this is not limited to this and they may have the same shape. For example, the hold icon XD1 may be circular. The hold icons XC1 and XD1 may also have different shapes, colors, and other characteristics.

In the above-described decorative pattern special effects, in decorative pattern stop effects 1 to 3, the decorative patterns of the decorative pattern XA (first decorative pattern XA1, second decorative pattern XA2, and third decorative pattern XA3) are displayed stopped at different times, but this is not limited to this; the decorative patterns of the decorative pattern XA may be displayed stopped simultaneously. After the decorative patterns of the decorative pattern XA have stopped simultaneously, the decorative patterns of the decorative pattern XB also stop simultaneously. This stop effect in which the decorative patterns of the decorative pattern XA stop simultaneously, and then the decorative patterns of the decorative pattern XB stop simultaneously, is also referred to as a special decorative pattern simultaneous stop effect.
In a predetermined situation, the decorative symbol special effect may be performed to display the decorative symbols in a stopped state, and in a situation different from the predetermined situation, the decorative symbol special simultaneous stop effect may be performed. For example, when the game state is a normal game state, the decorative symbol special effect may be performed to display the decorative symbols in a stopped state, and when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probability variable game state, the decorative symbol special simultaneous stop effect may be performed.

[Example of effect]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern special performance, decorative pattern stop performance 3 is performed by stopping decorative pattern XA including decorative patterns XA1, XA2, and XA3, indicating whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and then decorative pattern stop performance 4 is performed by stopping decorative pattern XB including decorative patterns XB1 and XB2, indicating whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and when decorative pattern XA in decorative pattern stop performance 3 indicates a jackpot, decorative pattern XB in decorative pattern stop performance 4 also indicates a jackpot, and when decorative pattern XA indicates a loss, decorative pattern XB also indicates a loss. According to this configuration, the lottery result of whether or not there is a jackpot can be announced using two decorative symbols, namely, the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol XB, and furthermore, since the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol XB each announce the same lottery result, the lottery result can be emphasized to the player without confusing the player, and the player's interest in the lottery result can be increased more than when the lottery result is displayed only by the decorative symbol XA (or the decorative symbol XB). As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative pattern special effect, the decorative pattern XA has a first decorative pattern XA1, a second decorative pattern XA2, and a third decorative pattern XA3. When the decorative pattern XA stops in decorative pattern stop effect 3, the first decorative pattern XA1 stops, followed by the second decorative pattern XA2, and then the third decorative pattern XA3. With this configuration, the decorative pattern XA can be used to gradually reveal the lottery results of whether or not there is a jackpot to the player, increasing anticipation for the lottery results. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in decorative pattern special effect A, the decorative pattern XB has the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and when the decorative pattern XB stops in decorative pattern stop effect 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 stop simultaneously. With this configuration, unlike the decorative pattern XA, the decorative pattern XB stops simultaneously with the fourth decorative pattern XB1 and the fifth decorative pattern XB2, so the sense of anticipation that gradually increases as the decorative pattern XA stops can be climaxed by the simultaneous stopping of the decorative pattern XB. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in decorative pattern special effects B and C, the decorative pattern XB includes the fourth decorative pattern XB1, the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3. When the decorative pattern XB stops in decorative pattern stop effect 4, the fourth decorative pattern XB1, the fifth decorative pattern XB2, and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 stop simultaneously. This configuration can increase the peak of anticipation caused by the simultaneous stopping of the decorative patterns XB, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in decorative pattern special effects B and C, the decorative patterns included in decorative pattern XA and decorative pattern XB each have an identifier (e.g., a number), and in decorative pattern XA and decorative pattern XB, a combination of identifiers of multiple decorative patterns can indicate a jackpot or a miss, and the first decorative pattern XA1 in decorative pattern XA and the fourth decorative pattern XB1 in decorative pattern XB are configured with the same identifier, the second decorative pattern XA2 in decorative pattern XA and the fifth decorative pattern XB2 in decorative pattern XB are configured with the same identifier, and the third decorative pattern XA3 in decorative pattern XA and the sixth decorative pattern XB3 in decorative pattern XB are configured with the same identifier. With this configuration, since the corresponding decorative symbols XA and XB have the same identifier, the decorative symbols XA and XB can represent the same jackpot or loss, and the different stop timings of the decorative symbols XA1 and XB provide the excitement of announcing the same jackpot or loss with a time difference. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect that indicates a jackpot or a loss by stopping a first pattern including a plurality of decorative patterns,
The second display effect is a display effect that indicates a jackpot or a loss by stopping a second pattern different from the first pattern and including a plurality of decorative patterns,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination presentation, the first display presentation is performed, and then the second display presentation is performed, and when the first symbol in the first display presentation represents a jackpot, the second symbol in the second display presentation also represents a jackpot, and when the first symbol represents a miss, the second symbol also represents a miss.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
the first design includes the first decorative design, the second decorative design, and the third decorative design;
In the combination effect, when the first symbol stops in the first display effect, the first decorative symbol stops, then the second decorative symbol stops, and then the third decorative symbol stops.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
The second symbol has a fourth decorative symbol and a fifth decorative symbol,
In the combination effect, when the second symbol stops in the second display effect, the fourth decorative symbol and the fifth decorative symbol stop simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
The second design further includes a sixth decorative design,
In the combination effect, when the second symbol stops in the second display effect, the fourth decorative symbol, the fifth decorative symbol, and the sixth decorative symbol stop simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
The decorative designs included in the first design and the second design each have an identifier;
The first and second symbols may indicate a jackpot or a loss by a combination of identifiers of a plurality of decorative symbols;
The first decorative pattern in the first pattern and the fourth decorative pattern in the second pattern are configured with the same identifier, the second decorative pattern in the first pattern and the fifth decorative pattern in the second pattern are configured with the same identifier, and the third decorative pattern in the first pattern and the sixth decorative pattern in the second pattern are configured with the same identifier.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern alignment effects A to C are explained below using Figures 60 to 62. These decorative pattern alignment effects are executed during special pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern alignment effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern alignment effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol alignment effect A. The decorative symbol alignment effect A is an effect that occurs during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol alignment effect A, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is first performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of multiple decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each a group of decorative symbols. The decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether they are a jackpot or a loss. When decorative symbols with the same identifier (number) are displayed in the stopped state among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are displayed in the stopped state is also called a double-digit symbol. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed differently from the double-digit symbols, they become losing symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 60 (B), a left-right decorative pattern arrangement presentation is performed. In this left-right decorative pattern arrangement presentation, on the display screen 7a, multiple decorative patterns of decorative pattern 8L are arranged in the area from the center of the screen to the left, and multiple decorative patterns of decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the area from the center of the screen to the right. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged so that the five decorative patterns, numbered "4" through "8," are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter referred to as the first order). The five decorative patterns 8L are also arranged three-dimensionally, overlapping and aligned from the front side slightly to the right rear side (right rear side). The decorative patterns 8R are arranged so that the five decorative patterns, numbered "1" through "5," are arranged in descending order of numbers (hereinafter referred to as the second order). Additionally, the five decorative patterns 8R are arranged three-dimensionally, with the five decorative patterns lined up from the front to the back right (rear right), and overlapping each other. The first and second orders are permutations, but have different starting identifiers (numbers).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), decorative symbol selection presentation 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection presentation 1, ally character CRA appears between decorative symbol 8L and decorative symbol 8R, and selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, ally character CRA is positioned on display screen 7a between the middle number "6" of the five decorative symbols of decorative symbol 8L and the middle number "3" of the five decorative symbols of decorative symbol 8R. Selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2 are each rectangular frames, and their positions are controlled by ally character CRA. Ally character CRA randomly positions selection frame XB1 with respect to the five decorative symbols of decorative symbol 8L so that one of the five decorative symbols fits within the frame. Additionally, ally character CRA randomly positions selection frame XB2 for the five decorative patterns 8R so that one of the five decorative patterns fits within the frame. This depicts ally character CRA randomly selecting one of the five decorative patterns 8L using selection frame XB1, and randomly selecting one of the five decorative patterns 8R using selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in Figure 60 (D), decorative symbol selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, ally character CRA stops for a predetermined time with the same decorative symbol of the number "4" selected using selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in Figure 60 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the number "4" selected in selection box XB1 and the decorative symbol of the number "4" selected in selection box XB2, and the button image BTNX and ally character CRA are displayed. The button image BTNX is used to increase the chance of winning, and the word "Super Hot" is displayed on it. The ally character CRA performs various movements to add excitement to the effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 60 (F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to create a doublet to form a jackpot pattern.

[Decorative pattern alignment effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol alignment effect B. The decorative symbol alignment effect B is an effect that occurs during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol alignment effect B, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is first performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of multiple decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each a group of decorative symbols. The decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether they are a jackpot or a loss. When decorative symbols with the same identifier (number) are displayed in the stopped state among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are displayed in the stopped state is also called a double-digit symbol. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed differently from the double-digit symbols, they become losing symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 61 (B), a left-right decorative pattern arrangement presentation is performed. In this left-right decorative pattern arrangement presentation, on the display screen 7a, multiple decorative patterns of decorative pattern 8L are arranged in the area from the center of the screen to the left, and multiple decorative patterns of decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the area from the center of the screen to the right. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged so that the five decorative patterns, numbered "4" through "8," are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter referred to as the first order). The five decorative patterns 8L are also arranged three-dimensionally, overlapping and aligned from the front side slightly to the right rear side (right rear side). The decorative patterns 8R are arranged so that the five decorative patterns, numbered "4" through "8," are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter referred to as the third order). Additionally, the decorative patterns 8R are arranged three-dimensionally, with five decorative patterns lined up from the front to the right rear (right rear) and overlapping each other. The first order is a permutation, and the third order is a reverse order. The first order and the third order have different starting identifiers (numbers).

Next, as shown in Figure 61 (C), decorative symbol selection effect 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 1, ally character CRA appears between decorative symbol 8L and decorative symbol 8R, and selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, ally character CRA appears on display screen 7a between decorative symbol 8L and decorative symbol 8R, between the foremost number "4" decorative symbol of the five decorative symbols in decorative symbol 8L and the foremost number "8" decorative symbol of the five decorative symbols in decorative symbol 8R, and then moves toward the depth (from bottom to top on display screen 7a). When the ally character CRA appears between the frontmost number "4" decorative pattern of the five decorative patterns 8L and the frontmost number "8" decorative pattern of the five decorative patterns 8R, selection frame XB1 selects the frontmost number "4" decorative pattern of the decorative pattern 8L, and selection frame XB2 selects the frontmost number "8" decorative pattern of the decorative pattern 8R. Then, as the ally character CRA moves toward the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a), selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2 select the decorative pattern at the position corresponding to the ally character CRA. In the example of Figure 61 (C), the ally character CRA is positioned between the number "5" decorative pattern in decorative pattern 8L and the number "7" decorative pattern in decorative pattern 8R, so selection frame XB1 selects the number "5" decorative pattern in decorative pattern 8L, and selection frame XB2 selects the number "7" decorative pattern in decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 61 (D), decorative symbol selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, the ally character CRA moves and stops for a predetermined time with the same decorative symbol of the number "6" selected using selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in Figure 61 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the number "6" selected in selection box XB1 and the decorative symbol of the number "6" selected in selection box XB2, and the button image BTNX and ally character CRA are displayed. The button image BTNX is used to increase the chance of winning, and the word "Super Hot" is displayed on it. The ally character CRA performs various movements to add excitement to the effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 61 (F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to create a doublet to form a jackpot pattern.

[Decorative pattern alignment effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol alignment effect C. The decorative symbol alignment effect C is an effect that occurs during one variation of a special symbol. In the decorative symbol alignment effect C, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is first performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of multiple decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each a group of decorative symbols. The decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether they are a jackpot or a loss. When decorative symbols with the same identifier (number) are displayed in the stopped state among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are displayed in the stopped state is also called a double-digit symbol. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed differently from the double-digit symbols, they become losing symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (B), a left-right decorative pattern arrangement effect is performed. In this left-right decorative pattern arrangement effect, on the display screen 7a, multiple decorative patterns of decorative pattern 8L are arranged in the area from the center of the screen to the left, and multiple decorative patterns of decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the area from the center of the screen to the right. The decorative patterns 8L are arranged so that the five decorative patterns, "4," "5," "5," "5," and "8," are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter referred to as "fourth order"). The five decorative patterns 8L are also arranged three-dimensionally, overlapping and aligned from the front to the slightly rear right (right rear). The decorative patterns 8R are arranged so that the five decorative patterns, "4," "5," "5," "5," and "8," are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter referred to as "fifth order"). Additionally, the five decorative symbols 8R are arranged three-dimensionally, overlapping each other, from the front to the back right (rear right). In this way, the arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R each has a section where the same numbers are lined up consecutively.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (C), decorative symbol selection effect 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 1, ally character CRA appears between decorative symbol 8L and decorative symbol 8R, and selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, ally character CRA appears on display screen 7a between decorative symbol 8L and decorative symbol 8R, between the foremost number "4" decorative symbol of the five decorative symbols in decorative symbol 8L and the foremost number "8" decorative symbol of the five decorative symbols in decorative symbol 8R, and then moves toward the depth (from bottom to top on display screen 7a). When the ally character CRA appears between the frontmost number "4" decorative pattern of the five decorative patterns 8L and the frontmost number "8" decorative pattern of the five decorative patterns 8R, selection frame XB1 selects the frontmost number "4" decorative pattern of the decorative pattern 8L, and selection frame XB2 selects the frontmost number "8" decorative pattern of the decorative pattern 8R. Then, as the ally character CRA moves toward the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a), selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2 select the decorative pattern at the position corresponding to the ally character CRA. In the example of Figure 62 (C), the ally character CRA is positioned between the decorative pattern of the number "5" in decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern of the number "5" in decorative pattern 8R, so selection frame XB1 selects the decorative pattern of the number "5" in decorative pattern 8L, and selection frame XB2 selects the decorative pattern of the number "5" in decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (D), decorative symbol selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, the ally character CRA moves and stops for a predetermined period of time with the same decorative symbol of the number "5" selected using selection frame XB1 and selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the number "5" selected in selection box XB1 and the decorative symbol of the number "5" selected in selection box XB2, and the button image BTNX and ally character CRA are displayed. The button image BTNX is used as a chance increase and displays the word "Super Hot." The ally character CRA performs various movements to liven up the effect. In this way, in the decorative symbol selection effect of decorative symbol alignment effect C, the decorative symbols selected in selection box XB1 and selection box XB2 are more likely to be the same number than in the decorative symbol selection effect of decorative symbol alignment effect B, making it easier to enter a reach state. This functions as a chance increase, and decorative symbol alignment effect C is configured to have a higher chance of winning than decorative symbol alignment effect B.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are used to create a doublet to form a jackpot pattern.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern alignment performances B and C described above, the selection frames XB1 and XB2 move in accordance with the movement of the ally character CRA, and the decorative pattern to be selected changes; however, this is not limited to this, and instead of the ally character CRA, the selection frames XB1 and XB2 may also move in accordance with the movement of a specified object or a specified image, and the decorative pattern to be selected may change.
In addition, in the decorative symbol alignment effects B and C, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, but this is not limited to this, and the ally character CRA may move so as to overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, or may move behind the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, or may move beside the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In this case, too, the selection frames XB1 and XB2 move as the ally character CRA moves.

In the above decorative pattern alignment effect, the arrangement of the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in the left and right decorative pattern arrangement effect may be such that the order of numbers is random. Also, in the left and right decorative pattern arrangement effect, the number of decorative patterns 8L and 8R does not have to be five, but may be, for example, six or more. Furthermore, in the left and right decorative pattern arrangement effect, if the decorative patterns 8L and 8R all have the same number, it becomes a premium effect, that is, it may be a jackpot confirmation effect that always results in a jackpot.

In the decorative symbol alignment effects B and C described above, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stops on the decorative symbol 8L is selected using the selection frame XB1, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stops on the decorative symbol 8L is selected using the selection frame XB2, and the reach state is reached when the selected decorative symbols have the same number. However, this is not limited to this, and the reach state may also be reached when the ally character CRA moves between the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the decorative symbol in a position on the decorative symbol 8L different from the position where the ally character CRA stopped is selected using the selection frame XB1, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol 8L corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stopped is selected using the selection frame XB2, and the selected decorative symbols have the same number.

[Example of effect]
In the gaming machine 1, the decorative symbol alignment effect involves a left-right decorative symbol arrangement effect in which a decorative symbol 8L having multiple decorative symbols and a decorative symbol 8R having multiple decorative symbols are arranged, followed by decorative symbol selection effects 1 and 2 in which a predetermined decorative symbol from the decorative symbol 8L and a predetermined decorative symbol from the decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously selected. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the process leading up to a reach win, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine 1, in the decorative symbol alignment effect, if the decorative symbol selected from decorative symbols 8L and 8R in decorative symbol selection effects 1 and 2 are the same (in other words, they have the same identifier), a reach state is reached. This configuration makes the reach state visually appealing to the player, and increases anticipation of a jackpot in the reach effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine 1, in decorative symbol alignment performance A, in decorative symbol selection performances 1 and 2, decorative symbols 8L are arranged in a first order, in which the decorative symbols with identifiers "4" through "8" are arranged in order, and decorative symbols 8R are arranged in a second order, in which the decorative symbols with identifiers "1" through "5" are arranged in order. With this configuration, predetermined decorative symbols are simultaneously selected from two groups of decorative symbols with different orders, making the process leading up to a win more visually appealing to the player. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine 1, in decorative symbol alignment performance B, in decorative symbol selection performances 1 and 2, decorative symbols 8L are arranged in a first order, in which the decorative symbols with identifiers "4" through "8" are arranged in order, and decorative symbols 8R are arranged in a third order, in which the decorative symbols with identifiers "8" through "4" are arranged in order. With this configuration, predetermined decorative symbols are simultaneously selected from two groups of decorative symbols in which the decorative symbols are arranged in the reverse order, making the process leading up to a win more visually appealing to the player. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine 1, in the decorative symbol alignment presentation, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are arranged from the front to the back of the display screen 7a in the left-right decorative symbol arrangement presentation. This configuration allows the two decorative symbol groups (decorative symbols 8L and 8R) to be displayed three-dimensionally, making the decorative symbol alignment presentation appear more acrobatic. As a result, the entertainment value of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is a display effect in which a first decorative pattern group having a plurality of decorative patterns and a second decorative pattern group having a plurality of decorative patterns are arranged,
The second display effect is a display effect in which a decorative pattern in the first decorative pattern group and a decorative pattern in the second decorative pattern group are simultaneously selected,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
In the second display performance, when the decorative symbol selected from the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbol selected from the second decorative symbol group are the same, a ready-to-win state is reached.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
In the first display performance, the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group are arranged in a first order, and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group are arranged in a second order different from the first order.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
In the first display performance, the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group are arranged in the first order, and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group are arranged in the second order which is the reverse of the first order.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the first display performance, the first decorative pattern group and the second decorative pattern group are respectively arranged from a front direction to a depth direction of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Temporary stop symbol movement effects A to C will be explained below using Figures 63 to 65. These temporary stop symbol movement effects can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a temporary stop symbol movement effect, it reads corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that temporary stop symbol movement effect C will be explained assuming that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Note that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may become invisible after the change starts, but they are displayed moving in a specific direction (changing display) at least when the change starts and stops. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows, causing the left symbol 8L to temporarily stop. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows, causing the right symbol 8R to temporarily stop. Note that the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop simultaneously, or the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop first, followed by the left symbol 8L. In particular, the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R change in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y and then stop. Here, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, and the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. Additionally, the hold icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the change are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect in which the temporarily stopped symbol patterns 8L and 8R are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z, i.e., a direction different from the specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Here, the "1" symbol on the left symbol pattern 8L and the "2" symbol on the right symbol pattern 8R are shown moving in a downward and rightward direction. Also, here, new symbols, "5" and "6", which are different from the temporarily stopped "1" symbol on the left symbol pattern 8L and the "2" symbol on the right symbol pattern 8R, are framed in on the display device 7a. The framed-in "5" and "6" symbols are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z, the same as the "1" and "2" symbols.

Next, as shown in Figures 63 (D) to (F), a frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R, as well as the framed-in effect symbols, move and are then framed out.

Figure 63 (D) shows that the temporarily stopped "1" and "2" symbols, which are 8L and 8R, are partially displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z and out of the frame. At this time, the new symbols, "5" and "6", are also displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z.

In Figure 63 (E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved in the direction indicated by arrow Z. This shows that part of the "6" symbol is framed out. Following the new symbols "5" and "6", other new symbols, "4" and "9", are framed in and similarly moved in the direction indicated by arrow Z.

In Figure 63 (F), the new "5" and "6" symbols are completely framed out, and the new "4" and "9" symbols are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. Here, the "9" symbol is shown partially framed out. After this, the "4" symbol will frame out following the "9" symbol.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (G), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left and right effect patterns (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect patterns) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R both temporarily stop at the "3" pattern. Note that the direction of movement in this case is the specific direction indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Note that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may become invisible after the change starts, but they are displayed moving in a specific direction (changing display) at least when the change starts and stops. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time, or the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop first, and then the left symbol 8L may temporarily stop. In particular, the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R fluctuate in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y and then stop. Here, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, and the right symbol 8R is a "NEXT" symbol. The "NEXT" symbol is a pseudo-consecutive symbol that predicts the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the change icon 9C that were displayed when the change began will no longer be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect in which the temporarily stopped symbol patterns 8L and 8R are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z, i.e., a direction different from the specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Here, the "1" symbol on the left symbol pattern 8L and the "NEXT" symbol on the right symbol pattern 8R are shown moving and displayed in a downward and rightward direction. Also, here, new symbols, "5" and "6", which are different from the temporarily stopped "1" symbol on the left symbol pattern 8L and the "NEXT" symbol on the right symbol pattern 8R, are framed in on the display device 7a. The framed-in "5" and "6" symbols are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z, the same as the "1" and "NEXT" symbols.

Next, as shown in Figures 64 (D) to (F), a frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R, as well as the framed-in effect symbols, move and are then framed out.

Figure 64 (D) shows that the temporarily stopped "1" and "NEXT" symbols, which are 8L and 8R, are partially displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z and out of the frame. At this time, the new symbols, "5" and "6," are also displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z.

In Figure 64 (E), the new "5" and "6" symbols are further displayed and moved in the direction indicated by arrow Z. This shows that part of the "6" symbol is framed out. Following the new "5" and "6" symbols, another new symbol, the large "NEXT" symbol, frames in and similarly moves in the direction indicated by arrow Z. This large "NEXT" symbol is a horizontally long symbol composed of a different image from the temporarily stopped "NEXT" symbol. The large "NEXT" symbol is also a pseudo-consecutive symbol that predicts the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect.

In Figure 64 (F), the new "5" and "6" symbols are framed out, and the new large "NEXT" symbol is displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. Here, the large "NEXT" symbol is shown partially framed out. After this, the large "NEXT" symbol will completely frame out.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (G), a re-changing effect is executed. A re-changing effect is an effect in which a temporarily stopped effect pattern begins to change again, and is an effect included in pseudo-consecutive effects. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Note that the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be displayed after the change begins, but they are displayed as moving in a specific direction (changing display) at least when the change starts and stops.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

Although the re-changing effect is executed as shown in Figure 64 (G), it is also possible to have a pseudo-consecutive effect in which the effect continues after the frame-out effect as if the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have already changed again. In this case, as shown in Figure 63 (G), the re-changing effect may not be executed, and the reach formation effect may be executed immediately after the frame-out effect.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect C]
65 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement presentation C. Here, it is assumed that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.
First, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the display screen 7a shows the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starting to change and changing at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Note that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may become invisible after the change starts, but they are displayed moving in a specific direction (changing display) at least when the change starts and stops. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, second storage area, and third storage area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time, or the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop first, and then the left symbol 8L may temporarily stop. Here, in particular, the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R fluctuate in a specific direction indicated by arrow Y and then stop. Here, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, and the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. In addition, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C that were displayed on the display screen 7b at the start of the change will no longer be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (C), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect in which the temporarily stopped symbol patterns 8L and 8R are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z, i.e., a direction different from the specific direction indicated by arrow Y. Here, the "1" symbol on the left symbol pattern 8L and the "2" symbol on the right symbol pattern 8R are moved and displayed in the downward right direction, with part of the "1" symbol framing out, and the "2" symbol being displayed across display screens 7a and 7b. In other words, the "2" symbol is framed out of display screen 7a and framed in on another display screen 7b. In display screen 7b, part of the "2" symbol is also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by arrow Z. Also, here, new symbols, "5" and "6," separate from the temporarily stopped "1" symbol on the left symbol pattern 8L and the "2" symbol on the right symbol pattern 8R, are framed in. The framed-in "5" and "6" symbols are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z, just like the "1" and "2" symbols.

Next, as shown in Figures 65 (D) to (F), a frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R, as well as the framed-in effect symbols, move and are then framed out.

In Figure 65 (D), the "1" symbol, which is the temporarily stopped effect symbol 8L, frames out, and the "2" symbol moves in the direction indicated by arrow Z, with part of the "2" symbol framing out. At this time, the new symbols, the "5" and "6" symbols, also move in the direction indicated by arrow Z.

In Figure 65 (E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved in the direction indicated by arrow Z. As a result, part of the "5" and part of the "6" are framed out. In particular, part of the "6" is framed out of display screen 7a and framed in on display screen 7b. In display screen 7b, part of the "6" is also moved in the direction indicated by arrow Z. Following the new symbols "5" and "6", other new symbols, "4" and "9", are framed in and similarly moved in the direction indicated by arrow Z.

In Figure 65 (F), the new "5" and "6" symbols are completely framed out, and the new "4" and "9" symbols are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. Here, part of the "4" symbol and part of the "9" symbol are framed out. In particular, part of the "9" symbol has framed out of display screen 7a and framed in on display screen 7b. On display screen 7b, part of the "9" symbol is also displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z. After this, the "4" and "9" symbols are completely framed out.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (G), a reach formation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left and right effect patterns (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect patterns) are the same. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R both temporarily stop at the "3" pattern. Note that the direction of movement in this case is the specific direction indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the temporary stop pattern movement presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the effect symbols 8L and 8R among the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed moving in the direction indicated by arrow Z, which is different from the moving direction (the specific direction indicated by arrow Y) (FIGS. 63(C)(D)(E)(F), 64(C)(D)(E)(F), 65(C)(D)(E)(F)). With this configuration, the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R move in a direction different from the moving direction (the specific direction), which can surprise the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The change start effects (Fig. 63(A), Fig. 64(A), Fig. 65(A)), temporary symbol stop effects (Fig. 63(B), Fig. 64(B), Fig. 65(B)), reach formation effects (Fig. 63(G), Fig. 65(G)), and re-change effects (Fig. 64(G)) correspond to "symbol change effects", while the symbol movement effects (Fig. 63(C), Fig. 64(C), Fig. 65(C)) and frame-out effects (Fig. 63(D)-(F), Fig. 64(D)-(F), Fig. 65(D)-(F)) correspond to "symbol movement display effects".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, new symbols ("5,""6,""4,""9," and large "NEXT") other than the effect symbols 8L and 8R, which are the temporary stop symbols, are framed in on the display screen 7a (Figs. 63(C)(E), 64(C)(E), 65(C)(E)). With this configuration, new symbols other than the temporary stop symbols are framed in, which can surprise the player and increase their interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after new symbols ("5,""6,""4,""9," and large "NEXT" symbols) are framed into the display screen 7a, they are displayed moving in the same direction as the temporary stop symbols (the direction indicated by arrow Z) (FIGS. 63(C)-(F), 64(C)-(F), 65(C)-(F)). According to this configuration, the new symbols that have framed in are also displayed moving in the same direction as the temporary stop symbols, making the moving display more impressive and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbols 8L and 8R, which are temporary stop symbols, and the new symbols ("5,""6,""4,""9," and large "NEXT") are displayed in a moving manner and then frame out of the display screen 7a (7b) (FIGS. 64(D)-(F), 64(D)-(F), 65(D)-(F)). With this configuration, since the temporary stop symbols and new symbols disappear from the screen after being displayed in a moving manner, for example, by displaying them in a moving manner at high speed, a powerful effect can be created and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the "2" symbol, which is a temporary stop symbol, a part of the "6" symbol, which is a new symbol, and a part of the "9" symbol are framed out of the display screen 7a and framed in on the display screen 7b (FIG. 65(C)(E)(F)). With this configuration, the effect of the symbol movement across the display screens 7a and 7b becomes more impressive, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the "2" symbol that has been framed into the display screen 7b, a part of the new "6" symbol, and a part of the "9" symbol are also displayed on the display screen 7b in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. This configuration makes the movement of the symbols across the display screens 7a and 7b even more impressive, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol, which indicates the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect, is temporarily stopped and displayed as a moving symbol 8R (FIGS. 64(B)-(D)). Also, the large "NEXT" symbol, which indicates the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect, is displayed as a moving symbol and frames out (FIGS. 64(E)(F)). With this configuration, for example, the notice of the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect becomes more powerful, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the "NEXT" symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) as the temporary stop symbol is displayed in a moving manner and frames out (FIGS. 64(B)-(D)), the large "NEXT" symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) as the new symbol is displayed in a moving manner and frames in and frames out (FIGS. 64(E)(F)). According to this configuration, since the large "NEXT" symbol frames in after the "NEXT" symbol frames out, the notice of the pseudo consecutive effect stands out, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the temporary stop pattern movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol and the large "NEXT" symbol are used as symbols that announce the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance, but it is also possible to use the large "NEXT" symbol as a symbol that notifies the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance. Specifically, instead of executing the re-changing performance of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (the performance in which the temporarily stopped performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again), the large "NEXT" symbol is framed in and then framed out.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the configuration with the display screens 7a and 7b was described, but a configuration with three or more display screens may also be used. In this case, if the three display screens are arranged in a straight line and the temporary stop symbols and new symbols are moved in the direction of the display screens, the moving display of the temporary stop symbols and new symbols will be powerful, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 is described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but a similar effect may be produced using the sub-display screen 64. By using the sub-display screen 64, the moving display of the temporary stop symbols and new symbols becomes more impressive, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped symbols, and are displayed as moving symbols in a direction (the direction indicated by arrow Z) different from the direction of change (the direction indicated by arrow Y). In this regard, the performance symbols that are displayed as temporarily stopped symbols and are displayed as moving symbols are not particularly limited. For example, the left performance symbol 8L and the center performance symbol 8C may be displayed as temporarily stopped symbols and are displayed as moving symbols, or the center performance symbol 8C and the right performance symbol 8R may be displayed as temporarily stopped symbols and are displayed as moving symbols. Alternatively, all of the left, center, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed as temporarily stopped symbols and are displayed as moving symbols.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the direction in which the temporary stop symbols and new symbols are moved is the downward right direction of the display screen 7a (7b) (the direction indicated by the arrow Z). In contrast, the direction of the moving display is not particularly limited. For example, when the moving direction is the up-down direction, the moving display may be made to move left-right.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the temporary stop symbols and the new symbols are displayed moving in the same direction (the direction indicated by the arrow Z). However, the temporary stop symbols and the new symbols may be displayed moving in different directions.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the temporary stop symbols and the new symbols are displayed moving at the same speed. However, the temporary stop symbols and the new symbols may be displayed moving at different speeds.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
a display screen for displaying an image;
A gaming machine capable of executing a pattern change effect in which a plurality of pattern rows change in a specific direction on the display screen,
After the symbols of a predetermined row among the plurality of symbol rows have temporarily stopped, a symbol movement display effect can be executed in which the symbols of the temporarily stopped predetermined row are moved and displayed in a direction different from the specific direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1,
In the pattern moving display performance, a new pattern different from the temporary stop pattern is framed in the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2,
In the pattern moving display performance, after the new pattern is framed in the display screen, the new pattern is moved and displayed in the same direction as the temporary stop pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2 or A5-3,
The temporary stop symbols and the new symbols are moved and displayed on the display screen, and then frame out from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4,
The temporary stop symbols and the new symbols are framed out of the display screen, and then framed in on a separate display screen different from the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-5,
The temporary stop symbols and the new symbols are framed in the separate display screen, and then are displayed moving on the separate display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
At least one of the temporary stop symbols and the new symbols includes a pseudo-continuous symbol related to the execution of a pseudo-continuous effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-8]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-7,
After the pseudo consecutive symbols as the temporary stop symbols are framed out of the display screen, the pseudo consecutive symbols as the new symbols are framed in to the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Variable display effects A to C through transparent areas are explained below using Figures 66 to 68. In Figures 66 to 68, the second movable device 15, which is arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, has been omitted for clarity. Note that when the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15 is activated, the player is informed that there is a higher likelihood of a win occurring after the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative symbols has ended (i.e., after multiple decorative symbols have been stopped and displayed) compared to when the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15 is not activated. Furthermore, when the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15 is activated while multiple decorative symbols are aligned in a provisionally stopped display, the player is informed that there is a higher likelihood of a win that will provide a greater benefit to the player than when the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15 is not activated. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the first movable device 14 and the second movable device 15.

This variable display effect through the transparent area can be achieved by darkening the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 after the start and end (stop display) of the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative symbols (i.e., during the variable display of the decorative symbols), making a portion of at least one decorative symbol or a portion of at least two decorative symbols among the multiple decorative symbols visible through a transparent area having a predetermined shape, along with the background image. In other words, all areas except the transparent area having a predetermined shape are darkened, making at least a portion of the decorative symbols (a portion of one decorative symbol or a portion of each of two decorative symbols) being displayed variable along with the background image visible only through this transparent area. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a variable display effect through the transparent area is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a variable display effect through a transparent area is included, it changes the position and light emission mode of the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2. The variable display effect through a transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading effects, but rather the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute a variable display effect through a transparent area during the effect.

The various background images used in the decorative pattern change presentation (change display) can include, for example, city images, forest images, ocean images, seabed images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or videos. In this example, the background image is a video underground image.

Here, we will first explain variable display effect A through a transparent area, then variable display effect B through a transparent area, and then variable display effect C through a transparent area.

[Variable display effect A through transparent area]
First, the variable display performance A through a transparent area will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the variable display performance A through a transparent area. The variable display performance A through a transparent area can be performed by darkening the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 after the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns starts and before it ends (stops) (i.e., during the variable display of the decorative patterns), making a portion of at least one of the multiple decorative patterns visible together with a background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. In other words, the variable display performance A through a transparent area can be performed by darkening all areas except the transparent area having a predetermined shape, making a portion of at least one decorative pattern being displayed together with a background image visible only through this transparent area.

In this embodiment, the variable display effect A through the transparent area is triggered when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, and is performed during a game state known as a right-hand hit. During this game state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," and the image titled "Right Hand" is not obscured by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Furthermore, even when a transparent area (described below) appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the image titled "Right Hand" remains visible without any change in its display mode. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the top right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Note that the gaming state of right-hitting can include the state of transitioning to time-saving gaming after a jackpot, as well as the state of transitioning to so-called b-time saving (play time).

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there is a sub-variable area (not shown) in which small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green)) and will not change to other colors. The sub-variable area is positioned on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area so that it is the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, the other effect images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and will not obstruct the sub-variable area. In addition, the sub-variable area is positioned to the right of the fourth hold display position described later, so that it does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is displayed in a manner similar to that of the right decorative pattern 8R. Visibility is not obstructed by pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the fourth hold display position. Even if a transparent area (described below) appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the display mode of the sub-variable area (the display mode of the small opaque left decorative pattern, the small opaque middle decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern, which are the contents displayed in the sub-variable area) remains unchanged and can be seen. It is also possible to omit a background image from the sub-variable area. In this case, the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area, so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area is completely invisible.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same vertical line in the order from top to bottom.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserve icons, as shown in Figure 66 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 66 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the second special chart reserve is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserve display area is provided for the second special chart reserve. In this second reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserve display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, even if a transparent area (described below) appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can still be seen without any change in their display mode.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd through the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are still in stock. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 from this point on.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers, which represent the number of reserved balls, are displayed numerically, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, while the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are positioned behind the forefront (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images, so they are always visible even during the variable display display A through the transparent area. Furthermore, even if a transparent area, as described below, appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the display mode of these numbers (the color (blue numbers) of the number of first special symbols reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the color (red numbers) of the number of second special symbols reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21) remains unchanged and can still be seen.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, to briefly explain the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2, the second movable device 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape, with a character pattern (here, "ORGA") formed three-dimensionally on the same horizontal line, and has a character area 15a where the character pattern is formed, and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable device 15 is a decorative board (not shown) on the surface of which are mounted a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that illuminate the character area 15a in a predetermined light-emitting manner, and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that illuminate the rectangular area 15b in a predetermined light-emitting manner. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components soldered to the surface side of the decorative board. In other words, the surface side of the decorative board is the LED mounting surface. The back side of this decorative board (the side opposite the front side of the decorative board) is equipped with a dedicated LED driver IC (not shown), resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), and connectors (not shown) for gradation control of the multiple first full-color LEDs and multiple second full-color LEDs. The LED driver IC, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mounted electronic components and are soldered to the back side of the decorative board. In other words, the back side of the decorative board is the surface on which no LEDs are mounted. The LED driver IC is controlled by a control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the multiple first full-color LEDs and multiple second full-color LEDs are illuminated in gradations (on, blinking, gradation), allowing the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined illumination mode and the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined illumination mode.

The second movable device 15 is normally capable of remaining stationary in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and from its stationary state in the retracted position (home position), it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and remain stationary in an advanced position (deployed position) (second mode). When stopped in the advanced position, the second movable device 15 covers part of the image display device 7. When the second movable device 15 begins to move from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can indicate to the player that there is a high chance of winning. Furthermore, when the second movable device 15 is retracted in the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable device 15 can be easily seen.

As shown in Figure 66(A), when background image THG1 (here, an animated underground image) is displayed on display screen 7a as the background image, when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) ends, left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all displayed as still, and change icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a. Second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of display screen 7a. Even when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) ends, character area 15a of second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 remains lit in white. When the power is turned on to gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, the character area 15a of second movable device 15 is normally lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 is normally lit in white. In other words, the character area 15a of second movable device 15 is normally lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 is normally lit in white.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 remains lit in white, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins as shown in Figure 66 (B). When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(C), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state, rapidly changing in a display mode. Then, change display effect A through the transparent region begins. With background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on display screen 7a as the background image, the image changes from a bright state to a gradually dark state. A transparent region HR, a flat, circular, colorless, and transparent region, gradually appears as a transparent, closed, specific region in the center of display screen 7a (i.e., the changing region of center decorative pattern 8C). The transparent region HR has an inner region HRa that is colorless and transparent, and a boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR that glows and emits a predetermined color. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of a specified color at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a dark state to a bright state, resulting in a clear display mode.

When variable display performance A through the transparent area begins, the second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, while the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from lit in white to lit in blue. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the lit color of the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15. In other words, the boundary line HRc glows and emits light in blue.

Furthermore, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is displayed as a bright background image in the area excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (i.e., in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR), and gradually becomes darker. However, in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as when the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) began. In other words, when changing display performance A through the transparent region begins, the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker as the background image, excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a goes dark.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(D), as the background image THG1 gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is rapidly fluctuating in front of the background image THG1, becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the area excluding the inner region HRa and boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, so the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) cannot be seen, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, which are rapidly fluctuating in front of the background image THG1, cannot be seen. Also, at this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds), the rapidly changing central decorative pattern 8C slows down during this period, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and part of the decelerating central decorative pattern 8C becomes visible (here, the lower part of the number "2" is visible, followed by the central and upper parts, and the lower part of the number "3" following the number "2").

In addition, even when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a goes dark, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the small decorative patterns can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the number of first special symbols held based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols held based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) can be viewed without any change in their display modes, and the image "right hit" can be viewed without any change in its display mode. This is because, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground; in other words, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground of background image THG1 as the background image.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(E), the display screen 7a goes dark, and just before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a goes dark and the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears as the background image, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from bright to dark. In this display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from bright to dark, the blue glow at the boundary line HRc appears to glow unclearly, gradually fading from bright to dark. At this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

As the display screen 7a goes dark, background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually brightens and reappears as the background image, and the transparent area HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C) gradually changes from a light to a dark state, all of the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), middle decorative patterns 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), and right decorative patterns 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") have already slowed down and become opaque, and the display screen 7a is now in a state just before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporary stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (F), the background image THG1 (here, an underground image from the video) returns to being displayed brightly on the display screen 7a as the background image, and when the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", after which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and when the confirmation is displayed and it is a miss, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously temporarily displayed, and further, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the second movable part 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 is maintained in a yellow lit state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is changed from a blue lit state to its original white lit state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 lights up yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 lights up white, so that the character area 15a and rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 return to their normal illumination state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, background image THG1 (here, a video underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in blue, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins again. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd also begins to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. This results in two hold icons being stocked.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(H), the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state, rapidly changing in a display mode. As the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a changes from a bright state to a gradually darkened state, a transparent region HR, which is a colorless, flat, triangular, transparent region, gradually appears as a transparent, closed, specific region near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (i.e., the changing region of the left decorative pattern 8L). The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from the colorless, flat, circular, transparent region HR shown in Figure 66(C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a dark state to a bright state, resulting in a clear glow.

The second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, while the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from lit in white to lit in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color lit in the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15. In other words, the boundary line HRc is displayed in a shining red light.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is displayed as a bright background image in the area excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (i.e., in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR), and then gradually becomes darker. However, in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as when the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) began. In other words, the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker as the background image, excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a goes dark.

Next, as shown in Figure 66(I), as the background image THG1 gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the left decorative pattern 8L, which is rapidly changing in front of the background image THG1, becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the area excluding the inner region HRa and boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, so the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) cannot be seen, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, which are rapidly changing in front of the background image THG1, cannot be seen. Also, at this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines red and emits light continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds), the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L slows down during this period, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and part of the slowing left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible (here, the lower part of the number "2" is visible, followed by the central and upper parts, and the lower part of the number "3" following the number "2").

Furthermore, even when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a goes dark, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the small decorative patterns can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the number of first special symbols held based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols held based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) can be viewed without any change in their display modes, and the image "right hit" can be viewed without any change in its display mode. This is because, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground; in other words, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground of background image THG1 as the background image.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (J), the display screen 7a goes dark, and just before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a goes dark and the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears as the background image, and the transparent region HR displayed near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In this display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the red glow at the boundary line HRc appears to glow unclearly, gradually fading from a bright state to a dark state. At this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines red and emits light continues.

As the display screen 7a goes dark, background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually brightens and reappears as the background image, and the transparent area HR displayed near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L) gradually changes from bright to dark, all of the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), middle decorative patterns 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9"), and right decorative patterns 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") have already slowed down and become opaque, and the display screen 7a is now in a state just before the left decorative patterns 8L, middle decorative patterns 8C, and right decorative patterns 8R are displayed in a temporary stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (K), the background image THG1 (here, an underground image from the video) returns to being displayed brightly on the display screen 7a as the background image, and when the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", after which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and when this is displayed as a confirmed win and a miss, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously temporarily displayed, and further, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the second movable part 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 is maintained in a yellow lit state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is changed from a red lit state to its original white lit state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 lights up yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 lights up white, causing the character area 15a and rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 to return to their normal illuminating state. This ends variable display performance A, which takes place through the transparent area across the two variable displays shown in Figures 66(B) to 66(K).

After the variable display effect A through the transparent area ends, as shown in Figure 66 (L), the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume it. With background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in white, and the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) begins. As the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. No hold icons 9B are placed at the second hold display position 9Bd through the fourth hold display positions 9Bd. This will result in one pending icon being stocked.

The decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) begins, and then if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R do not line up as the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as still, it is a miss and the decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) ends. On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R line up as the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as still, it is a win, the decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) ends, and then the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins.

In this way, the variable display performance A through the transparent area spans two variable displays, Fig. 66(B) through Fig. 66(K). In Fig. 66(C) through Fig. 66(E), a transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, circular shape, appears as a transparent, closed specific area, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR glows and emits blue light. In Fig. 66(H) through Fig. 66(J), a transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, triangular shape, appears as a transparent, closed specific area, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR glows and emits red light. This is because, in the variable display performance A through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, transparent, closed specific area, is preset to have a higher probability of winning in the order of circular, triangular, square, and star shapes. As a result, as the variable display effect A progresses through the transparent area, the shape of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from a circle to a triangle, giving the player a sense of anticipation for a win, which helps to reduce the monotony caused by the changing decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 is preset to have increasing expectations of winning in the following order: white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of winning)). The colors of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR, which is the same color as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15, are also preset to have increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of winning)). As a result, as the variable display performance A through the transparent area progresses, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from blue to red, giving the player a sense of anticipation of winning, which helps to reduce the monotony caused by the changing decorative patterns.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance A through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays, Fig. 66(B) to Fig. 66(K), and in Fig. 66(C) to Fig. 66(E), the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat and circular shape as a transparent, closed specific area, appears, and the transparent area HR is illuminated in blue, the same color as the color of the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15, which is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) in the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the HR shines and emits light, and in Figures 66 (H) to 66 (J), the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, triangular shape as a transparent, closed specific area, appears, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines and emits light in red, which is the same color as the color of the light in the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15, which is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) in the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. In other words, even though the second movable device 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 is lit. Therefore, even if the second movable device 15 has not started to move, it is possible to give the player a winning expectation that is commensurate with (corresponding to) the winning expectation given to the operation of the second movable device 15, and this can contribute to creating a sense of anticipation for the changing display.

Furthermore, the variable display performance A through a transparent area spans two variable displays, shown in Figures 66(B) through 66(K). In Figures 66(C) through 66(E), the transparent area HR, a colorless, transparent, flat, circular area, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), while in Figures 66(H) through 66(J), the transparent area HR, a colorless, transparent, flat, triangular area, appears near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L). This is because the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display performance A through a transparent area during the performance, and the location where the transparent area HR appears when the variable display performance A through a transparent area is executed is also determined to be random. Therefore, there is absolutely no correlation between the location where the transparent area HR appears and the likelihood of winning. However, in this embodiment, the position where the transparent area HR appears can be set to a random position, allowing the player to determine the likelihood of winning based on the position where the transparent area HR appears, which also contributes to reducing the monotony caused by fluctuations in the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, when power is turned on to gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, as described above, in the normal state, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 lights up in white. In the variable display performance A through the transparent area, although it is performed across two variable displays, Figures 66(B) to 66(K), in Figures 66(B) to 66(F), the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role device 15 changes from a white lit state to a blue lit state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role device 15 changes from a blue lit state to its original white lit state, and in the next variation, Figures 66(G) to 66(K), the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role device 15 changes from a white lit state to a red lit state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role device 15 changes from a red lit state to its original white lit state. Variable display performance A through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading performances, but rather the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display performance through the transparent area during the performance. In other words, because the variable display performance A through the transparent area is actually performed across two variable displays, Figures 66(B) to 66(K), with just one lottery, it is possible to perform the variable display performance A through the transparent area as if it were determined by lottery by the performance control microcomputer 91 for each decorative pattern change. This makes it possible for the player to believe that there are multiple variations of the variable display performance A through the transparent area.

In the variable display performance A through a transparent region in this embodiment, in Figures 66(C) to 66(E), the transparent region HR appears as a colorless, transparent region that is flat and circular as a transparent, closed specific region. However, it may also be flat and triangular, or flat and rectangular. In Figures 66(B) to 66(K), the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be changed while maintaining its flat and circular shape.

In addition, in the variable display performance A through the transparent region in this embodiment, in Figure 66 (C), the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region that is a flat, circular, transparent, closed specific region, first changes from blue. However, it may also change from one of red, green, or purple, for example. Alternatively, in Figures 66 (C) to 66 (E) or Figures 66 (H) to 66 (J), the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region that is a flat, circular, transparent, closed specific region, first changes from blue to other colors multiple times (for example, blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.). Alternatively, in Figures 66(B) to 66(K), while maintaining the color of the transparent region HR as yellow (gold) or rainbow (rainbow color (high probability of winning a jackpot)), the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a specific transparent closed region, may be changed (for example, in the order of circle, triangle, square, and star shape; circle, triangle, square, circle, triangle, square, star shape; triangle, square, etc.), or the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a specific transparent closed region, may be maintained (for example, maintaining the circle, triangle, square, or star shape).

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display performance A through the transparent area is performed across two variable displays, Figures 66(B) to 66(K), but it is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading performances; rather, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute variable display performance A through the transparent area during the performance. However, variable display performance A through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the pre-reading performances. In this case, since variable display performance A through a transparent area is performed across two variable displays, Figures 66(B) to 66(K), the shape and color of the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd in Figure 66(A) is actually a blue spherical hold icon 9B as a result of the prediction, but by performing variable display performance A through a transparent area across the two variable displays, Figures 66(B) to 66(K), as a performance that matches (corresponds to) the expectation level of the blue spherical hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd can be deliberately made a white spherical hold icon 9B.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable display in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. However, there is a risk that a player may mistake the numbers displayed by the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern as a countdown initiated by the variable display effect A through the transparent area, and expect that this countdown will lead to the subsequent execution of an effect with a high probability of winning. Therefore, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable display.

In addition, in the variable display performance A through the transparent area in this embodiment, the number of first special charts reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) were positioned on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and were always displayed. However, there is a risk that the player may mistake the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) as a countdown initiated by variable display effect A through the transparent area, leading the player to expect that an effect with a high probability of winning will be executed after this countdown. Therefore, the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) may be positioned on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R so that they are always displayed.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance A through the transparent region in this embodiment, in Figures 66(C) to 66(E), when the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, circular region as a transparent, closed specific region, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the transparent region HR is fixed in this position without moving or rotating. Furthermore, in Figures 66(H) to 66(J), when the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, triangular region as a transparent, closed specific region, appears near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L), the transparent region HR is fixed in this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, it may repeatedly move up and down in small increments (up and down vibrations) around the position where it appears, repeatedly move left and right in small increments (left and right vibrations), repeatedly rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in small increments (rotational vibrations), or a combination of these display modes. In this way, the area visible through the transparent region HR changes, which increases the variety of effects created by the transparent region HR and helps reduce the monotony of the changing effects (changing display) of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance A through a transparent region in this embodiment, for example, in Figures 66(C) to 66(E), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, circular region as a transparent, closed specific region, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of a colorless, transparent, flat, circular region as a transparent, closed specific region, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be a transparent region HR, which is a colorless, flat, transparent region. In other words, the variable regions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually change from a bright state to a dark state, causing the display screen 7a to go dark, and ultimately, only the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C remains bright, allowing the background image and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which displays the variable area in front of the background image, to be visible only through the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C. This allows for more variation in the transparent areas HR, which helps keep the player's sense of freshness as they watch the variable display effects A through the transparent areas.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable display performance A through the transparent region is performed across two variable displays, Fig. 66(B) to Fig. 66(K). In Fig. 66(C) to Fig. 66(E), a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region that is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, circular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in blue, whereas in Fig. 66(H) to Fig. 66(J), a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region that is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, triangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in red. This is because, in the variable display performance A through the transparent region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region as a transparent, closed specific region, is preset so that the probability of winning increases in the order of circular, triangular, square, and star shapes. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region as a transparent, closed specific region, appearing in a circular, triangular, rectangular, and star-shaped configuration, the silhouettes of different characters may appear one after another in the following order: the silhouette of character 1, the silhouette of character 2, the silhouette of character 3, and the silhouette of character 4. The outline of each character's silhouette becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, the internal region of each character's silhouette becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the external region of each character's silhouette becomes the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR. In this case, the order of the silhouette of character 1, the silhouette of character 2, the silhouette of character 3, and the silhouette of character 4 is preset so that the probability of winning increases. Furthermore, instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region as a transparent, closed specific region, appearing in a circular, triangular, rectangular, and star-shaped configuration, the transparent region HR may appear so that the posture (pose) of the silhouette of a single specific character gradually changes. For example, the silhouette of a specific character taking a sword stance may appear in order. In this case, the probability of winning is preset to increase as the silhouette of the specific character progresses through the series of movements leading up to them taking up a sword.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable display performance A through the transparent region is performed across two variable displays, Fig. 66(B) to Fig. 66(K). In Fig. 66(C) to Fig. 66(E), a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region that is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, circular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in blue, whereas in Fig. 66(H) to Fig. 66(J), a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region that is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, triangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in red. This is because, in the variable display performance A through the transparent region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region as a transparent, closed specific region, is preset so that the probability of winning increases in the order of circular, triangular, square, and star shapes. Instead of the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area that appears as a circle, triangle, square, or star, as a transparent, closed specific area, the countdown may be performed using number images. The outline of the number image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR, the internal area of the number image becomes the inner area HRa of the transparent area HR, and the area outside the outline of the number image becomes the outer area HRb of the transparent area HR. In this case, the countdown using number images is performed in the order of the number "3" image, the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image. The system is preset so that the likelihood of winning increases as the countdown using number images progresses in the order of the number "3" image, the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in this embodiment, when the screen is darkened in Figures 66(D) and 66(I), the background image visible through the transparent area HR is background image THG1 (here, an underground image in a video), which is the background image before the screen is darkened. However, when the screen is darkened in Figures 66(D) and 66(I), the background image visible through the transparent area HR may be switched (changed) from the background image before the screen is darkened to another background image. In this way, the background image can be switched before and after Figures 66(D) and 66(I). In other words, by switching the background image during the change, the player can personally discover the relationship (pattern) between the background image changed due to the change and the winning/losing result, which can help prevent a decline in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to one of the city image, forest image, ocean image, seabed image, or underground image described above, or may be switched (changed) to one of a plurality of dedicated background images A1, A2, A3, etc. in the variable display performance A through the transparent area. In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images A1, A2, A3, etc. may be set in advance so that the probability of winning increases in the order of the dedicated background images A1, A2, A3, etc.

[Variable display effect B through transparent area]
Next, the variable display effect B through a transparent area will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the variable display effect B through a transparent area. The variable display effect B through a transparent area can be performed by darkening the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 after the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative symbols starts and before it ends (stops) (i.e., during the variable display of the decorative symbols), and making portions of at least two of the multiple decorative symbols visible together with the background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. In other words, the variable display effect B through a transparent area can be performed by darkening all areas except the transparent area having a predetermined shape, and making portions of at least two decorative symbols being displayed together with the background image visible only through this transparent area.

In this embodiment, the variable display effect B through the transparent area is triggered when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, and is triggered during a game state known as a right-hand hit. During this game state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," and the image titled "Right Hand" is not obscured by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Furthermore, even when a transparent area, described below, appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the image titled "Right Hand" remains visible without any change in its display mode. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the top right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Note that the gaming state of right-hitting can include the state of transitioning to time-saving gaming after a jackpot, as well as the state of transitioning to so-called b-time saving (play time).

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there is a sub-variable area (not shown) in which small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green)) and will not change to other colors. The sub-variable area is positioned on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area so that it is the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, the other effect images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and will not obstruct the sub-variable area. In addition, the sub-variable area is positioned to the right of the fourth hold display position described later, so that it does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is displayed in a manner similar to that of the right decorative pattern 8R. Visibility is not obstructed by pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the fourth hold display position. Even if a transparent area (described below) appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the display mode of the sub-variable area (the display mode of the small opaque left decorative pattern, the small opaque middle decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern, which are the contents displayed in the sub-variable area) remains unchanged and can be seen. It is also possible to omit a background image from the sub-variable area. In this case, the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area, so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area is completely invisible.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same vertical line in the order from top to bottom.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserved icons, as shown in Figure 67 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 67 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the second special chart reserved is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserved display area is provided for the second special chart reserved. In this second reserved display area, reserved icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserved display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, even if a transparent area (described below) appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can still be seen without any change in their display mode.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd through the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are still in stock. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 from this point on.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers, which represent the number of reserved balls, are displayed numerically, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, while the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are positioned behind the forefront (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images, so they are always visible even during the variable display display B through the transparent area. Furthermore, even if a transparent area, as described below, appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the display mode of these numbers (the color (blue numbers) of the number of first special symbols reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the color (red numbers) of the number of second special symbols reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21) remains unchanged and can still be seen.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, to briefly explain the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2, the second movable device 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape, with a character pattern (here, "ORGA") formed three-dimensionally on the same horizontal line, and has a character area 15a where the character pattern is formed, and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable device 15 is a decorative board (not shown) on the surface of which are mounted a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that illuminate the character area 15a in a predetermined light-emitting manner, and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that illuminate the rectangular area 15b in a predetermined light-emitting manner. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components soldered to the surface side of the decorative board. In other words, the surface side of the decorative board is the LED mounting surface. The back side of this decorative board (the side opposite the front side of the decorative board) is equipped with a dedicated LED driver IC (not shown), resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), and connectors (not shown) for gradation control of the multiple first full-color LEDs and multiple second full-color LEDs. The LED driver IC, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mounted electronic components and are soldered to the back side of the decorative board. In other words, the back side of the decorative board is the surface on which no LEDs are mounted. The LED driver IC is controlled by a control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the multiple first full-color LEDs and multiple second full-color LEDs are illuminated in gradations (on, blinking, gradation), allowing the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined illumination mode and the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined illumination mode.

The second movable device 15 is normally capable of remaining stationary in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and from its stationary state in the retracted position (home position), it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and remain stationary in an advanced position (deployed position) (second mode). When stopped in the advanced position, the second movable device 15 covers part of the image display device 7. When the second movable device 15 begins to move from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can indicate to the player that there is a high chance of winning. Furthermore, when the second movable device 15 is retracted in the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable device 15 can be easily seen.

As shown in Figure 67(A), when background image THG1 (here, an animated underground image) is displayed on display screen 7a as the background image, when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) ends, left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all displayed stationary, and change icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a. Second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of display screen 7a. Even when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) ends, character area 15a of second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 remains lit in white. When the power is turned on to gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, the character area 15a of second movable device 15 is normally lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 is normally lit in white. In other words, the character area 15a of second movable device 15 is normally lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 is normally lit in white.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 remains lit in white, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins as shown in Figure 67 (B). When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (C), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state, changing rapidly in the display mode, and then the change display effect B through the transparent area begins, and with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the image changes from a bright state to a gradually darker state, and a transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area with a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape, gradually appears as a transparent, closed specific area in the range from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the range spanning the change area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a dark state to a bright state, resulting in a clear glow.

When variable display performance B through the transparent area begins, the second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, while the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from lit in white to lit in blue. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the color lit in the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15. In other words, the boundary line HRc glows and emits light in blue.

Furthermore, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is displayed as a bright background image in the area excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (i.e., in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR), and gradually becomes darker. However, in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) began. In other words, when the variable display effect B through the transparent region begins, the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker as the background image, excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a goes dark.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(D), as the background image THG1 gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C, which are rapidly changing in front of the background image THG1, become visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, because the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the area excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) cannot be seen, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which is rapidly changing in front of the background image THG1, cannot be seen. Also, at this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

When the display screen 7a is kept dark in this manner for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds), during this period the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L and center decorative pattern 8C slow down and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state, making it possible to see a portion of the decelerating left decorative pattern 8L (here, the lower portion of the number "1" is visible, gradually shifting to the center and upper portions, and the lower portion of the number "2" following the number "1") and a portion of the center decorative pattern 8C (here, the lower portion of the number "2" is visible, gradually shifting to the center and upper portions, and the lower portion of the number "3" following the number "2").

In addition, even when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a goes dark, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the small decorative patterns can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the number of first special symbols held based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols held based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) can be viewed without any change in their display modes, and the image "right hit" can be viewed without any change in its display mode. This is because, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground; in other words, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground of background image THG1 as the background image.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(E), the display screen 7a goes dark, and just before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a goes dark and the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually brightens and reappears as the background image, and the transparent region HR, displayed in the range from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the range spanning the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the center decorative pattern 8C), gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In this display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the blue glow at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a bright state to a dim state, resulting in an unclear glow. At this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

As the display screen 7a goes dark, background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually brightens and reappears as the background image, and the transparent area HR displayed in the range from near the center of the left side of display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of display screen 7a (i.e., the range spanning the variable area of left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of center decorative pattern 8C) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), center decorative patterns 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), and right decorative patterns 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") have already slowed down and become opaque, and the display screen 7a is now in a state just before the left decorative patterns 8L, center decorative patterns 8C, and right decorative patterns 8R are temporarily displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (F), the background image THG1 (here, an underground image from the video) returns to being displayed brightly on the display screen 7a as the background image, and when the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", after which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and when this is displayed as a confirmed win and a miss, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously temporarily displayed, and further, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the second movable part 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 is maintained in a yellow lit state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is changed from a blue lit state to its original white lit state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 lights up yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 lights up white, so that the character area 15a and rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 return to their normal illumination state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, background image THG1 (here, a video underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in blue, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins again. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd also begins to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. This results in two hold icons being stocked.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(H), the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from opaque to translucent, rapidly changing in a display mode. The background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a changes from a bright state to a gradually darkened state, and a transparent region HR, a colorless, transparent region with a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape, gradually appears as a transparent, closed, specific region extending from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the left of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the region spanning the changing region of the right decorative pattern 8R and the changing region of the center decorative pattern 8C). The shape of the transparent region HR here is the same as the transparent region HR shown in Figure 67(C) (i.e., it is the same as the transparent region HR shown in Figure 67(C)). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a dark state to a bright state, resulting in a clear glow.

The second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, while the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from lit in white to lit in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color lit in the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15. In other words, the boundary line HRc is displayed in a shining red light.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is displayed as a bright background image in the area excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (i.e., in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR), and then gradually becomes darker. However, in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as when the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) began. In other words, the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker as the background image, excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a goes dark.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(I), as the background image THG1 gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, which are rapidly fluctuating in front of the background image THG1, become visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the area excluding the inner region HRa and boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, so the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) cannot be seen, and the left decorative pattern 8L, which is rapidly fluctuating in front of the background image THG1, cannot be seen. Also, at this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines red and emits light continues.

When the display screen 7a is kept dark in this manner for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds), during this period the rapidly changing middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R slow down and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state, making it possible to see part of the slowing middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the lower part of the number "9" is visible, gradually shifting to the center and upper part, and the lower part of the number "1" following the number "9") and part of the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the lower part of the number "1" is visible, gradually shifting to the center and upper part, and the lower part of the number "2" following the number "1").

Furthermore, even when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a goes dark, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the small decorative patterns can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the number of first special symbols held based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols held based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) can be viewed without any change in their display modes, and the image "right hit" can be viewed without any change in its display mode. This is because, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground; in other words, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground of background image THG1 as the background image.

Next, as shown in Figure 67(J), the display screen 7a goes dark, and just before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a goes dark and the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually brightens and reappears as the background image, and the transparent region HR, displayed in the range from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the range spanning the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable region of the center decorative pattern 8C), gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In this display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the red glow at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a bright state to a dim state, appearing to glow unclearly. At this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines red and emits light continues.

As the display screen 7a goes dark, background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually brightens and reappears as the background image, and the transparent area HR displayed in the range from near the center of the left side of display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of display screen 7a (i.e., the range spanning the variable area of right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area of center decorative pattern 8C) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), center decorative patterns 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9"), and right decorative patterns 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") have already slowed down and become opaque, and the display screen 7a is now in a state just before the left decorative patterns 8L, center decorative patterns 8C, and right decorative patterns 8R are displayed in a temporary stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (K), the background image THG1 (here, an underground image from the video) returns to being displayed brightly on the display screen 7a as the background image, and when the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", after which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and when the confirmation is displayed and it is a miss, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously temporarily displayed, and further, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the second movable part 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 is maintained in a yellow lit state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is changed from a red lit state to its original white lit state. In other words, at the same time (or almost simultaneously) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 lights up yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 lights up white, causing the character area 15a and rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 to return to their normal luminous state. This ends variable display performance B, which is performed through the transparent area across the two variable displays shown in Figures 67(B) to 67(K).

After the variable display effect B through the transparent area ends, as shown in Figure 67 (L), the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume it. With background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in white, and the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) begins. As the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd also begins to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd. No hold icons 9B are placed at the second hold display position 9Bd through the fourth hold display positions 9Bd. This will result in one pending icon being stocked.

The decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) begins, and then if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R do not line up as the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as a stopped display, it is a miss and the decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) ends. On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R line up as the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as a stopped display, it is a win, the decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) ends, and then the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins.

In this way, the variable display performance B through the transparent area is performed across two variable displays, Figures 67(B) to 67(K), and in Figures 67(C) to 67(E), a transparent area HR appears as a transparent, closed specific area, which is a colorless, transparent area with a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines and emits light in blue, whereas in Figures 67(H) to 67(J), a transparent area HR (same as the transparent area HR that appeared in Figures 67(C) to 67(E)) appears as a transparent, closed specific area, which is a colorless, transparent area with a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines and emits light in red. This is because, in the variable display performance B through the transparent area, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 is preset to have a high probability of winning in the following order: white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of winning)). The colors of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR, which is the same color as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15, are also preset to have a high probability of winning in the following order: blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of winning)). As a result, as the variable display performance B through the transparent area progresses, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from blue to red, giving the player a sense of anticipation for a win, which helps to reduce the monotony caused by the changing decorative patterns.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance B through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays, Fig. 67(B) to Fig. 67(K), and in Fig. 67(C) to Fig. 67(E), the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific area, extends from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly right of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., it spans the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the center decorative pattern 8C). 67(H) to 67(J), a transparent region HR (same as the transparent region HR that appeared in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E)) that is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific region appeared in a range extending from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly left of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., a range spanning the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable region of the center decorative pattern 8C). This is because the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute variable display performance B through the transparent region during the performance, and the position where the transparent region HR appears when variable display performance B through the transparent region is executed is also determined to be a random position. For this reason, there is absolutely no correlation between the position where the transparent region HR appears and the likelihood of winning. However, in this embodiment, the position where the transparent area HR appears can be set to a random position, allowing the player to determine the likelihood of winning based on the position where the transparent area HR appears, which also contributes to reducing the monotony caused by fluctuations in the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance B through the transparent area, it is performed across two variable displays, Fig. 67(B) to Fig. 67(K), and in Fig. 67(C) to Fig. 67(E), the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific area, appears in a range extending from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly right of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., a range spanning the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines in blue, the same color as the color of the rectangular area 15b lit in the second movable device 15, which is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) in the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. In Figures 67(H) to 67(J), a transparent area HR (same as the transparent area HR that appeared in Figures 67(C) to 67(E)), which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific area, appears in a range extending from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the left of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., a range spanning the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), and the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines and emits light in red, which is the same color as the color of the illuminated rectangular area 15b in the second movable device 15 that is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. In other words, even though the second movable device 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 is lit. Therefore, even if the second movable device 15 has not started to move, it is possible to give the player a winning expectation that is commensurate with (corresponding to) the winning expectation given to the operation of the second movable device 15, and this can contribute to creating a sense of anticipation for the changing display.

Furthermore, when power is turned on to gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, as described above, in the normal state, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 lights up in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 lights up in white. In the variable display performance B through the transparent area, although it is performed across two variable displays, Figures 67(B) to 67(K), in Figures 67(B) to 67(F), the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role element 15 changes from a white lit state to a blue lit state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role element 15 changes from a blue lit state to its original white lit state, and in the next variation, Figures 67(G) to 67(K), the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role element 15 changes from a white lit state to a red lit state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role element 15 changes from a red lit state to its original white lit state. Variable display performance B through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading performances, but rather the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display performance through the transparent area during the performance. In other words, because the variable display performance B through the transparent area is actually performed across two variable displays, Figures 67(B) to 67(K), with just one lottery, it is possible to perform the variable display performance B through the transparent area as if it were determined by lottery by the performance control microcomputer 91 for each change in the decorative pattern. This makes it possible for the player to believe that there are multiple variations in the variable display performance B through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variable display performance B through the transparent area in this embodiment, in Figures 67(C) to 67(E), the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific area, appears in a range extending from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., a range spanning the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), whereas in Figures 67(H) to 67(J), the transparent area HR (same as the transparent area HR that appeared in Figures 67(C) to 67(E)), which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific area, appears in a range extending from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the left of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., a range spanning the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C). However, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific region, may also be configured to span the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R. In this case, although the left side of the transparent region HR will protrude from the left edge of the display screen 7a and the right side of the transparent region HR will protrude from the right edge of the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR can be expressed as a single closed region (specific region).

Furthermore, in the variable display effect B through the transparent region in this embodiment, in FIG. 67(C), the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, horizontally elongated rectangular region as a transparent, closed specific region, first changes from blue. However, it may also change from one of red, green, or purple, for example. Also, in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E) or 67(H) to 67(J), the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, horizontally elongated rectangular region as a transparent, closed specific region, may first change from blue to another color multiple times (for example, blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.), or in FIGS. 67(B) to 67(K), the color of the transparent region HR may remain yellow (gold) or rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of jackpot)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display performance B through the transparent area is performed across two variable displays, Figures 67(B) to 67(K), but it is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading performances; rather, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute variable display performance B through the transparent area during the performance. However, variable display performance B through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the pre-reading performances. In this case, since the variable display performance B through the transparent area is performed across two variable displays, Figures 67(B) to 67(K), the shape and color of the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd in Figure 67(A) is actually a blue spherical hold icon 9B as a result of the prediction, but by performing variable display performance B through the transparent area across the two variable displays, Figures 67(B) to 67(K), as a performance that matches (corresponds to) the expectation level of the blue spherical hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd can be deliberately made a white spherical hold icon 9B.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable display in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. However, there is a risk that a player may mistake the numbers displayed by the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern as a countdown initiated by the variable display effect B through the transparent area, and expect that this countdown will lead to the subsequent execution of an effect with a high probability of winning. Therefore, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable display.

In addition, in the variable display performance B through the transparent area in this embodiment, the number of first special charts reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are positioned on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and are always displayed. However, there is a risk that the player may mistake the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) as a countdown initiated by variable display effect B through the transparent area, leading the player to expect that an effect with a high probability of winning will then be executed due to this countdown. Therefore, the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) may be positioned on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R so that they are always displayed.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance B through the transparent area in this embodiment, in Figures 67 (C) to 67 (E), when the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific area, appears in a range extending from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., a range spanning the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the transparent area HR is fixed in this position without moving or rotating. 67(H) to 67(J), a transparent region HR (same as the transparent region HR that appears in FIGS. 67(C) to 67(E)) that is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific region appears in a range extending from near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to slightly left of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., a range spanning the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C), and the transparent region HR is fixed in this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR may be displayed in a manner in which it repeatedly moves up and down in small increments (up and down vibrations) around the position where it appears, a manner in which it repeatedly moves left and right in small increments (left and right vibrations), a manner in which it repeatedly rotates clockwise or counterclockwise in small increments (rotational vibrations), or a combination of these. This changes the area that is visible through the transparent area HR, which increases the variety of effects created by the transparent area HR and helps reduce the monotony of the changing effects (changing display) of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance B through the transparent region in this embodiment, for example, in Figures 67(C) to 67(E), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific region, appears in a range extending from near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to slightly to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., a range spanning the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of a colorless, transparent region HR, which is a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific region, the range spanning the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be a transparent region HR, which is a flat, colorless, transparent region. In other words, the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, causing the display screen 7a to go dark, and ultimately maintaining a bright state only in the area spanning the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the center decorative pattern 8C, so that the background image and the left decorative pattern 8L and center decorative pattern 8C, which are variable and displayed in front of the background image, can be seen only through the area spanning the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable area of the center decorative pattern 8C. This increases the variety of transparent areas HR, making it less likely that the player will lose interest in the variable display performance B through the transparent areas.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable display performance B through the transparent region is performed across two variable displays, Fig. 67(B) to Fig. 67(K), and in Fig. 67(C) to Fig. 67(E), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific region, appears in different positions. However, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific region, may also appear in a single predetermined position. Examples of the single predetermined position include a position where part of the left decorative pattern 8L and part of the middle decorative pattern 8C are visible (i.e., a position spanning the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C), a position where part of the middle decorative pattern 8C and part of the left decorative pattern 8L are visible (i.e., a position spanning the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R), and a position where part of the left decorative pattern 8L and part of the right decorative pattern 8R are visible (i.e., a position spanning the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L and the variable region of the right decorative pattern 8R, where the left side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the left edge of the display screen 7a and the right side of the transparent region HR protrudes from the right edge of the display screen 7a; in other words, a position that is an area excluding the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C).

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display effect B through the transparent region is performed across two variable displays, Figures 67(B) to 67(K). In Figures 67(C) to 67(E), the transparent region HR, a colorless, transparent region having a flat, horizontally elongated rectangular shape, appears in different positions as a transparent, closed, specific region, and a commonly used transparent region HR of the same shape and size appears. However, for each variable display, the transparent region HR may change to a different shape (e.g., a triangular, square, or star shape), or a countdown may be displayed using a number image. The outline of the other shape becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, the interior region of the other shape becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the outer region of the outline of the other shape becomes the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR. In this case, the probability of winning is preset to increase as the change to the other shape progresses (e.g., changing from a horizontally elongated rectangular shape to a triangular shape to a square shape to a star shape). Additionally, the outline of the number image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR described above, the internal region of the number image becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR described above, and the region outside the outline of the number image becomes the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR described above. In this case, the countdown using number images is performed in the order of the number "3" image, the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image, and it is preset so that the likelihood of winning increases as the countdown using number images progresses in the order of the number "3" image, the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area in this embodiment, when the screen is darkened in Figures 67(D) and 67(I), the background image visible through the transparent area HR is background image THG1 (here, an underground image in a video), which is the background image before the screen is darkened. However, when the screen is darkened in Figures 67(D) and 67(I), the background image visible through the transparent area HR may be switched (changed) from the background image before the screen is darkened to another background image. In this way, the background image can be switched before and after Figures 67(D) and 67(I). In other words, by switching the background image during the change, the player can personally discover the relationship (pattern) between the background image changed due to the change and the lottery result, which can help prevent a decline in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to one of the city image, forest image, ocean image, seabed image, or underground image described above, or may be switched (changed) to one of a plurality of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3, etc. in the variable display performance B through the transparent area. In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3, etc. may be set in advance so that the likelihood of winning increases in the order of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3, etc.

[Variable display effect C through transparent area]
Next, the variable display effect C through a transparent area will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the variable display effect C through a transparent area. The variable display effect C through a transparent area can be performed by darkening the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 after the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns starts and before it ends (stops) (i.e., during the variable display of the decorative patterns), making a portion of at least one of the multiple decorative patterns visible together with a background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. In other words, the variable display effect C through a transparent area can be performed by darkening all areas except the transparent area having a predetermined shape, making a portion of at least one decorative pattern being variable displayed together with a background image visible only through this transparent area.

In this embodiment, the variable display effect C through the transparent area is triggered when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, during a game state known as a right-hand hit. During this game state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," and the image titled "Right Hand" is not obscured by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Furthermore, even when a transparent area, described below, appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the image titled "Right Hand" remains visible without any change in its display mode. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the top right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Note that the gaming state of right-hitting can include the state of transitioning to time-saving gaming after a jackpot, as well as the state of transitioning to so-called b-time saving (play time).

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there is a sub-variable area (not shown) in which small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color series) or a color close to a dark color (for example, deep green)) and will not change to other colors. The sub-variable area is positioned on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, so it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area to be the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other effect images appear, the other effect images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and will not obstruct the sub-variable area. In addition, the sub-variable area is positioned to the right of the fourth hold display position described later, so that it does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is displayed in a manner similar to that of the right decorative pattern 8R. Visibility is not obstructed by pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the fourth hold display position. Even if a transparent area (described below) appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the display mode of the sub-variable area (the display mode of the small opaque left decorative pattern, the small opaque middle decorative pattern, and the small opaque right decorative pattern, which are the contents displayed in the sub-variable area) remains unchanged and can be seen. It is also possible to omit a background image from the sub-variable area. In this case, the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area, so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area is completely invisible.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same vertical line in the order from top to bottom.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserve icons, as shown in Figure 68 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 68 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the second special chart reserve is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserve display area is provided for the second special chart reserve. In this second reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserve display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, even if a transparent area (described below) appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can still be seen without any change in their display mode.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd through the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only four white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are still in stock. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 from this point on.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers, which represent the number of reserved balls, are displayed numerically, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the front of the display screen 7a, while the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are positioned behind the front (i.e., the foreground) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images, so they are always visible even during the variable display display C through the transparent area. Furthermore, even if a transparent area, as described below, appears and the display screen 7a goes dark, the display mode of these numbers (the color (blue numbers) of the number of first special symbols reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the color (red numbers) of the number of second special symbols reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21) remains unchanged and can still be seen.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, to briefly explain the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2, the second movable device 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape, with a character pattern (here, "ORGA") formed three-dimensionally on the same horizontal line, and has a character area 15a where the character pattern is formed, and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable device 15 is a decorative board (not shown) on the surface of which are mounted a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that illuminate the character area 15a in a predetermined light-emitting manner, and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light that illuminate the rectangular area 15b in a predetermined light-emitting manner. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components soldered to the surface side of the decorative board. In other words, the surface side of the decorative board is the LED mounting surface. The back side of this decorative board (the side opposite the front side of the decorative board) is equipped with a dedicated LED driver IC (not shown), resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), and connectors (not shown) for gradation control of the multiple first full-color LEDs and multiple second full-color LEDs. The LED driver IC, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mounted electronic components and are soldered to the back side of the decorative board. In other words, the back side of the decorative board is the surface on which no LEDs are mounted. The LED driver IC is controlled by a control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the multiple first full-color LEDs and multiple second full-color LEDs are illuminated in gradations (on, blinking, gradation), allowing the character area 15a to emit light in a predetermined illumination mode and the rectangular area 15b to emit light in a predetermined illumination mode.

The second movable device 15 is normally capable of remaining stationary in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode), and from its stationary state in the retracted position (home position), it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and remain stationary in an advanced position (deployed position) (second mode). When stopped in the advanced position, the second movable device 15 covers part of the image display device 7. When the second movable device 15 begins to move from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can indicate to the player that there is a high chance of winning. Furthermore, when the second movable device 15 is retracted in the retracted position or advanced to the advanced position, the second movable device 15 can be easily seen.

As shown in Figure 68(A), when background image THG1 (here, an animated underground image) is displayed on display screen 7a as the background image, when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) ends, left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all displayed as still, and change icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a. Second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of display screen 7a. Even when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) ends, character area 15a of second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 remains lit in white. When the power is turned on to gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, the character area 15a of second movable device 15 is normally lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 is normally lit in white. In other words, the character area 15a of second movable device 15 is normally lit in yellow, and rectangular area 15b of second movable device 15 is normally lit in white.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 remains lit in white, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins as shown in Figure 68 (B). When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(C), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state, rapidly changing in a display mode. Then, a change display effect C through the transparent region begins. With background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on display screen 7a as the background image, the image changes from a bright state to a gradually dark state, and a transparent region HR, a flat, circular, colorless, and transparent region, gradually appears as a transparent, closed, specific region in the center of display screen 7a (i.e., the changing region of center decorative pattern 8C). The transparent region HR has an inner region HRa that is colorless and transparent, and a boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR that glows and emits a predetermined color. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of a specified color at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a dark state to a bright state, resulting in a clear display mode.

When the variable display performance C through the transparent area begins, the second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, while the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from lit in white to lit in blue. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the color lit in the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15. In other words, the boundary line HRc glows and emits light in blue.

Furthermore, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is displayed as a bright background image in the area excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (i.e., in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR), and gradually becomes darker. However, in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) began. In other words, when the variable display effect C through the transparent region begins, the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker as the background image, excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a goes dark.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(D), as the background image THG1 gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is rapidly changing in front of the background image THG1, becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the area excluding the inner region HRa and boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, so the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) cannot be seen, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, which are rapidly changing in front of the background image THG1, cannot be seen. Also, at this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds), the rapidly changing central decorative pattern 8C slows down during this period, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and part of the decelerating central decorative pattern 8C becomes visible (here, the lower part of the number "2" is visible, followed by the central and upper parts, and the lower part of the number "3" following the number "2").

In addition, even when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a goes dark, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the small decorative patterns can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the number of first special symbols held based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols held based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) can be viewed without any change in their display modes, and the image "right hit" can be viewed without any change in its display mode. This is because, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground; in other words, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground of background image THG1 as the background image.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(E), the display screen 7a goes dark, and just before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a goes dark and the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears as the background image, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from bright to dark. In this display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from bright to dark, the blue glow at the boundary line HRc appears to glow unclearly, gradually fading from bright to dark. At this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in blue continues.

As the display screen 7a goes dark, background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually brightens and reappears as the background image, and the transparent area HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C) gradually changes from a light to a dark state, all of the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), middle decorative patterns 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), and right decorative patterns 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") have already slowed down and become opaque, and the display screen 7a is now in a state just before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporary stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (F), the background image THG1 (here, an underground image from the video) returns to being displayed brightly on the display screen 7a as the background image, and when the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", after which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and when the confirmation is displayed and it is a miss, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously temporarily displayed, and further, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the second movable part 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 is maintained in a yellow lit state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is changed from a blue lit state to its original white lit state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 lights up yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 lights up white, so that the character area 15a and rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 return to their normal illumination state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, background image THG1 (here, a video underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in blue, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins again. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd also begins to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. This results in two hold icons being stocked.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(H), the decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state, rapidly varying in the display mode. While the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, it gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, and a transparent region HR, which is a flat, triangular, colorless, and transparent region, gradually appears as a transparent, closed, specific region in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable region of the center decorative pattern 8C, in the same position as the transparent region HR that appears in Figures 68(C) through 68(E)). The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from the flat, circular, and colorless, transparent region HR shown in Figure 68(C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. In a display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a dark state to a bright state, resulting in a clear glow.

The second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, while the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from lit in white to lit in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color lit in the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15. In other words, the boundary line HRc is displayed in a shining red light.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is displayed as a bright background image in the area excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (i.e., in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR), and gradually becomes darker. However, in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as when the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) began. In other words, the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker as the background image, excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a goes dark.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(I), as the background image THG1 gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is rapidly fluctuating in front of the background image THG1, becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the area excluding the inner region HRa and boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, so the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) cannot be seen, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, which are rapidly fluctuating in front of the background image THG1, cannot be seen. Also, at this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines red and emits light continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds), the rapidly changing central decorative pattern 8C slows down during this period, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and part of the decelerating central decorative pattern 8C becomes visible (here, the lower part of the number "9" is visible, followed by the central and upper parts, and the lower part of the number "1" following the number "9").

Furthermore, even when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a goes dark, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the small decorative patterns can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the number of first special symbols held based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols held based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) can be viewed without any change in their display modes, and the image "right hit" can be viewed without any change in its display mode. This is because, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground; in other words, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground of background image THG1 as the background image.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(J), the display screen 7a goes dark, and just before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a goes dark and the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears as the background image, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from bright to dark. In this display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from bright to dark, the red glow at the boundary line HRc appears to glow unclearly, gradually fading from bright to dark. At this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines red and emits light continues.

As the display screen 7a goes dark, background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually brightens and reappears as the background image, and the transparent area HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is in the same position as the transparent area HR that appeared in Figures 68(C) to 68(E)) gradually changes from a light to a dark state, all of the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), middle decorative patterns 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9"), and right decorative patterns 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") have already slowed down and become opaque, and the display screen 7a is now in a state immediately before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a temporary stop.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (K), the background image THG1 (here, an underground image from the video) returns to being displayed brightly on the display screen 7a as the background image, and when the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", after which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", and when the confirmation is displayed and it is a miss, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously temporarily displayed, and further, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the second movable part 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 is maintained in a yellow lit state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is changed from a red lit state to its original white lit state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 lights up yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 lights up white, so that the character area 15a and rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 return to their normal illumination state.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (L), when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, background image THG1 (here, a video underground image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in blue, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins again. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd also begins to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd through the fourth hold display positions. This results in one hold icon being stocked.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (M), the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state and change at high speed. With background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on display screen 7a as the background image, the image changes from a bright state to a gradually darker state, and a transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area with a flat, rectangular shape, gradually appears as a transparent, closed, specific area in the center of display screen 7a (i.e., the changing area of middle decorative pattern 8C, which is in the same position as the transparent area HR that appeared in Figures 68 (C) to 68 (E), and further in the same position as the transparent area HR that appeared in Figures 68 (H) to 68 (J)). The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from the transparent region HR shown in Figure 68(C), which is a colorless, transparent region having a circular planar shape, and further different from the transparent region HR shown in Figure 68(H), which is a colorless, transparent region having a triangular planar shape. The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in a predetermined color. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brightness of the predetermined color at the boundary line HRc gradually changes from a dark state to a bright state, resulting in a clear shine.

The second movable device 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit yellow, while the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from lit white to lit green. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is green, the same color as the color lit in the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15. In other words, the boundary line HRc is displayed in a shining, green light.

In addition, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is displayed as a bright background image in the area excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the boundary line HRc (i.e., in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR), and then gradually becomes darker. However, in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as when the decorative pattern changing performance (changing display) began. In other words, the background image THG1 gradually becomes darker as the background image, excluding the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a goes dark.

Next, as shown in Figure 68(N), as the background image THG1 gradually darkens and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is rapidly fluctuating in front of the background image THG1, becomes visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the area excluding the inner region HRa and boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, so the background image THG1 (the underground image in the video) cannot be seen, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, which are rapidly fluctuating in front of the background image THG1, cannot be seen. Also, at this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit green, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is green, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in green continues.

When the display screen 7a remains dark for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds), the rapidly changing central decorative pattern 8C slows down during this period, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and part of the decelerating central decorative pattern 8C becomes visible (here, the lower part of the number "8" is visible, followed by the central and upper parts, and the lower part of the number "9" following the number "8").

Furthermore, even when the background image THG1 gradually darkens as the background image and the display screen 7a goes dark, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the small decorative patterns can be viewed without any change in their display modes, the number of first special symbols held based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols held based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) can be viewed without any change in their display modes, and the image "right hit" can be viewed without any change in its display mode. This is because, as described above, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground; in other words, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbols, the number of first special symbols held based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20, the number of second special symbols held based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, and the image "hit right" are arranged in the foreground of background image THG1 as the background image.

Next, although not shown, the display screen 7a goes dark, and just before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a goes dark and the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears as the background image, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from bright to dark. In this display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from bright to dark, the green glow at the boundary line HRc appears to glow unclearly, gradually fading from bright to dark. At this time, the second movable part 15 remains stationary (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 remains lit yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 remains lit green, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is green, the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is lit. In other words, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines and emits light in green continues.

The display screen 7a goes dark, and the background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) gradually becomes brighter and reappears as the background image. At the same time, the transparent area HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is the same position as the transparent area HR that appeared in Figures 68(C) to 68(E), and furthermore, the same position as the transparent area HR that appeared in Figures 68(H) to 68(J)) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. When the display mode changes to this, all of the left decorative patterns 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), middle decorative patterns 8C (here, the number "8" and the number "9" following the number "8"), and right decorative patterns 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") have already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are about to be displayed as temporarily stopped on the display screen 7a.

Next, although not shown, the background image THG1 (here, an underground image from the video) returns to being displayed brightly on the display screen 7a as the background image, and when the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", after which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1", and when this is displayed as a confirmed win and a miss, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously temporarily displayed, and further, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed. At the same time (or almost simultaneously) when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped, the second movable role device 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable role device 15 is maintained in a yellow lit state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role device 15 is changed from a green lit state to its original white lit state. In other words, at the same time (or almost at the same time) that the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, the character area 15a of the second movable part 15 lights up yellow and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 lights up white, causing the character area 15a and rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 to return to their normal illumination state. This ends variable display performance C, which began in Figure 68 (B) and spans the three variable displays through transparent areas.

After the variable display effect C through the transparent area ends, and then, although not shown, the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, the background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 remains lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b remains lit in white, and the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) begins. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, no hold icons 9B are placed at the first hold display position 9Bd through the fourth hold display position. This results in a state where no hold icons are stocked.

The decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) begins, and then if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R do not line up as the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as still, it is a miss and the decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) ends. On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R line up as the same pattern and are temporarily stopped and displayed as still, it is a win, the decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) ends, and then the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins.

In this way, the variable display performance C through the transparent area starts from Figure 68 (B) and is carried out across three variable displays, and in Figures 68 (C) to 68 (E), a transparent area HR appears as a transparent, closed specific area which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, circular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines and emits light in blue, in Figures 68 (H) to 68 (J), a transparent area HR appears as a transparent, closed specific area which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, triangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines and emits light in red, and in Figures 68 (M), (N), etc., a transparent area HR appears as a transparent, closed specific area which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, rectangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines and emits light in green. This is because, in the variable display presentation C through the transparent area, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat shape as a transparent, closed specific area, is preset to have a higher probability of winning in the order of circle, triangle, square, and star. As a result, as the variable display presentation C through the transparent area progresses, the shape of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from circle to triangle and square in order, giving the player a sense of anticipation of winning, which helps to reduce the monotony caused by the changing decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 is preset to have increasing expectations of winning in the following order: white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of winning)). The colors of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR, which is the same color as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15, are also preset to have increasing expectations of winning in the following order: blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of winning)). As a result, as the variable display performance C through the transparent area progresses, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR changes from blue to red and then green, giving the player a sense of anticipation for a win and helping to reduce the monotony caused by the changing decorative patterns.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance C through the transparent area, starting from Figure 68 (B) and continuing across three variable displays, in Figures 68 (C) to 68 (E), a transparent area HR appears as a transparent, closed specific area, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, circular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR shines and emits light in blue, the same color as the color of the light-up of the rectangular area 15b in the second movable device 15, which is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) in the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and in Figures 68 (H) to 68 (J), a transparent area HR appears as a transparent, closed specific area, which is a colorless, transparent area having a flat, triangular shape. appears, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable part 15, which is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, is lit up; and in Figures 68 (M), (N), etc., the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, rectangular shape as a transparent, closed specific region, appears, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in green, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable part 15, which is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, is lit up. In other words, even though the second movable device 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a, the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR can shine in the same color as the color in which the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 is lit. Therefore, even if the second movable device 15 has not started to move, it is possible to give the player a winning expectation that is commensurate with (corresponding to) the winning expectation given to the operation of the second movable device 15, and this can contribute to creating a sense of anticipation for the changing display.

Furthermore, when power is applied to gaming machine 1, which is a pachinko gaming machine, as described above, in the normal state, the character area 15a of the second movable device 15 lights up yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 lights up white. Variable display performance C through the transparent area starts from Figure 68(B) and spans three variable displays, but in Figures 68(B) to 68(F), the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from a white lit state to a blue lit state, and then the rectangular area 15b of the second movable device 15 changes from a blue lit state back to its original white lit state. In the next variation, Figures 68(G) to 68(K), the rectangular area 15 of the second movable device 15 68(L)的变形中，第二变形器15的方形区域15b变形变形变形变形变形C是否变形变形，而且在变形变形中，变形表现形15b变形变形变形C是否变形变形。 The display effect C through the transparent region is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading effects, and the display control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the display effect C through the transparent region during the effect. In other words, because the variable display performance C through the transparent area actually starts from Figure 68 (B) and spans three variable displays with just one lottery, it is possible to perform the variable display performance C through the transparent area as if it were determined by lottery by the performance control microcomputer 91 for each change in the decorative pattern. This makes it possible for the player to believe that there are multiple variations in the variable display performance C through the transparent area.

In the variable display performance C through a transparent region in this embodiment, in Figures 68(C) to 68(E), the transparent region HR appears as a colorless, transparent region that is flat and circular as a transparent, closed specific region. However, it may also be flat and triangular, or flat and rectangular. In Figures 68(B) to 68(K), the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be changed while maintaining its flat and circular shape.

In addition, in the variable display performance C through the transparent region in this embodiment, in Figure 68(C), the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region that is a flat, circular, transparent, closed specific region, first changes from blue. However, it may also change from one of red, green, or purple, for example. In the variations in Figures 68(C) to 68(E), or in the variations in Figures 68(H) to 68(J), or in the variations in Figures 68(M), (N), etc., the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region that is a flat, circular, transparent, closed specific region, first changes from blue to other colors multiple times (for example, blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.), or starting from Figure 68 (B), the color of the transparent region HR may be maintained as yellow (gold) or rainbow (rainbow (high probability of winning)) across the three variations, and the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a specific transparent closed region, may be changed (for example, in the order of circle, triangle, square, and star shape; circle, triangle, square, circle, triangle, square, star shape; triangle, square, etc.), or the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a specific transparent closed region, may be maintained (for example, maintaining a circle, triangle, square, star shape).

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display performance C through the transparent area begins from Figure 68 (B) and is performed across three variable displays, but it is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading performances; rather, the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display performance C through the transparent area during the performance. However, the variable display performance C through the transparent area can also be performed as one of the pre-reading performances. In this case, the variable display performance C through the transparent area starts from Figure 68 (B) and is performed across three variable displays, so as a result of the prediction for the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd in Figure 68 (A), the shape and color of the hold icon 9B is actually a red spherical hold icon 9B as a result of the prediction. However, by performing variable display performance C through the transparent area that starts from Figure 68 (B) and is performed across three variable displays as a performance that matches (corresponds to) the expectation level of the red spherical hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd can be deliberately made to be a white spherical hold icon 9B.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable display (variable display) in a sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. However, there is a risk that a player may mistake the numbers displayed by the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern as a countdown initiated by the variable display effect C through the transparent area, and expect that this countdown will lead to the subsequent execution of an effect with a high chance of winning. Therefore, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable display (variable display).

In addition, in the variable display performance C through the transparent area in this embodiment, the number of first special charts reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) were positioned on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and were always displayed. However, there is a risk that the player may mistakenly believe that the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are a countdown initiated by the variable display effect C through the transparent area, leading the player to expect that an effect with a high probability of winning will then be executed due to this countdown. Therefore, the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) may be positioned on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R so that they are always displayed.

Furthermore, in the variable display performance C through the transparent region in this embodiment, in Figures 68(C) to 68(E), when the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, circular region as a transparent, closed specific region, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the transparent region HR is fixed in this position without moving or rotating. Also, in Figures 68(H) to 68(J), when the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, triangular region as a transparent, closed specific region, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the transparent region HR is fixed in this position without moving or rotating. Also, in Figures 68(M), (N), etc., when the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, rectangular region as a transparent, closed specific region, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the transparent region HR is fixed in this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, it may repeatedly move up and down in small increments (up and down vibrations) around the position where it appears, repeatedly move left and right in small increments (left and right vibrations), repeatedly rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in small increments (rotational vibrations), or a combination of these display modes. In this way, the area visible through the transparent region HR changes, which increases the variety of effects created by the transparent region HR and helps reduce the monotony of the changing effects (changing display) of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, in the variable display effect C through a transparent region in this embodiment, for example, in Figures 68(C) to 68(E), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent, flat, circular region as a transparent, closed specific region, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (i.e., the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of a colorless, transparent, flat, circular region as a transparent, closed specific region, the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be a transparent region HR, which is a colorless, flat, transparent region. In other words, the variable regions of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually change from a bright state to a dark state, causing the display screen 7a to go dark, and ultimately, only the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C remains bright, allowing the background image and the middle decorative pattern 8C, which displays the variable area in front of the background image, to be visible only through the variable region of the middle decorative pattern 8C. This allows for more variation in the transparent areas HR, which helps keep the player's interest in the variable display effects C seen through the transparent areas.

In addition, in the variable display performance C through a transparent region in this embodiment, the variable display performance C through a transparent region starts from Figure 68 (B) and is carried out across three variable displays, and in Figures 68 (C) to 68 (E), a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, circular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in blue, and in Figures 68 (H) to 68 (J), a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, triangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in red, and in Figures 68 (M), (N), etc., a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, rectangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in green. This is because, in the variable display performance C through the transparent region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region as a transparent, closed specific region, is preset so that the probability of winning increases in the following order: circular, triangular, rectangular, and star-shaped. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region as a transparent, closed specific region, appearing in the shapes of a circle, a triangle, a rectangle, and a star, the silhouettes of different characters may appear one after another in the order of a silhouette of character 1, a silhouette of character 2, a silhouette of character 3, and a silhouette of character 4. The outline of each character's silhouette becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, the inner region of each character's silhouette becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the outer region of each character's silhouette becomes the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR. In this case, the order of a silhouette of character 1, a silhouette of character 2, a silhouette of character 3, and a silhouette of character 4 is preset so that the probability of winning increases in the order of a silhouette of character 1, a silhouette of character 2, a silhouette of character 3, and a silhouette of character 4. Furthermore, instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region that appears as a circle, triangle, square, or star, as a transparent, closed specific region, the silhouette of a single specific character may appear to gradually change pose. For example, the silhouette of a specific character performing a series of actions up to the point where the character is holding a sword and ready to strike may appear in order. In this case, the system is set up in advance so that the likelihood of a hit increases as the silhouette of the specific character performing a series of actions up to the point where the character is holding a sword and ready to strike progresses.

In addition, in the variable display performance C through a transparent region in this embodiment, the variable display performance C through a transparent region starts from Figure 68 (B) and is carried out across three variable displays, and in Figures 68 (C) to 68 (E), a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, circular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in blue, and in Figures 68 (H) to 68 (J), a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, triangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in red, and in Figures 68 (M), (N), etc., a transparent region HR appears as a transparent, closed specific region, which is a colorless, transparent region having a flat, rectangular shape, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in green. This is because, in the variable display performance C through the transparent region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region as a transparent, closed specific region, is preset to have a higher probability of winning in the following order: circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless, transparent region as a transparent, closed specific region, appearing in the following shapes: circular, triangular, square, and star-shaped, a countdown using number images may be performed. The outline of the number image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, the internal region of the number image becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and the region outside the outline of the number image becomes the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR. In this case, the countdown using number images is performed in the order of the number "3", number "2", number "1", and number "0", and the probability of winning is preset to increase as the countdown using number images progresses in the order of the number "3", number "2", number "1", and number "0".

Furthermore, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in this embodiment, when the screen is darkened in Figures 68(D), 68(I), and 68(N), the background image visible through the transparent region HR is background image THG1 (here, an underground image in a video), which is the background image before the screen is darkened. However, when the screen is darkened in Figures 68(D), 68(I), and 68(N), the background image visible through the transparent region HR may be switched (changed) from the background image before the screen is darkened to another background image. In this way, the background image can be switched before and after Figures 68(D), 68(I), and 68(N). In other words, by switching the background image during the change, the player can personally discover the relationship (pattern) between the background image that has changed due to the change and the winning or losing result, which can help prevent a decline in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to one of the city image, forest image, ocean image, seabed image, or underground image described above, or may be switched (changed) to one of a plurality of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3, etc. in the variable display performance C through the transparent area. In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3, etc. may be set in advance so that the likelihood of winning increases in the order of the dedicated background images C1, C2, C3, etc.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of changing display effects through transparent areas.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variable display performance A through a transparent area of Figure 66, the variable display performance B through a transparent area of Figure 67, and the variable display performance C through a transparent area of Figure 68, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and when an image forming a transparent, closed specific area HR is displayed, it is possible to execute a performance in which the background image THG1 and the pattern images, which are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern, are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area HR, and part of the background image THG1 and part of the pattern image are visible through the inside of the image forming the specific area HR (Figures 66(D) and (I) for variable display performance A through a transparent area, Figures 67(D) and (I) for variable display performance B through a transparent area, and Figures 68(D), (I), and (N) for variable display performance C through a transparent area). According to this configuration, when an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR is displayed, the background image THG1 and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images capable of notifying the result of the lottery, are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area HR. However, inside the image forming the specific area HR, part of the background image THG1 and part of the pattern image (for example, in the variable display performance A through a transparent area, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 66(D), part of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 66(I), and the transparent area) can be seen through the inside of the image forming the specific area HR. In the variable display performance B through the transparent area, a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 67(D), a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 67(I), and in the variable display performance C through the transparent area, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C in Fig. 68(D) can be visually recognized, so that a variable display using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern, which is an unprecedented and novel pattern image, can be performed, which can contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the variation of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. Therefore, by performing a variable display using the novel pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern, it is possible to increase interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in Figure 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in Figure 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in Figure 68 are such that when the display screen 7a is darkened to display an image that forms the specific area HR, the outside of the image that forms the specific area HR is darkened, and the inside of the image that forms the specific area HR is maintained in a transparent state without being darkened. According to this configuration, when the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 and the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area HR, and when the display screen 7a is darkened or not, the inside of the image forming the specific area HR is maintained in a transparent state, so that the background image THG1 and the pattern images (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L of Figure 66(I) in variable display performance A through a transparent area, the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R of Figure 67(I) in variable display performance B through a transparent area, the middle decorative pattern 8C of Figure 68(D), the middle decorative pattern 8C of Figure 68(I), and the middle decorative pattern 8C of Figure 68(N) in variable display performance C through a transparent area) can be maintained in an easily visible state.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through the transparent area in Figure 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in Figure 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in Figure 68 display the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9B outside the image forming the specific area HR, so that even if the display screen 7a is darkened, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9B can be maintained in a displayed state without being hidden. According to this configuration, when the display screen 7a goes dark, the outside of the image forming the specific area HR goes dark, but the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9B located outside the image forming the specific area HR are not hidden but can remain displayed, so it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable icon 9C, which continues to be displayed during the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, may change to another shape or another color, thereby increasing the likelihood of winning, and it is also possible to suggest to the player that the hold icon 9B, which continues to be displayed during the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, may change to another shape or another color, thereby increasing the likelihood of winning.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through a transparent area in Figure 66, the variable display effect B through a transparent area in Figure 67, and the variable display effect C through a transparent area in Figure 68 are such that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are pattern images, are placed in front of the background image THG1, and when the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to vary from an opaque state, an image forming a specific area HR is displayed, and the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and displayed as varying at high speed, and then the variable display of the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is slowed down and changed from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state. According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are the pattern images, are displayed in a semi-transparent state and change rapidly at high speed, but the semi-transparent pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be viewed through the specific area HR, and the background image THG1 behind the semi-transparent pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can also be viewed through the pattern images and the specific area HR.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects in the variable display effect A through a transparent area in Fig. 66, the variable display effect B through a transparent area in Fig. 67, and the variable display effect C through a transparent area in Fig. 68 are configured to display the boundary line HRc between the outside and inside of the image forming the specific area HR in a predetermined color. According to this configuration, since the specific area HR is an image that forms a transparent, closed area, the boundary line HRc that represents the outline of the specific area HR is displayed in a predetermined color to make the specific area HR easier to see, and can contribute to guiding the player's line of sight to the specific area HR when it is displayed, thereby attracting attention.

[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has a second movable device 15 (movable body) that can move between a retracted position and an advanced position and is provided with a plurality of first full-color LEDs and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (a plurality of light-emitting means) that are capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and in the variable display performance A through the transparent area in Figure 66, the variable display performance B through the transparent area in Figure 67, and the variable display performance C through the transparent area in Figure 68, when the second movable device 15 is retracted to the retracted position, the predetermined color that displays the boundary line HRc and the light color emitted by a plurality of second full-color LEDs (specific light-emitting means) among the plurality of first full-color LEDs and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (a plurality of light-emitting means) can be the same color. When the second movable device 15 starts to operate from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can suggest to the player that there is a high probability of winning. However, when the second movable device 15 is retracted to the retracted position, the boundary line HRc can be displayed so that it is the same color as the light emitted by the multiple second full-color LEDs (specific light-emitting means) provided on the second movable device 15. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the second movable device 15 and the transparent area HR (i.e., the boundary line HRc) are linked, and it is possible to use the transparent area HR (i.e., the boundary line HRc) to suggest to the player that there is a high probability of winning, even when the second movable device 15 is retracted to the retracted position. Furthermore, as described above, when the second movable device 15 is retracted to the retracted position, the boundary line HRc can be displayed in the same color as the light emitted by the multiple second full-color LEDs (specific light-emitting means) provided on the second movable device 15, thereby suggesting to the player that the second movable device 15 and the transparent region HR (i.e., the boundary line HRc) are linked, and thus further stoking the player's anticipation that the second movable device 15 may soon begin to operate.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of Fig. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of Fig. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of Fig. 68, the image formed in the specific area HR is a flat image (planar image), and in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of Fig. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of Fig. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of Fig. 68, the orientation and size of the flat image (planar image) can be maintained without change from when the flat image (planar image) is displayed to when it is not displayed. With this configuration, the orientation and size of the flat image (planar image) formed in the specific area HR do not change, which can contribute to maintaining the player's line of sight not toward the specific area HR itself, but toward a portion of the background image THG1 and a portion of the pattern image that are visible through the image forming the specific area HR.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of variable display effects through transparent areas are shown.
[Modification 1]
The variable display effect A through the transparent area in Fig. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area in Fig. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area in Fig. 68 are performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a right-hand hit. However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a left-hand hit.

[Modification 2]
In the variable display performance A through a transparent area in Fig. 66, the variable display performance B through a transparent area in Fig. 67, and the variable display performance C through a transparent area in Fig. 68, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9B did not change to other shapes or other colors for the player during the variable display using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. However, during the variable display using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9 may change to other shapes or other colors to suggest the possibility of an increased likelihood of winning, or during the variable display using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the reserved icon 9B may change to other shapes or other colors to suggest the possibility of an increased likelihood of winning.

[Modification 3]
In the variable display performance A through the transparent area of Fig. 66, the variable display performance B through the transparent area of Fig. 67, and the variable display performance C through the transparent area of Fig. 68, when an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR is displayed, it is possible to execute a performance in which the background image THG1 and the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area HR, and a part of the background image THG1 and a part of the pattern image are visible through the inside of the image forming the specific area HR. However, instead of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern as the pattern images, the variable icon 9 or the reserved icon 9B may be used. In this case, when the pattern image is a variable icon 9C, when an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR is displayed, the background image THG1 and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area HR, but inside the image forming the specific area HR, part of the background image THG1 and part or all of the pattern image (part of the variable icon 9C or all of the variable icon 9C) can be seen through the inside of the image forming the specific area HR; when the pattern image is a hold icon 9B, when an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR is displayed, the background image THG1 and the hold icon 9B are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area HR, but inside the image forming the specific area HR, part of the background image THG1 and part or all of the pattern image (part of the hold icon 9B or all of the hold icon 9B) can be seen through the inside of the image forming the specific area HR. This allows the player to direct his or her gaze toward the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9B, thereby informing the player of the timing when the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9B may change to a different shape or color, suggesting a higher chance of winning.

[Modification 4]
In the variable display performance A through the transparent area of Fig. 66, the variable display performance B through the transparent area of Fig. 67, and the variable display performance C through the transparent area of Fig. 68, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15 is preset to have a high probability of winning in the order of white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of winning)), and the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR, which is the same color as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15, is also preset to have a high probability of winning in the order of blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold), and rainbow (rainbow colors (high probability of winning)). However, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR may be the same color as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable part 15, and may be a color that increases the probability of winning by one color. For example, when the rectangular area 15 of the second movable role device 15 is lit blue, the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR becomes red, which is the color that increases the probability of winning by one level after blue, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR lights up red. Also, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR may be the same color as the rectangular area 15b of the second movable role device 15, which is the color that increases the probability of winning by two levels after blue. For example, when the rectangular area 15 of the second movable role device 15 is lit blue, the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR becomes green, which is the color that increases the probability of winning by two levels after blue, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent area HR lights up green.

[Modification 5]
The variable display performance A through a transparent area in Figure 66, the variable display performance B through a transparent area in Figure 67, and the variable display performance C through a transparent area in Figure 68 may not include some of the performances described above, or other performances may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means for displaying a plurality of types of images on a screen,
When an image forming a transparent closed specific area is displayed, it is possible to perform an effect in which a background image and a pattern image are difficult to see outside the image forming the specific area, and a part of the background image and a part of the pattern image are visible through the inside of the image forming the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-2
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-1,
In the effect, when the screen is darkened and an image forming the specific area is displayed, the outside of the image forming the specific area is darkened, and the inside of the image forming the specific area is maintained in a transparent state without being darkened.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-3
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-2,
The effect is to display a variable icon and a reserved icon outside the image forming the specific area, and even if the screen goes dark, the variable icon and the reserved icon are not hidden but maintained in a displayed state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-4
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
The effect is to arrange the pattern image in front of the background image, and when the pattern image starts to change from an opaque state, to display an image forming the specific area, and to change the pattern image from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and change it at high speed, and then to slow down the change display of the pattern image and change it from the semi-transparent state to an opaque state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-5
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
The effect is to display a boundary line between the inside and outside of the image forming the specific area in a predetermined color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-6
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-5,
a movable body that is movable between a retreated position and an advanced position and that is provided with a plurality of light-emitting means that can emit light in multiple colors;
In the performance, when the movable body is retracted at the retracted position, the predetermined color indicating the boundary line and the luminous color of the light emitted by a specific light-emitting means among the plurality of light-emitting means are made the same color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A6-7
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A6-1 to A6-6,
the image formed in the specific region is a two-dimensional image,
The effect maintains the posture and size of the flat image without changing it from when the flat image is displayed until when it is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The rhythmic win/loss notification effects A to C are explained below using Figures 69 to 71. In Figures 69 to 71, the first movable device 14 and the second movable device 15, which are arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, have been omitted for ease of viewing. Furthermore, when the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15 is activated during a variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative symbols, it indicates to the player that there is a higher likelihood of a win occurring after the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative symbols has ended (i.e., after multiple decorative symbols have stopped and been displayed) compared to when the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15 is not activated. Furthermore, when the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15 is activated during a temporary stop display in which multiple decorative symbols have aligned to form the same symbol, it indicates to the player that there is a higher likelihood of a win that will provide a greater benefit to the player out of the multiple types of wins available compared to when the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15 is not activated. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the first movable device 14 or the second movable device 15.

This rhythmic win/loss notification effect can execute a variable display effect in which multiple decorative symbols start changing (changing display) simultaneously, and after a predetermined time (fixed time), they all stop (simultaneously) to notify the result of the win/loss. In other words, by notifying the result of the win/loss after a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed, the variable display effect can execute a variable display effect in which the result of the win/loss is notified rhythmically. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the rhythmic win/loss notification effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the rhythmic win/loss notification effect is included, it changes the positions of the first movable device 14 and the second movable device 15 provided on the gaming board 2. The rhythmic win/loss notification effect is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading effects, but rather the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the rhythmic win/loss notification effect during the effect.

The various background images used in the decorative pattern change presentation (change display) can include, for example, city images, forest images, ocean images, seabed images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or videos.

Here, we will first explain Rhythmic Win/Loss Notification Feature A, then Rhythmic Win/Loss Notification Feature B, and finally Rhythmic Win/Loss Notification Feature C.

[Rhythmic Win/Loss Notification A]
First, the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect A will be described with reference to Figure 69. Figure 69 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect A. The rhythmic winning/losing notification effect A can execute a variable display effect in which the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns starts all at once (simultaneously), and after a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed, the display stops all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning/losing result. In other words, the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect A can execute a variable display effect in which the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns notifies the winning/losing result after a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed, thereby notifying the winning/losing result in a rhythmic manner.

In this embodiment, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A is triggered when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21, during a game state known as a right-hand hit. During this right-hand hit game state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," so that the image titled "Right Hand" is not obscured by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. When a special background image, described below, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image titled "Right Hand" is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" is an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Note that the gaming state of right-hitting can include the state of transitioning to time-saving gaming after a jackpot, as well as the state of transitioning to so-called b-time saving (play time).

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, where small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green)) and does not change to other colors. Because the sub-variable area is located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area as the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other display images appear, the other display images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and are not obstructed by the other display images. The sub-variable area is also located to the right of the fourth reserved display position (described below), and does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. It is also possible to not have a background image in the sub-variable area, in which case the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same vertical line in the order from top to bottom.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserve icons, as shown in Figure 69 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 69 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the second special chart reserve is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserve display area is provided for the second special chart reserve. In this second reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserve display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, when a special background image, described below, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a.

Here, white spherical reserve icons 9B are displayed at the first reserve display position 9Bd through the fourth reserve display position 9Bd. This means that there are only four white spherical reserve icons stored and not consumed. The following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start slot 20 from this point onward, and that the reserve icon 9B placed at the first reserve display position 9Bd is consumed, and then a game ball enters the second start slot 21, initiating the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A. In other words, it assumes that three to four reserve icons are always stored in the right-hand play state. This ensures that the duration of the decorative pattern change effect (variation display) from the start to the stop (decorative pattern stop display) is always a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore easy to understand intuitively, as they blend in with the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them difficult to distinguish. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the front of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L and other images positioned behind the front (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images, so they can always be seen, even during the rhythmic win/loss notification display A.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Other icons include the Character A icon and the Character B icon. The Character A icon and the Character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The expected winning probability of the Character A icon with a white aura and the Character B icon with a white aura is the same as that of the white spherical icon, but the expected winning probability of the Character A icon and the Character B icon is set to increase in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → rainbow aura (high probability of winning the jackpot).

Next, briefly, the second movable device 15 provided on the game board 2 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape, with a three-dimensional character pattern (here, "ORGA") formed on the same horizontal line. The second movable device 15 can be stopped at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). The second movable device 15 can move downward from its retracted position (home position) toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at an advanced position (deployed position) (second mode). In other words, in the second mode, the second movable device 15 is stopped so that the character pattern is horizontal; the second movable device 15, which was stopped at the retracted position (home position), simply moves downward in the same position and stops at the advanced position (deployed position). Furthermore, the second movable device 15 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in the advanced position (deployed position) and can stop at any angle (third mode).

The second movable device 15 can be moved back and forth between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position (deployed position) by an up-and-down movement motor (e.g., a stepping motor or DC motor) (not shown), which is an electrical drive source provided on the game board 2, and can also be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by a rotation motor (e.g., a stepping motor or DC motor), (not shown), which is an electrical drive source provided on the second movable device 15.

In the right-hand play mode, rhythmic win/loss notification effect A may begin. When this rhythmic win/loss notification effect A begins, as shown in FIG. 69(A), background image THG1 (here, an animated underground image) is displayed on display screen 7a as the background image. When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) ends, left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), center decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all displayed stopped (simultaneously), and the change icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 69 (B), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state and change rapidly. As shown in Figure 69 (C), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1." In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a temporary stop (simultaneously). At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a white spherical reserve icon 9B is placed at the fourth reserve display position 9Bd, resulting in a total of four reserve icons being stocked.

Next, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed as the background image on display screen 7a, left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a frozen number "2," center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a frozen number "3," and right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a frozen number "1." In other words, left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as frozen numbers (simultaneously). At this time, variable icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 69 (D), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state and change rapidly. As shown in Figure 69 (E), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2." In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a temporary stop (simultaneously). At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a white spherical reserve icon 9B is placed at the fourth reserve display position 9Bd, resulting in a total of four reserve icons being stocked.

Next, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, with background image THG1 (here, a video underground image) displayed as the background image on display screen 7a, left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a frozen number "3," center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a frozen number "1," and right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a frozen number "2." In other words, left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as frozen numbers (simultaneously). At this time, variable icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 69 (F), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state and change rapidly. As shown in Figure 69 (G), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and a win is announced. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed as the same number "1" without forming a reach or progressing to a super reach. In other words, the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced in Figures 69(B) and (C) coincides with the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced in Figures 69(D) and (E), and the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R line up to form the same pattern and a win is announced in Figures 69(F) and (G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(H), the first premium background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3"), which has seven colors as the background image, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, replacing the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video). This triggers the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily displayed with the same number "1" as the number, to disappear from the display screen 7a. The "Right Hit" image, which was displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, also disappears from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, which are located in the lower part of the display screen 7a, also disappear from the display screen 7a. The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed.

After a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the second movable prop 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the center position (advance position), and stops for a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds), as shown in Figure 69 (I).

After that, when the second movable device 15 returns from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), as shown in Figure 69 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R reappear as the same number "1" and are temporarily stopped. Furthermore, a specific image consisting of an indicator image TB and characters CRC is displayed below the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, near the center of the bottom edge of the display screen 7a. A portion of the left side of the characters CRC is displayed in front, covering a portion of the right side of the indicator image TB. Furthermore, a specific image background image THG4, which can enhance the visibility of the specific image consisting of the indicator image TB and characters CRC, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, switching from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium image THG3. When the indicator image TB and the character CRC are represented in bright colors, the specific image background image THG4 is primarily composed of dark colors (for example, gray, black, or a color close to gray or a color close to black), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple dark colors, or may be configured with effect images arranged so as not to impair the visibility of the specific image. When the indicator image TB and the character CRC are represented in dark colors, the specific image background image THG4 is primarily composed of light colors (for example, white or a color close to white), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple bright colors, or may be configured with effect images arranged so as not to impair the visibility of the specific image.

The indicator image TB, which constitutes the specific image, visually and intuitively displays the remaining time by shortening the length of the horizontal bar image. In this embodiment, the maximum remaining time is 40 seconds. In other words, the state in which the bar image is displayed at its longest (the state shown in Figure 69 (J)) represents the maximum remaining time (40 seconds). When the specific image (indicator image TB) is displayed and the countdown begins (timekeeping begins), the length of the bar image shortens from right to left. The color of the bar image of the indicator image is bright when the remaining time is at its maximum (40 seconds) and dark when the remaining time is at its minimum (0 seconds). The color gradually (or continuously) darkens from the maximum (40 seconds) to the minimum (0 seconds) remaining time (a display mode using a gradation). Note that when the color of the bar image of the indicator image gradually changes, the color gradually darkens every second (a display mode using a gradation). Additionally, when the color of the bar image in the indicator image changes continuously, the color tone changes smoothly and darkly (gradation display mode).

The character CRC that makes up the specific image is character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. In other words, character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as character CRC that makes up the specific image.

After that, as shown in Figure 69 (K), the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are maintained in a temporarily stopped state with the same pattern (here, the number "1") until the remaining time reaches the minimum (zero seconds) as indicated by the bar image of indicator image TB that constitutes the specific image. Of course, the character CRC that constitutes the specific image is also displayed.

When the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image indicates that the remaining time has reached its minimum (zero seconds) (in other words, when the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image indicates that the remaining time has reached its minimum (zero seconds) and a predetermined waiting period (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed in order to tease the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. 69(L), a promotion background image THG6 dedicated to notifying the confirmation of promotion is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the specific image background image THG4, and the indicator image TB and character C constituting the specific image are displayed. RC are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed as the same number "1", are again hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the second movable device 15 advances (moves) again from its stationary state in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 towards the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, approximately 30 degrees), and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

After a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed and the second movable device 15 has returned from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), as shown in Figure 69 (M), the background image on the display screen 7a suddenly switches from the promoted background image THG6 to a second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having a different seven colors from the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and then displayed as stopped and confirmed, thereby ending the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (hints) the player that a win has been confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, but by making it a different image from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that results in the "16RV expected to pass jackpot" described above) begins and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward variable display position 9Cd to consume it, the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) will begin.

In addition, in Figure 69 (L), the background image does not change from the specific image background image THG4 to a dedicated promotion background image THG6 indicating a confirmed promotion, but instead the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed again, replacing the specific image background image THG4, the indicator image TB and character CRC that make up the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the same number "1", are again hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and further, as shown in Figure 69 (I), the second movable device 15 advances (moves) again from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, towards the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and may remain there for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed and the second movable device 15 has returned from the advanced position to the retreated position (home position), the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in Figure 69 (M), and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporarily stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and then displayed as stopped and confirmed, and rhythmic win/loss notification performance A ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game described above, which is a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" or a "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot") begins and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, when the player starts to move toward variable display position 9Cd to consume the hold icon 9B placed at first hold display position 9Bd, the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) will begin.

In this way, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 69(B) and (C) do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 69(B) and (C)), the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 69(D) and (E) do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 69(D) and (E)), and the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 69(F) and (G) line up to form the same pattern and a win is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 69(F) and (G)) coincide, and the win/loss result is announced a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the decorative pattern fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) begins. The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in Figures 69(F) and (G) align to form the same pattern and a win is announced is the same as the change time in Figures 69(B) and (C) and the change time in Figures 69(D) and (E), and although this is a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, in reality the change time from Figure 69(F) to Figure 69(M) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds).

Furthermore, with rhythmic win/loss notification effect A, once a predetermined time (a fixed time of 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed since the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) began, the win/loss result will always be announced without forming a reach. Therefore, when the second special symbol reserve is consumed one after another in a right-hand play state, a loss will be continuously announced as a win/loss result every predetermined time (a fixed time of 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)). However, when losses are continuously announced in this rhythmic manner, the player is led to believe that the variation is also a loss, but then a win is suddenly announced, leaving the player momentarily confused as to what has happened (i.e., an unexpected event occurs), surprising and delighting the player.

Furthermore, in rhythmic win/loss notification effect A, as shown in Figure 69 (G), if the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed as the same pattern with the number "1," as well as the number "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "8," or "9," this will result in the above-mentioned "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" or "16R (effectively 15R) V-scheduled jackpot." As mentioned above, a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" has a total number of 16 rounds, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize opening 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize opening 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize opening 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (see Figure 13: Opening Pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (Essentially 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize opening is extremely short from round 14 to round 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, the "16R (Essentially 13R) V-Passing Jackpot" is essentially a 13R jackpot. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time (see Figure 14: Opening Pattern 33), allowing easy passage into the V-zone 39 within the first major prize opening 30. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot" has a total number of 16 rounds, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from R1 to R13 and R15, the first major prize slot 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, and in R16, the second major prize slot 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in R14, the second major prize slot 35 is only opened for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot in R14 is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, the "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot" is essentially a 15R jackpot. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 69 (M), when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and confirm as the number "7," the above-mentioned "16RV Passage Scheduled Jackpot" occurs. As mentioned above, a "16RV Passage Scheduled Jackpot" effectively has a total of 16 rounds. Rounds 1 through 13 and Round 15 open the first large prize opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. Rounds 14 and 16 open the second large prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 21). Rounds 10 and 12 open the V-shaped opening member 71 for a long time (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 31), allowing easy passage to the V-zone 39 within the first large prize opening 30.

In this way, as shown in Figure 69 (G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, temporarily stopped at the number "1," then, as shown in Figure 69 (I), the second movable device 15 is activated, causing the second movable device 15 to advance (move) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stop there, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a "16RV passing planned jackpot." At this point, even if the player is not notified of the "16RV passing jackpot," the second movable device 15 advances (moves) from its resting position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the center (advance position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, rotates counterclockwise a predetermined angle (e.g., approximately 30 degrees), and stops before the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the number "7" as the same symbol, as shown in FIG. 69(M). This gives the player a sense of anticipation of the "16RV passing jackpot." Then, as shown in FIG. 69(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R provisionally stop and display the number "7" as the same symbol, and then stop and display the confirmed symbol, thereby notifying the player of the "16RV passing jackpot."

In other words, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the second movable device 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a central position (advance position) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stops, and the second movable device 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a central position (advance position) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stops, It then advances (moves) again and stops after rotating counterclockwise a predetermined angle (for example, approximately 30 degrees), and because the second movable device 15 can operate in the first and second stages, players are highly interested in the operation of the second movable device 15, and the operation of the second movable device 15 can give players a sense of anticipation that a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" or a "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot" will turn into a "16RV-passing jackpot."

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification display A of this embodiment, once a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed since the decorative pattern change display (change display) began, the win/loss result will always be announced without forming a reach.Therefore, although the change time from Figure 69 (F) to Figure 69 (M) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in Figures 69 (F) and (G) align to form the same pattern and a win is announced is the same as the change time in Figures 69 (B) and (C) and the change time in Figures 69 (D) and (E), and the decorative pattern change display (change display) cannot change for the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) since the decorative pattern change display began. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) after subtracting this time to Figures 69(H) to 69(M) without fixing it to the times mentioned above, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations that occur after a win is announced. Specifically, the presentation control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 allocates the time for each of Figures 69(H) to 69(M) during the presentation.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of this embodiment, in FIG. 69 (L), the background image is not switched from the specific image background image THG4 to the promotion background image THG6 dedicated to the confirmation of promotion, but the specific image background image THG4 is again switched to the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3), and the indicator image TB and character CRC constituting the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern that was temporarily displayed with the same pattern, the number "1", is 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are again hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and further, as shown in Figure 69 (I), the second movable device 15 does not advance (move) from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 towards the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a, but remains stationary in the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in Figure 69 (M), and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and then displayed as stopped and confirmed, and rhythmic win/loss notification performance A ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game described above, which is a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" or a "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot") begins and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, when the player starts to move toward variable display position 9Cd to consume the hold icon 9B placed at first hold display position 9Bd, the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) will begin.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A, before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a confirmed winning state, it is possible to execute an effect (Figures 69 (J) and (K)) in which a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state after a winning game state has occurred (a specific image consisting of an indicator image TB and a character CRC). According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are not displayed in a confirmed winning state, a specific image is displayed after a winning game state has occurred, suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"). Therefore, even if the multiple decorative patterns derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) are displayed in a confirmed winning state, and the specific game state does not occur (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"), even if the multiple decorative patterns are not displayed in a confirmed winning state (i.e., the multiple decorative patterns are displayed in a provisional winning state), a specific image can be displayed to execute an upgrade effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"). This can increase excitement.

Furthermore, the effects in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A (Fig. 69 (J) and (K)) are performed after the effect in Fig. 69 (H) and (I) that displays the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 that suggests a win. With this configuration, the effects in Fig. 69 (H) and (I) first suggest a win, giving the player a sense of security, and furthermore, the promotion effect in Fig. 69 (J) and (K) after the effects in Fig. 69 (H) and (I) can build up anticipation for the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game that results in a "16RV passing jackpot").

Furthermore, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A (Fig. 69 (J) and (K)), it is possible to continue displaying a specific image consisting of an indicator image TB and a character CRC even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning state. With this configuration, the specific image continues to be displayed even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning state, which gives the player the feeling that the display mode of the multiple decorative patterns may change to another display mode, and heightens the player's anticipation for the change in the display mode of the multiple decorative patterns.

Furthermore, after the performance in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A (Fig. 69 (J), (K)), in Fig. 69 (L), the indicator image TB and character CRC constituting the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily displayed with the same pattern of the number "1", are also hidden (disappeared) again from the display screen 7a, and further, the second movable device 15 moves from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a state in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It advances (moves) again toward the center position (advance position) of the screen 7a, rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees), and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).After the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the second movable device 15 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed as a specific pattern, the number "7," thereby indicating the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16RV passing scheduled jackpot"). With this configuration, when the specific image and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) displayed in a winning state disappear, the movable body suddenly moves from the retracted position to the advanced position and appears, creating an impactful effect using the movable body. Furthermore, when the movable body returns to the retracted position, the number "7", which is the specific pattern indicating the occurrence of a specific game state, is displayed with all multiple decorative patterns aligned, so the success of the promotion effect due to the appearance of the movable body (confirmation of the occurrence of a specific game state (confirmation of the occurrence of a jackpot game that results in a "16RV passing planned jackpot")) can be emphasized to the player.

Furthermore, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A, the specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC in Figures 69 (J) and (K) is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a confirmed win state. With this configuration, the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the multiple decorative patterns are displayed in a confirmed win state. In other words, it is possible to convey the remaining time until the promotion effect starts (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), and therefore it is possible to appropriately display the time when the promotion effect will start (an approximate guide for when the promotion effect will start).

[Rhythmic Win/Loss Notification Presentation B]
Next, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B will be described with reference to Figure 70. Figure 70 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B. The rhythmic win/loss notification effect B can execute a variable display effect in which the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns starts all at once (simultaneously), and after a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed, the display stops all at once (simultaneously) to notify the result of the win/loss. In other words, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B can execute a variable display effect in which the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns notifies the result of the win/loss after a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed, thereby notifying the result of the win/loss in a rhythmic manner.

In this embodiment, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B is triggered when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, during a game state known as a right-hand hit. During this right-hand hit game state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," so that the image titled "Right Hand" is not obscured by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. When a special background image, described below, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image titled "Right Hand" is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" is an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Note that the gaming state of right-hitting can include the state of transitioning to time-saving gaming after a jackpot, as well as the state of transitioning to so-called b-time saving (play time).

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, where small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green)) and does not change to other colors. Because the sub-variable area is located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area as the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other display images appear, the other display images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and are not obstructed by the other display images. The sub-variable area is also located to the right of the fourth reserved display position (described below), and does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. It is also possible to not have a background image in the sub-variable area, in which case the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same vertical line in the order from top to bottom.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserve icons, as shown in Figure 70 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 70 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the second special chart reserve is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserve display area is provided for the second special chart reserve. In this second reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserve display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, when a special background image, described below, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a.

Here, white spherical reserve icons 9B are displayed at the first reserve display position 9Bd through the fourth reserve display position 9Bd. This means that there are only four white spherical reserve icons stored and not consumed. The following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start slot 20 from this point onward, and that the reserve icon 9B placed at the first reserve display position 9Bd is consumed, and then a game ball enters the second start slot 21, initiating the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B. In other words, it assumes that three to four reserve icons are always stored in the right-hand play state. This ensures that the duration of the decorative pattern change effect (variable display) from the start to the stop (decorative pattern stop display) is always a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore easy to understand intuitively, as they blend in with the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them difficult to distinguish. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the front of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L and other images positioned behind the front (i.e., the foreground) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images, so they can always be seen, even during the rhythmic win/loss notification display B.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Other icons include the Character A icon and the Character B icon. The Character A icon and the Character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The expected winning probability of the Character A icon with a white aura and the Character B icon with a white aura is the same as that of the white spherical icon, but the expected winning probability of the Character A icon and the Character B icon is set to increase in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → rainbow aura (high probability of winning the jackpot).

Next, to briefly explain the first movable device 14 provided on the gaming board 2, the first movable device 14 is configured as a vertically elongated rod-shaped member that can move left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable device 14 is normally capable of stopping in a retracted position (home position, see Figure 1) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). The first movable device 14 can move from the retracted position (home position) toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and stop at any advanced position (deployed position) in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), or can move from the retracted position (home position) to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and then stop (third mode). Furthermore, the first movable device 14 can move from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) and stop at any advanced position (deployed position) in front of the display screen 7a (fourth mode), or move from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a to the retracted position (home position) and then stop (fifth mode). Note that the first movable device 14 may be operated to the third mode after being operated to the second mode, or may be operated directly to the third mode without passing through the second mode. Also, the first movable device 14 may be operated to the fourth mode after being operated to the third mode, or may be operated directly to the fifth mode without passing through the fourth mode. Furthermore, when the first movable part 14 is moved to the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a (i.e., the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), part of the first movable part 14 may be covered by other decorative members provided on the gaming board 2, making part of the first movable part 14 difficult to see, or almost the entire first movable part 14 may be covered by other decorative members provided on the gaming board 2, making almost the entire first movable part 14 difficult to see, or almost the entire first movable part 14 may be easily visible, as when the first movable part 14 is retracted to the retracted position (home position).

The first movable device 14 can be moved back and forth between a retracted position (home position) and the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a by a left-right movement motor (not shown) (e.g., a stepping motor or DC motor), which is an electrical drive source provided on the game board 2.

The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and when in the extended position (deployed position), it is able to cover part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

In the right-hand play mode, rhythmic win/loss notification effect B may begin. When this rhythmic win/loss notification effect B begins, as shown in FIG. 70(A), background image THG1 (here, an animated underground image) is displayed on display screen 7a as the background image. When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) ends, left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), center decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all displayed stopped (simultaneously), and the change icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 70 (B), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state and change rapidly. As shown in Figure 70 (C), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1." In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a temporary stop (simultaneously). At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a white spherical reserve icon 9B is placed at the fourth reserve display position 9Bd, resulting in a total of four reserve icons being stocked.

Next, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed as the background image on display screen 7a, left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a frozen number "2," center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a frozen number "3," and right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a frozen number "1." In other words, left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as frozen numbers (simultaneously). At this time, variable icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 70 (D), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state and change rapidly. As shown in Figure 70 (E), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2." In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a temporary stop (simultaneously). At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a white spherical reserve icon 9B is placed at the fourth reserve display position 9Bd, resulting in a total of four reserve icons being stocked.

Next, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, with background image THG1 (here, a video underground image) displayed as the background image on display screen 7a, left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a frozen number "3," center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a frozen number "1," and right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a frozen number "2." In other words, left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as frozen numbers (simultaneously). At this time, variable icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 70 (F), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, changing rapidly. As shown in Figure 70 (G), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and a win is announced. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed as the same number "1" without forming a reach or developing into a super reach. In other words, the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced in Figures 70(B) and (C) coincides with the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced in Figures 70(D) and (E), and the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R line up to form the same pattern and a win is announced in Figures 70(F) and (G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(H), the first premium background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3"), which has seven colors as the background image, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, replacing the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video). This causes the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily displayed with the same number "1" as the number, to disappear from the display screen 7a. The "Right Hit" image, which was displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, also disappears from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, which are located in the lower part of the display screen 7a, also disappear from the display screen 7a. The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed.

After a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the first movable prop 14 moves from its resting position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds), as shown in Figure 70 (I).

After that, when the first movable device 14 has completed moving to the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 70 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R reappear with the same pattern, the number "1," and are displayed in a temporarily stopped state.Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a specific image consisting of the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of a coin is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a specific image background image THG4, which can enhance the visibility of the specific image, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, switching from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium image THG3. When the specific image, which is composed of the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin, is represented in bright colors, the specific image background image THG4 is primarily composed of dark colors (for example, gray, black, or a color close to gray or black), and may be a single color, a combination of multiple dark colors, or an effect image arranged so as not to impair the visibility of the specific image. When the specific image, which is composed of the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin, is represented in dark colors, the specific image background image THG4 is primarily composed of bright colors (for example, white or a color close to white), and may be a single color, a combination of multiple bright colors, or an effect image arranged so as not to impair the visibility of the specific image.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image starts at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a and rolls counterclockwise along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a toward the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 70 (K), until it reaches the left edge, then rolls counterclockwise along the left edge toward the upper left corner of the display screen 7a until it reaches the top edge, then rolls counterclockwise along the top edge toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a until it reaches the right edge, then rolls counterclockwise along the right edge toward the starting point, the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, until it reaches the bottom edge and stops rolling. In other words, the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image rolls around the perimeter of the display screen 7a.

In this embodiment, the time it takes for the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that makes up the specific image to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a (hereinafter referred to as the "rolling time") is 40 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that makes up the specific image begins to roll clockwise around the display screen 7a, a countdown begins (timekeeping begins), and the position of the coin indicates the remaining time.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image is character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. In other words, character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image.

After that, as shown in Figure 70 (L), the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are maintained in a temporarily stopped state with the same pattern (here, the number "1") until the time remaining (rolling time) for the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image to roll clockwise around the perimeter of the display screen 7a reaches a minimum (zero seconds); in other words, until the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image has rolled clockwise around the perimeter of the display screen 7a, completing one full rotation.

When the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image has completed a full rotation in a clockwise direction around the display screen 7a (in other words, when the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image has completed a full rotation in a clockwise direction around the display screen 7a and a predetermined waiting period (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed in order to tease the display of the final promotion result), as shown in Figure 70 (M), a promotion background image THG6 dedicated to the specific image, which indicates that the promotion has been confirmed, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a. The background image THG4 is switched over to the display, the characters CRC on the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were temporarily displayed also disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the first movable device 14, which is already stationary on the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in Figure 70 (I), moves towards the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

When the first movable device 14 returns to the retreat position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), as shown in Figure 70 (N), the background image suddenly switches from the promotion background image THG6 to a second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having a different seven colors from the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as provisionally stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and then stopped and confirmed, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B ends. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (hints) the player that a win has been confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, but by making it a different image from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that results in the "16RV expected to pass jackpot" described above) begins and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward variable display position 9Cd to consume it, the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) will begin.

In Figure 70 (M), the background image does not change from the specific image background image THG4 to a promotion background image THG6 specifically for indicating a confirmed promotion, and instead the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed again, replacing the specific image background image THG4. The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the first movable device 14, which is already stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in Figure 70 (I), does not move toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, but remains stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and may not move at all toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in Figure 70 (N), and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and then displayed as stopped and confirmed, and rhythmic win/loss notification performance B ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game described above, which is a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" or a "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot") begins and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, when the player starts to move toward variable display position 9Cd to consume the hold icon 9B placed at first hold display position 9Bd, the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) will begin.

In this way, in rhythmic win/loss notification effect B, the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 70(B) and (C) do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 70(B) and (C)), the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 70(D) and (E) do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 70(D) and (E)), and the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 70(F) and (G) line up to form the same pattern and a win is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 70(F) and (G)) coincide, and the win/loss result is announced a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the decorative pattern fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) begins. The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in Figures 70(F) and (G) align to form the same pattern and a win is announced is the same as the fluctuation time in Figures 70(B) and (C) and the fluctuation time in Figures 70(D) and (E), and is a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the decorative pattern fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) begins, but in reality the fluctuation time from Figures 70(F) to 70(N) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds).

Furthermore, in rhythmic win/loss notification effect B, once a predetermined time (a fixed time of 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed since the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) began, the win/loss result will always be announced without forming a reach. Therefore, when the second special symbol reserve is consumed one after another in a right-hand play state, a loss will be continuously announced as a win/loss result every predetermined time (a fixed time of 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)). However, when losses are continuously announced in this rhythmic manner, the player is led to believe that the variation is also a loss, but then a win is suddenly announced. This leaves the player momentarily confused as to what has happened (i.e., an unexpected event occurs), surprising and delighting the player.

Furthermore, in rhythmic win/loss notification presentation B, as shown in Figure 70 (G), if the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed as the same pattern with the number "1," as well as the number "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "8," or "9," this will result in the above-mentioned "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" or "16R (effectively 15R) V-scheduled jackpot." As mentioned above, a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" has a total number of 16 rounds, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize opening 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize opening 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize opening 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (see Figure 13: Opening Pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (Essentially 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize opening is extremely short from round 14 to round 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, the "16R (Essentially 13R) V-Passing Jackpot" is essentially a 13R jackpot. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time (see Figure 14: Opening Pattern 33), allowing easy passage into the V-zone 39 within the first major prize opening 30. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot" has a total number of 16 rounds, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from R1 to R13 and R15, the first major prize slot 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, and in R16, the second major prize slot 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in R14, the second major prize slot 35 is only opened for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot in R14 is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, the "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot" is essentially a 15R jackpot. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 70 (N), when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and confirm as the number "7," the above-mentioned "16RV Passage Scheduled Jackpot" occurs. As mentioned above, the "16RV Passage Scheduled Jackpot" effectively has a total of 16 rounds. Rounds 1 through 13 and Round 15 open the first large prize opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. Rounds 14 and 16 open the second large prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 21). Rounds 10 and 12 open the V-shaped opening member 71 for a long time (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 31), allowing easy passage to the V-zone 39 within the first large prize opening 30.

In this way, as shown in Figure 70 (G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern with the number "1" temporarily stopped, then, as shown in Figure 70 (I), the first movable device 14 is activated, causing the first movable device 14 to move from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a "16RV passing planned jackpot." At this point, even if the player is not notified of the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot," as shown in FIG. 70(N), before the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and display as the same number "7," as shown in FIG. 70(M), the first movable device 14 moves from the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(N), the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are provisionally stopped and displayed as the same number "7," and then stopped and confirmed, thereby notifying the player of the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot."

In other words, in rhythmic win/loss notification presentation B, the first movable device 14 moves from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a and stops in the first stage. The first movable device 14 then moves from the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 in the second stage. Because the first movable device 14 can operate in the first and second stages, players are highly interested in the operation of the first movable device 14, and the operation of the first movable device 14 can create a sense of anticipation in players that a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" or a "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot" will turn into a "16RV V-passing jackpot."

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification display B of this embodiment, once a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed since the decorative pattern change display (change display) began, the win/loss result will always be announced without forming a reach.Therefore, although the change time from Figure 70 (F) to Figure 70 (N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in Figures 70 (F) and (G) align to form the same pattern and a win is announced is the same as the change time in Figures 70 (B) and (C) and the change time in Figures 70 (D) and (E), and the decorative pattern change display (change display) cannot change for the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) since the decorative pattern change display began. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) after subtracting this time to Figures 70(H) to 70(N) without fixing it to the times mentioned above, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations that occur after a win is announced. Specifically, the presentation control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 allocates the time for each of Figures 70(H) to 70(N) during the presentation.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B, before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a confirmed winning state, a first effect (Figures 70 (J) to (L)) can be executed in which a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific gaming state after a winning gaming state has occurred is displayed, in which a specific image is displayed with the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are not displayed in a confirmed winning state, a specific image is displayed after a winning game state has occurred, suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"). Therefore, even if the multiple decorative patterns derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) are displayed in a confirmed winning state, and the specific game state does not occur (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"), even if the multiple decorative patterns are not displayed in a confirmed winning state (i.e., the multiple decorative patterns are displayed in a provisional winning state), a specific image can be displayed to execute an upgrade effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"). This can increase excitement.

Furthermore, the effects in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B (Fig. 70 (J)-(L)) are performed after the effect in Fig. 70 (H) and (I) that displays the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 that suggests a win. With this configuration, the effects in Fig. 70 (H) and (I) first suggest a win, giving the player a sense of security, and then the promotion effects in Fig. 70 (J)-(L) after the effects in Fig. 70 (H) and (I) can build up anticipation for the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game that results in a "16RV passing jackpot").

Furthermore, in the effects in Rhythmic Win/Loss Notification Effects B (Figures 70 (J)-(L)), it is possible to continue displaying a specific image consisting of the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin even when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning mode. With this configuration, because the specific image continues to be displayed even when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning mode, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the display mode of the multiple decorative patterns may change to another display mode, and it is possible to heighten the player's anticipation for the change in the display mode of the multiple decorative patterns.

Furthermore, after the performance in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B (Fig. 70 (J) to (L)), in Fig. 70 (M), the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were temporarily displayed also disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, in Fig. 70 (I), the first movable device 14, which is already stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, returns to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). When the first movable device 14 moves towards the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and returns to the retreat position (home position) over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), all of the decorative symbols are displayed as a specific symbol "7" indicating the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game that results in a "jackpot that is scheduled to pass 16RV"). This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that the promotion effect has been successful (the confirmation of the occurrence of a specific game state (the confirmation of the occurrence of a jackpot game that results in a "jackpot that is scheduled to pass 16RV")).

Furthermore, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B, the specific image in Figures 70 (J) to (L), which is composed of the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin, conveys the time remaining (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a confirmed win state. With this configuration, the specific image conveys the time remaining (approximate remaining time) until the multiple decorative patterns are displayed in a confirmed win state. In other words, it is possible to convey the time remaining until the promotion effect starts (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), and therefore it is possible to appropriately display the time when the promotion effect will start (an approximate guide for when the promotion effect will start).

[Rhythmic Win/Loss Notification C]
Next, the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C will be described with reference to Figure 71. Figure 71 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C. The rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C can execute a variable display effect in which the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns starts all at once (simultaneously), and after a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed, the display stops all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning/losing result. In other words, the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect C can execute a variable display effect in which the variable display (variable display) of multiple decorative patterns notifies the winning/losing result after a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed, thereby notifying the winning/losing result rhythmically.

In this embodiment, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C is triggered when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, during a game state known as a right-hand hit. During this right-hand hit game state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," so that the image titled "Right Hand" is not obscured by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. When a special background image, described below, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image titled "Right Hand" is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" is an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Note that the gaming state of right-hitting can include the state of transitioning to time-saving gaming after a jackpot, as well as the state of transitioning to so-called b-time saving (play time).

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, where small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green)) and does not change to other colors. Because the sub-variable area is located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area as the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other display images appear, the other display images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and are not obstructed by the other display images. The sub-variable area is also located to the right of the fourth reserved display position (described below), and does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. It is also possible to not have a background image in the sub-variable area, in which case the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same vertical line in the order from top to bottom.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserve icons, as shown in Figure 71 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 71 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the second special chart reserve is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserve display area is provided for the second special chart reserve. In this second reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserve display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, when a special background image, described below, is displayed on the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a.

Here, white spherical reserve icons 9B are displayed at the first reserve display position 9Bd through the fourth reserve display position 9Bd. This means that there are only four white spherical reserve icons stored and not consumed. The following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start hole 20 from this point onward, and that the reserve icon 9B placed at the first reserve display position 9Bd is consumed, and then a game ball enters the second start hole 21, initiating the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C. In other words, it assumes that three to four reserve icons are always stored in the right-hand play state. This ensures that the duration of the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) from the start to the stop (decorative pattern stop display) is always a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers, which represent the number of reserved balls, are displayed numerically, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the front of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L and other images positioned behind the front (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images, so they can always be seen, even during the rhythmic win/loss notification display C.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

To briefly explain the pending icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons"), the differences in shape and color represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery. For example, of the six icons - a yellow (gold) star icon, a purple spherical icon, a smiling spherical icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon - the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Other icons include the Character A icon and the Character B icon. The Character A icon and the Character B icon each have a white aura emanating from the entire icon. The expected winning probability of the Character A icon with a white aura and the Character B icon with a white aura is the same as that of the white spherical icon, but the expected winning probability of the Character A icon and the Character B icon is set to increase in the following order: white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → rainbow aura (high probability of winning the jackpot).

Next, to briefly explain the first movable device 14 provided on the gaming board 2, the first movable device 14 is configured as a vertically elongated rod-shaped member that can move left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable device 14 is normally capable of stopping in a retracted position (home position, see Figure 1) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). The first movable device 14 can move from the retracted position (home position) toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and stop at any advanced position (deployed position) in front of the display screen 7a (second mode), or can move from the retracted position (home position) to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and then stop (third mode). Furthermore, the first movable device 14 can move from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a toward a retracted position (home position) and stop at any advanced position (deployed position) in front of the display screen 7a (fourth mode), or move from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a to the retracted position (home position) and then stop (fifth mode). Note that the first movable device 14 may be operated to the third mode after being operated to the second mode, or may be operated directly to the third mode without passing through the second mode. Also, the first movable device 14 may be operated to the fourth mode after being operated to the third mode, or may be operated directly to the fifth mode without passing through the fourth mode. Furthermore, when the first movable part 14 is moved to the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a (i.e., the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), part of the first movable part 14 may be covered by other decorative members provided on the gaming board 2, making part of the first movable part 14 difficult to see, or almost the entire first movable part 14 may be covered by other decorative members provided on the gaming board 2, making almost the entire first movable part 14 difficult to see, or almost the entire first movable part 14 may be easily visible, as when the first movable part 14 is retracted to the retracted position (home position).

The first movable device 14 can be moved back and forth between a retracted position (home position) and the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a by a left-right movement motor (not shown) (e.g., a stepping motor or DC motor), which is an electrical drive source provided on the game board 2.

The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and when in the extended position (deployed position), it is able to cover part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

In the right-hand play mode, rhythmic win/loss notification display C may begin. When this rhythmic win/loss notification display C begins, as shown in FIG. 71(A), background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the animation) is displayed on display screen 7a as the background image. When the decorative pattern change display (change display) ends, left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), center decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are all displayed stopped (simultaneously), and the change icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 71 (B), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state and change rapidly. As shown in Figure 71 (C), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1." In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a temporary stop (simultaneously). At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a white spherical reserve icon 9B is placed at the fourth reserve display position 9Bd, resulting in a total of four reserve icons being stocked.

Next, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed as the background image on display screen 7a, left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a frozen number "2," center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a frozen number "3," and right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a frozen number "1." In other words, left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as frozen numbers (simultaneously). At this time, variable icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 71 (D), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state and change rapidly. As shown in Figure 71 (E), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2." In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a temporary stop (simultaneously). At this time, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a white spherical reserve icon 9B is placed at the fourth reserve display position 9Bd, resulting in a total of four reserve icons being stocked.

Next, after a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed as the background image on display screen 7a, left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a frozen number "3," center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a frozen number "1," and right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a frozen number "2." In other words, left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as frozen numbers (simultaneously). At this time, variable icon 9C disappears from display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, with background image THG1 (here, an underground image of the video) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a variable display of the decorative pattern begins as shown in Figure 71 (F), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode in which they change at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position. This results in three hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, changing rapidly. As shown in Figure 71 (G), with background image THG1 (here, a moving underground image) displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state back to an opaque state before a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and a win is announced. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all (simultaneously) temporarily stopped and displayed as the same number "1" without forming a reach or progressing to a super reach. In other words, the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced in Figures 71(B) and (C) coincides with the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced in Figures 71(D) and (E), and the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R line up to form the same pattern and a win is announced in Figures 71(F) and (G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), the first premium background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3"), which has seven colors as the background image, suddenly appears on the display screen 7a, replacing the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the video). This causes the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily displayed with the same number "1" as the number, to disappear from the display screen 7a. The "Right Hit" image, which was displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, also disappears from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, which are located in the lower part of the display screen 7a, also disappear from the display screen 7a. The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that a win has been confirmed.

After a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the first movable prop 14 will then move from its resting position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds), as shown in Figure 71 (I).

After that, when the first movable device 14 has completed moving to the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 71 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R reappear with the same pattern, the number "1," and are displayed in a temporarily stopped state.Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a specific image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the specific image background image THG4, which can improve the visibility of the specific image, suddenly switches from the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium image THG3, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the specific image, which is composed of the character CRC on the obverse (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ arranged to cover part of the character CRC, is expressed in a bright color, the specific image background image THG4 is primarily composed of dark colors (e.g., gray, black, or a color close to gray or black), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple dark colors, or may be configured with an effect image arranged so as not to impair the visibility of the specific image. When the specific image, which is composed of the character CRC on the obverse (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ arranged to cover part of the character CRC, is expressed in a dark color, the specific image background image THG4 is primarily composed of light colors (e.g., white or a color close to white), and may be a single color or a combination of multiple bright colors, or may be configured with an effect image arranged so as not to impair the visibility of the specific image.

Specific images that are constructed by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front) of a coin and placing a countdown image NJ so as to cover part of the character CRC specifically have the character CRC attached to the entire surface (front) of the coin, and the countdown image NJ placed below the surface (front) of the coin so as to cover part of the character CRC.

Here, for the coins that make up a specific image, the center point (hereinafter simply referred to as the "center point") is defined as the point where a vertical line passing through the top and bottom points of the coin (hereinafter simply referred to as the "vertical line of the coin that makes up the specific image") intersects with a horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the coin (hereinafter simply referred to as the "horizontal line of the coin that makes up the specific image").

Furthermore, the countdown image NJ displays a number image counting down (timekeeping) within a circular shape, and the vertical line passing through the top and bottom points of the circle (hereinafter simply referred to as the "vertical line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image") coincides with the vertical line of the coin constituting the specific image. Furthermore, the horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the countdown image NJ (hereinafter simply referred to as the "horizontal line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image") does not coincide with the horizontal line of the coin constituting the specific image, but is parallel to it, and the horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circle is located below the horizontal line of the coin constituting the specific image.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image rotates counterclockwise and clockwise around a central point, and is displayed in a manner that causes the character CRC to oscillate in conjunction with the oscillation of the coin as it repeatedly rotates in this manner. In contrast, the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image, which is positioned so as to cover part of the character CRC, is positioned on the obverse (front) of the coin, but unlike the character CRC, it does not oscillate in conjunction with the oscillation of the coin. When the coin rotates counterclockwise around its central point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image moves in parallel to the left of the vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image, and when the coin rotates clockwise around its central point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image moves in parallel to the right of the vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image.

Even if the vertical line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image moves parallel to the left or right of the vertical line of the coin constituting the specific image, the distance dimension between the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image and the horizontal line of the coin constituting the specific image does not change. In other words, the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image simply moves horizontally to the left when the coin rotates counterclockwise around its center point, and simply moves horizontally to the right when the coin rotates clockwise around its center point.

The number image displayed within the circle in the countdown image NJ is the number image that counts down (times), and in this embodiment, it is 40 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image and the countdown image NJ are displayed on the display screen 7a, the countdown begins (times start), and the number image that counts down (times) in the countdown image NJ indicates the remaining time.

The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image is character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. In other words, character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image.

After that, as shown in Figures 71(K) and (L), the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R remain temporarily displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "1") until the number image counting down (timekeeping) in the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image reaches zero seconds.

When the countdown (timekeeping) number image in the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image reaches zero seconds (in other words, when the countdown (timekeeping) number image in the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image reaches zero seconds and a predetermined waiting period (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed in order to tease the display of the final promotion result), as shown in Figure 71 (M), a promotion background image THG6 dedicated to notifying the confirmation of promotion is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the specific image background image THG4. The characters CRC and countdown image NJ displayed on the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which had been temporarily stopped, also disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the first movable device 14, which is already stationary on the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in Figure 71 (I), moves towards the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

When the first movable device 14 returns to the retreat position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), as shown in Figure 71 (N), the background image suddenly switches from the promotion background image THG6 to a second premium background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having a different seven colors from the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as provisionally stopped with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and then stopped and confirmed, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C ends. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premium background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (hints) the player that a win has been confirmed, just like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3, but by making it a different image from the first rainbow background image THG3, it is possible to emphasize the promoted symbol (here, the number "7").

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that results in the "16RV expected to pass jackpot" described above) begins and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward variable display position 9Cd to consume it, the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) will begin.

In Figure 71 (M), the background image does not change from the specific image background image THG4 to a promotion background image THG6 specifically for indicating a confirmed promotion, and instead the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed again, replacing the specific image background image THG4. The character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the first movable device 14, which is already stationary on the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in Figure 71 (I), does not move toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, but remains stationary on the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and may not move at all toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the first premium image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image in Figure 71 (N), and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and then displayed as stopped and confirmed, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game described above, which is a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" or a "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot") begins and ends, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variable display. Next, when the player starts to move toward variable display position 9Cd to consume the hold icon 9B placed at first hold display position 9Bd, the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) will begin.

In this way, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C, the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 71(B) and (C) do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 71(B) and (C)), the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 71(D) and (E) do not line up to form the same pattern and a loss is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 71(D) and (E)), and the timing when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R according to Figures 71(F) and (G) line up to form the same pattern and a win is announced (i.e., the fluctuation time according to Figures 71(F) and (G)) coincide, and the win/loss result is announced a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the decorative pattern fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) begins. The timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in Figures 71(F) and (G) align to form the same pattern and a win is announced is the same as the change time in Figures 71(B) and (C) and the change time in Figures 71(D) and (E), and is a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, but in reality the change time from Figure 71(F) to Figure 71(N) is 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds).

Furthermore, in rhythmic win/loss notification effect C, once a predetermined time (a fixed time of 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed since the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) began, the win/loss result is always announced without forming a reach. Therefore, when the second special symbol reserve is consumed one after another in a right-hand play state, a loss will be continuously announced as a win/loss result every predetermined time (a fixed time of 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)). However, when losses are continuously announced in this rhythmic manner, the player is led to believe that the variation is also a loss, but then a win is suddenly announced. This leaves the player momentarily confused as to what has happened (i.e., an unexpected event occurs), surprising and delighting the player.

Furthermore, in rhythmic win/loss notification presentation C, as shown in Figure 71 (G), if the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and confirmed as the same pattern with the number "1," as well as the number "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "8," or "9," this will result in the above-mentioned "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" or "16R (effectively 15R) V-scheduled jackpot." As mentioned above, a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled jackpot" has a total number of 16 rounds, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize opening 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize opening 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize opening 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (see Figure 13: Opening Pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (Essentially 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize opening is extremely short from round 14 to round 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, the "16R (Essentially 13R) V-Passing Jackpot" is essentially a 13R jackpot. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time (see Figure 14: Opening Pattern 33), allowing easy passage into the V-zone 39 within the first major prize opening 30. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot" has a total number of 16 rounds, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from R1 to R13 and R15, the first major prize slot 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, and in R16, the second major prize slot 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in R14, the second major prize slot 35 is only opened for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot in R14 is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, the "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing jackpot" is essentially a 15R jackpot. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71 (N), when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and confirm as the number "7," the above-mentioned "16RV Passage Scheduled Jackpot" occurs. As mentioned above, the "16RV Passage Scheduled Jackpot" effectively has a total of 16 rounds. Rounds 1 through 13 and Round 15 open the first large prize opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. Rounds 14 and 16 open the second large prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 21). Rounds 10 and 12 open the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 for a long time (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 31), allowing easy passage to the V-zone 39 within the first large prize opening 30.

In this way, as shown in Figure 71 (G), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, temporarily stopping at the number "1," the first movable device 14 is then activated as shown in Figure 71 (I), causing the first movable device 14 to move from a stationary state in the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a "16RV passing planned jackpot." At this point, even if the player is not notified of the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot," the first movable device 14 moves from the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 71(M) before the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R stop and display as the same pattern with the number "7" as shown in FIG. 71(N), thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation of the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot." Then, as shown in FIG. 71(N), the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are provisionally stopped and displayed as the same pattern with the number "7," and then are stopped and confirmed, thereby notifying the player of the "16RV passing scheduled jackpot."

In other words, in rhythmic win/loss notification presentation C, the first movable device 14 moves from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a and stops in the first stage. The first movable device 14 then moves from the right side (right edge) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 in the second stage. Because the first movable device 14 can operate in the first and second stages, players are highly interested in the operation of the first movable device 14, and the operation of the first movable device 14 can give players a sense of anticipation that a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" or a "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot" will turn into a "16RV V-passing jackpot."

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification display C of this embodiment, once a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has passed since the decorative pattern change display (change display) began, the win/loss result will always be announced without forming a reach.Therefore, although the change time from Figure 71 (F) to Figure 71 (N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), the timing at which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in Figures 71 (F) and (G) align to form the same pattern and a win is announced is the same as the change time in Figures 71 (B) and (C) and the change time in Figures 71 (D) and (E), and the decorative pattern change display (change display) cannot change for the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) since the decorative pattern change display began. Therefore, by freely allocating the remaining time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) after subtracting this time to Figures 71(H) to 71(N) rather than fixing it to the times mentioned above, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations that occur after a win is announced. Specifically, the presentation control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 allocates the time for each of Figures 71(H) to 71(N) during the presentation.

In addition, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C, before the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a confirmed winning state, a first performance (Figures 71 (J) to (L)) can be executed in which a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific gaming state after a winning gaming state has occurred is displayed, in which a character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ is arranged to cover part of the character CRC. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are not displayed in a confirmed winning state, a specific image is displayed after a winning game state has occurred, suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"). Therefore, even if the multiple decorative patterns derived and displayed by the variable effect (variable display) are displayed in a confirmed winning state, and the specific game state does not occur (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"), even if the multiple decorative patterns are not displayed in a confirmed winning state (i.e., the multiple decorative patterns are displayed in a provisional winning state), a specific image can be displayed to execute an upgrade effect suggesting the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game resulting in a "16RV passing jackpot"). This can increase excitement.

Furthermore, the effects in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C (Fig. 71 (J)-(L)) are performed after the effect in Fig. 71 (H) and (I) that displays the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premium background image THG3 that suggests a win. With this configuration, the effects in Fig. 71 (H) and (I) first suggest a win, giving the player a sense of security, and furthermore, the promotion effects in Fig. 71 (J)-(L) that follow the effects in Fig. 71 (H) and (I) can build anticipation for the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game that results in a "16RV passing jackpot").

Furthermore, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C (Fig. 71 (J)-(L)), even when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning state, it is possible to continue displaying a specific image consisting of the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ arranged to cover part of the character CRC. With this configuration, because the specific image continues to be displayed even when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a winning state, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the display mode of the multiple decorative patterns may change to another display mode, and to heighten the player's anticipation for the change in the display mode of the multiple decorative patterns.

Furthermore, after the performance in the rhythmic winning/losing notification performance C (Fig. 71 (J) to (L)), in Fig. 71 (M), the character CRC and countdown image NJ attached to the obverse (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that were temporarily stopped also disappear from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in Fig. 71 (I), the first movable device 14, which is already in a stationary state on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, moves to a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). When the first movable device 14 moves toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and returns to the retreat position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), all of the decorative symbols are displayed as a specific symbol indicating the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a jackpot game that results in a "16RV passing jackpot"), so the success of the promotion effect due to the appearance of the movable device (the confirmation of the occurrence of a specific game state (the confirmation of the occurrence of a jackpot game that results in a "16RV passing jackpot")) can be emphasized to the player.

Furthermore, in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C, the specific image shown in Figures 71 (J) to (L) has the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ arranged to cover part of the character CRC. This image conveys the time remaining (approximate time remaining) until the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in a confirmed win state. With this configuration, the specific image conveys the time remaining (approximate time remaining) until the multiple decorative patterns are displayed in a confirmed win state. In other words, it is possible to convey the time remaining until the promotion effect starts (approximate time remaining until the promotion effect starts), and therefore it is possible to appropriately display the time when the promotion effect will start (an approximate guide for when the promotion effect will start).

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the rhythmic winning/losing notification presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the rhythmic win/loss notification presentation A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification presentation B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification presentation C of FIG. 71, an image display device 7 (display means) is provided which can display the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) which can notify the win/loss result of "win" or "lose", and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are displayed without forming a reach for each variable display. The first effect (FIGS. 69B-69G for rhythmic win/loss notification effect A, FIG. 70B-70G for rhythmic win/loss notification effect B, and FIG. 71B-71G for rhythmic win/loss notification effect C) in which the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same time to notify the result of the winning or losing operation can be executed not in a so-called left-hand play state (normal play state) but in a so-called right-hand play state (special play state) that differs from the normal play state. With this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same time to notify the result of the winning or losing operation rhythmically without forming a reach for each variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns). This allows the player to be led to believe that the change is also a natural loss when a rhythmic loss is continuously announced, and then a win is suddenly announced, leaving the player momentarily confused as to what has happened (i.e., an unexpected event occurs), resulting in a sense of surprise and delight. This type of innovative variable display using the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern can be performed, which contributes to reducing the monotony caused by the changes in the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first effect of the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of Fig. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of Fig. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of Fig. 71, the time from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) to the notification of the win/loss result, "win" or "lose," is a fixed time that does not change for each variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns). With this configuration, the win/loss result, "win" or "lose," is notified at regular intervals, allowing the player to know the win/loss result rhythmically.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of Figure 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of Figure 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of Figure 71 includes an effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same time to notify of a "miss" as the win/loss result, and an effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped at the same time to notify of a "win" as the win/loss result. According to this configuration, for each variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are simultaneously temporarily stopped and the winning or losing result is announced, the result is either a "win" or a "loss." Therefore, when losses are continuously announced rhythmically as winning or losing results, the player is led to believe that the variation is also a loss, but is suddenly informed of a win. This makes it possible to realize a mode in which a win is suddenly announced when losses are continuously announced rhythmically, so that when the player believes that the variation is also a loss, the player is momentarily confused as to what has happened (i.e., an unexpected event occurs), which contributes to increasing the player's surprise at the win.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C of FIG. 71, there is a movable body (the second movable role 15 in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the first movable role 14 in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B, and the first movable role 14 in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C) operated by an electric drive source (a stepping motor or a DC motor), and in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time by the first performance to notify a win as a win/loss result, the movable body is moved by the first It is possible to execute a second performance that operates in response to a winning pattern (in rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the second performance in which the second movable device 15 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position in Figure 69 (I); in rhythmic win/loss notification performance B, the third performance in which the first movable device 14 moves from the retracted position toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) in Figure 70 (I); in rhythmic win/loss notification performance C, the third performance in which the first movable device 14 moves from the retracted position toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) in Figure 71 (I). In this embodiment, as described above, when the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15, which are movable bodies, are activated while the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are aligned to form the same pattern and are temporarily stopped, the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15 can suggest to the player that, among the multiple types of winning, there is a higher likelihood of a winning that will provide a player with a profit, compared to when the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15 are not activated. Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation of the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15. As a result, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) indicate a winning result, the player can be made to pay close attention to whether the first movable role device 14 or the second movable role device 15, which are movable bodies, is activated, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of whether the winning will be upgraded to a winning that will provide a player with a profit.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the second performance in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C of FIG. 71, a third performance is performed in which the movable body is operated in a second win mode different from the first win mode (in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the second movable device 15 rotates counterclockwise at the advanced position by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees) in FIG. 69(L) and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) in the third mode, and in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B, the third mode ...). In Figure 71 (L), the first movable device 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to a retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) (fifth mode), and in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C, the first movable device 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to a retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) (fifth mode). In this embodiment, as described above, when the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15, which are movable bodies, are activated while the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple sets of decorative patterns) are aligned to form the same pattern and are temporarily stopped, it is possible to suggest to the player that, compared to when the first movable role device 14 or the second movable role device 15 is not activated, there is a higher likelihood of a win that will provide a player with a profit out of the multiple types of wins that exist. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15. When a win is announced as the result of the lottery, the first movable device 14 and the second movable device 15, which are movable bodies, are activated to create the first winning pattern, and then the player is made to watch whether the movable bodies will be activated again or not, thereby providing the player with an unprecedented presentation in which the movable bodies can be activated in two stages when a win is announced as the result of the lottery, and making the player look forward to whether the win will be upgraded to one that will give the player a greater benefit.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect in the rhythmic win/loss notification effect A of Fig. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B of Fig. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C of Fig. 71 includes an effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) that are already temporarily stopped are simultaneously displayed after the third effect. According to this configuration, after the third effect in which the movable body is activated to a second win mode different from the first win mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are simultaneously displayed as stopped, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are simultaneously displayed as stopped, so that the player can be notified of whether or not the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (a set of decorative patterns) are simultaneously displayed as stopped at a timing when the player's expectations for an upgrade to a win that will provide a greater benefit due to the two-stage activation of the movable body increase.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the rhythmic winning/losing notification effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The rhythmic win/loss notification effect A in Fig. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification effect B in Fig. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification effect C in Fig. 71 are performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a right-hand hit (a specific game state different from the normal game state). However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a left-hand hit (normal game state).

[Modification 2]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification presentation A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification presentation B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification presentation C of FIG. 71, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple sets of decorative patterns) are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) to notify the result of the win/loss as "win" or "loss." However, the win/loss result may also include "small win" in addition to "win" or "loss." This increases the variety of win/loss results displayed, and allows the player to focus on the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple sets of decorative patterns) that are displayed to determine whether the win is a "win" or a "small win."

[Modification 3]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification display A in Figure 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification display B in Figure 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification display C in Figure 71, the final promotion result is that, if the promotion display is successful using the appearance of the first movable role 14 or the second movable role 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) will be displayed as the same number "7", and then the player will be informed that a jackpot game will occur which will be a "jackpot expected to pass 16RV". However, even if the first movable role device 14 or the second movable role device 15 appears, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plurality of decorative patterns) do not all line up to the same pattern of the number "7" and are promoted (for example, the number "1" where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plurality of decorative patterns) line up to the same pattern does not switch to the number "7"), and then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plurality of decorative patterns) may all line up to the same pattern of the number "7". This can increase the variety of presentations.

[Modification 4]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification display A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification display B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification display C of FIG. 71, a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot game, which is a "16RV passing jackpot," is displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in a winning mode) is communicated. At this time, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) may be announced by a voice message, such as "5 seconds remaining," played from the speaker 67. In this way, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) can be communicated to the player by the specific image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the voice message played from the speaker 67, making it easier for the player to grasp the remaining time (approximate remaining time).

[Modification 5]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification display A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification display B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification display C of FIG. 71, a specific image indicating the occurrence of a jackpot game, which is a "16RV passing jackpot," is displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and indicates the time (approximate time remaining) until the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in a winning mode). However, a transparent light guide plate may be provided in front of the display screen 7a, and the specific image may be displayed on the transparent light guide plate. In this case, because there is a limit to the number of images that can be displayed on the light guide plate, the light guide plate does not indicate the remaining time (approximate time remaining) every second, but instead displays, for example, "15 seconds remaining,""5 seconds remaining," or "0 seconds remaining." By arranging a plurality of full-color LEDs around the transparent light guide plate, the light emitted by the full-color LEDs changes color as the remaining time (approximate remaining time) becomes shorter, for example, "15 seconds remaining" may be displayed in bright white, "5 seconds remaining" in bright blue, and "0 seconds remaining" in red. Even when the remaining time (approximate remaining time) appears in a predetermined color, various images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed through the transparent light guide plate.

[Modification 6]
In the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A of Figure 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B of Figure 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification performance C of Figure 71, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in the form of a win) in Figure 69 (J) and (K) of the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the display of a specific image consisting of the indicator image TB and the character CRC continues until the remaining time reaches the minimum (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB, and in Figures 70 (J) to (L) of the rhythmic win/loss notification performance B, even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (plurality of decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in the form of a win), the display of the specific image consisting of the indicator image TB and the character CRC continues until the remaining time reaches the minimum (zero seconds), and ) with the character CRC attached, the display of the specific image (the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin) continues until the time (rolling time) for the specific image (the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin) to rotate clockwise around the display screen 7a reaches the minimum (zero seconds) remaining, and even when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (multiple decorative patterns) are displayed in the same pattern (i.e., in a winning mode) in Figures 71 (J) to (L) of the rhythmic win/loss notification presentation C, the display of the specific image with the character CRC attached to the obverse (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ arranged to cover part of the character CRC continues until the number image counting down (timed) in the countdown image NJ reaches zero seconds. However, the display of the specific image may be ended before zero seconds (any time between the timed start and zero seconds). In this case, a dedicated promotion background image THG6 indicating that the promotion has been confirmed is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a, switching from the specific image background image THG4 which can increase the visibility of the specific image, the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R which were displayed as temporarily stopped also disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, in the rhythmic win/loss notification performance A, the second movable device 15 advances (moves) again from a stationary state at a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 toward the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the central position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., approximately 30 degrees), and stops for a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds). Furthermore, in rhythmic win/loss notification effects B and C, the first movable device 14, which is already stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in Figures 70(I) and 71(I), moves toward a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds). In this way, the second movable device 15 or the first movable device 14 suddenly advances before the clock strikes zero (any time between the clock strikes zero), emphasizing the occurrence of a promotion effect as an impactful effect. The arbitrary time between the clock strikes zero and the clock strikes zero is determined by the sub-control board 90.

[Modification 7]
The specific image character CRC in the rhythmic win/loss notification display A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification display B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification display C of FIG. 71 was the character B that may appear as the reserved icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. In other words, the character B that may appear as the reserved icon 9B and the variable icon 9C appeared on the display screen 7a as the specific image character CRC. However, the specific image character CRC may be a promotion character that appears only in the rhythmic win/loss notification displays A to C, or a premium character that appears when a so-called premium image is displayed may also appear in the rhythmic win/loss notification displays A to C. In either case, because it is a character that is rarely seen, it can contribute to further enhancing the presentation effect of the rhythmic win/loss notification displays A to C.

[Modification 8]
The rhythmic win/loss notification display A in Figure 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification display B in Figure 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification display C in Figure 71 are performed in a gaming state of right-hand play, and furthermore, are premised on the assumption that three to four reserved icons are always kept stocked in the gaming state of right-hand play. This gaming state of right-hand play includes a state in which a time-saving game is entered after a jackpot game ends, as well as a state in which a so-called b-time-saving (play-time) is entered. In this gaming state of right-hand play, with three to four reserved icons always stocked, a decorative pattern variation display (variable display) is initiated, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all change from an opaque state to a translucent state at the same time, and the rapidly changing display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8R is reached within a predetermined time (a fixed time of 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)). C, the right decorative pattern 8R all slow down (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all (simultaneously) are temporarily displayed as stopped, and when the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) has elapsed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all (simultaneously) displayed as stopped. In this way, in a gaming state of right-hitting, with three to four reserved icons always stocked, the period of the decorative pattern change effect (change display) from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative pattern) is always the above-mentioned predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)). However, in a gaming state of right-hitting, regardless of the number of reserved icons stored, the period of the decorative pattern change presentation (change display) from the start to the stop (stop display of decorative pattern) may always be the above-mentioned predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

[Modification 9]
The rhythmic win/loss notification display A in Figure 69, the rhythmic win/loss notification display B in Figure 70, and the rhythmic win/loss notification display C in Figure 71 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
Aspect A7-1
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a set of decorative symbols capable of informing a winning or losing result,
The first effect of notifying the winning or losing result by temporarily stopping and displaying the set of decorative symbols simultaneously without forming a reach for each variable display of the set of decorative symbols is not executed in a normal game state but can be executed in a specific game state different from the normal game state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A7-2
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
In the first performance, the time from the start of the variable display of the set of decorative patterns to the announcement of the winning or losing result is a fixed time that is not changed for each variable display of the set of decorative patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A7-3
A gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or A7-2,
The first effect includes an effect of simultaneously temporarily stopping and displaying the set of decorative symbols to notify a loss as a winning result, and an effect of simultaneously temporarily stopping and displaying the set of decorative symbols to notify a win as a winning result.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A7-4
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-3,
a movable body operated by an electric drive source;
In a state in which the set of decorative symbols are simultaneously temporarily stopped and displayed by the first performance to notify a win as a winning result, a second performance can be executed in which the movable body is operated in a first winning mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A7-5
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-4,
After the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the movable body is operated in a second hitting mode different from the first hitting mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect A7-6
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-5,
The first effect is to simultaneously stop and display the set of decorative symbols that have already been temporarily stopped after the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol competition effects A to C are explained below using Figures 72 to 74. These decorative symbol competition effects are executed during the special symbol variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative symbol competition effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative Design Competition A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating the decorative pattern competition effect A. This decorative pattern competition effect A is an effect that occurs during one variation of a special pattern. In the decorative pattern competition effect A, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is first performed. In this decorative pattern variation effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of multiple decorative patterns. In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. The decorative patterns included in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether they are a jackpot or a loss. When decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R with the same identifier (number) are displayed in a stopped state, they become a jackpot pattern. The state in which decorative patterns with the same identifier are displayed in a stopped state is also called a double-digit pattern. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed differently from the double-digit symbols, they become losing symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (B), jackpot symbol display effect A is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect A, ally character CRA and first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on display screen 7a. The first jackpot symbol XC1 has decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are all even numbers, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a time-saving game state after a jackpot. Ally character CRA is displayed stopped in a position on the left of display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (C), jackpot symbol display effect B is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect B, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed below the first jackpot symbol XC1. The second jackpot symbol XC2 has decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are odd-numbered repeats, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a probability variable game state after a jackpot. In other words, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (D), jackpot symbol display effect C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect C, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA more closely than the second jackpot symbol XC2. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (E), jackpot symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect D, the first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position it was in before approaching the ally character CRA, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA, as if replacing it. In other words, the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the first jackpot symbol XC1. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (F), jackpot symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect E, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is ejected outside the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed stopped approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative Design Competition B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol race effect B. This decorative symbol race effect B is an effect that occurs during one variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol race effect B, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is first performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of multiple decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each a group of decorative symbols. Each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a jackpot or a loss. When decorative symbols with the same identifier (number) are displayed in the stopped state among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which decorative symbols with the same identifier are displayed in the stopped state is also called a double-digit symbol. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed differently from the double-digit symbols, they become losing symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (B), jackpot symbol display effect A is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect A, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first jackpot symbol XC1 has decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are all even numbers, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a time-saving game state after a jackpot. The ally character CRA is displayed stopped in a position on the left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (C), jackpot symbol display effect B is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect B, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed below the first jackpot symbol XC1. The second jackpot symbol XC2 has decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are odd-numbered repeats, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a probability variable game state after a jackpot. In other words, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (D), jackpot symbol display effect C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect C, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA more closely than the second jackpot symbol XC2. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (E), jackpot symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect D, the first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position it was in before approaching the ally character CRA, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA, as if to replace them. In other words, an effect is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the first jackpot symbol XC1. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (F), jackpot symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect E, the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide. Specifically, the lower side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the upper side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, the positions of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are swapped and the upper side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the lower side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the left of the second jackpot symbol XC2 and the right side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the right of the second jackpot symbol XC2 and the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the right side of the second jackpot symbol XC2. When the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide as shown in Figure 73 (F), the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other. For example, the decorative symbol on the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the decorative symbol on the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (G), jackpot symbol display effect F is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect F, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is projected outside the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 expands so that it extends beyond the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (H), a jackpot symbol display effect G is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect G, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is reduced in size and displayed stopped approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative Design Competition C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating the decorative pattern competition effect C. This decorative pattern competition effect C is an effect that occurs during one variation of a special pattern. In the decorative pattern competition effect C, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a decorative pattern variation effect is first performed. In this decorative pattern variation effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R vary. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of multiple decorative patterns. In other words, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R here are each a decorative pattern group. The decorative patterns included in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each have a number as an identifier for identifying whether they are a jackpot or a loss. When decorative patterns with the same identifier (number) are displayed in a stopped state among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, it becomes a jackpot pattern. The state in which decorative patterns with the same identifier are displayed in a stopped state is also called a double-digit pattern. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed differently from the double-digit symbols, they become losing symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (B), jackpot symbol display effect A is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect A, ally character CRA and first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on display screen 7a. The first jackpot symbol XC1 has decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are all even numbers, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a time-saving game state after a jackpot. Ally character CRA is displayed stopped in a position to the left of display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (C), jackpot symbol display effect B is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect B, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed below the first jackpot symbol XC1. The second jackpot symbol XC2 has decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are odd-numbered repeats, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a probability variable game state after a jackpot. In other words, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (D), jackpot symbol display effect C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect C, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA. In other words, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA more closely than the second jackpot symbol XC2. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (E), jackpot symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect D, the first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position it was in before approaching the ally character CRA, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA, as if replacing them. In other words, the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA closer than the first jackpot symbol XC1. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA while showing its side.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (F), jackpot symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect E, the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 rotate, causing the side portions to face forward so that the front portions cannot be seen.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (G), a jackpot symbol display effect F is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect F, the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with their side faces facing forward so that the front faces cannot be seen. Specifically, the lower side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the upper side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, the positions of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are swapped and the upper side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the lower side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the left of the second jackpot symbol XC2 and the right side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the right of the second jackpot symbol XC2 and the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the right side of the second jackpot symbol XC2. When the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide as shown in Figure 74 (G), the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other. For example, the decorative symbol on the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the decorative symbol on the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (H), a jackpot symbol display effect G is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect G, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is ejected outside the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed stopped in approximately the center of the display screen 7a with its side facing forward so that its front is not visible.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (I), the jackpot symbol display effect H is displayed. In this jackpot symbol display effect H, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is enlarged so that it extends beyond the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 74 (J), jackpot symbol display effect I is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect I, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is reduced in size and displayed stopped approximately in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Modification]
In the decorative symbol competition presentation C, three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2 are displayed in the jackpot symbol display presentation G, and they collide with each other with their side faces facing forward so that their front faces cannot be seen. However, this is not limited to this, and the following configuration may also be used. The three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 are arranged toward the back so as to be hidden by one decorative symbol, and the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2 are arranged toward the back so as to be hidden by one decorative symbol; in other words, they are arranged so that when viewed from the player, one of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and one of the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2 are mainly visible, and from this state, the decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 may collide with each other. In this case, the player can see the collision between one decorative pattern displayed in the foreground among the three decorative patterns of the first jackpot pattern XC1 and one decorative pattern displayed in the foreground among the three decorative patterns of the second jackpot pattern XC2, but cannot see the collision between two decorative patterns on the back side of the decorative pattern displayed in the foreground in the first jackpot pattern XC1 and two decorative patterns on the back side of the decorative pattern displayed in the foreground in the second jackpot pattern XC2. However, without being limited to this, the player may be able to see from an oblique direction how one of the three decorative patterns of the first jackpot pattern XC1 that is displayed in the foreground collides with one of the three decorative patterns of the second jackpot pattern XC2 that is displayed in the foreground, as well as how two decorative patterns behind the decorative pattern displayed in the foreground in the first jackpot pattern XC1 collide with two decorative patterns behind the decorative pattern displayed in the foreground in the second jackpot pattern XC2.

In the decorative symbol competition effects A to C, an effect is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA more closely than the second jackpot symbol XC2, and in this case, the first jackpot symbol XC1 may be displayed closer to the player than the second jackpot symbol XC2. Conversely, the second jackpot symbol XC2 may be displayed closer to the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.
In addition, in the decorative symbol competition effects A to C, an effect is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first jackpot symbol XC1, and in this case, the second jackpot symbol XC2 may be displayed so as to be positioned closer to the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1. Conversely, the first jackpot symbol XC1 may be displayed so as to be positioned closer to the player than the second jackpot symbol XC2.

[Example of effect]
In the decorative symbol competition presentation A of the gaming machine 1, a first jackpot symbol XC1 formed by decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and a second jackpot symbol XC2 formed by decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a jackpot symbol display presentation B, thereafter, a presentation is made in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA more closely than the second jackpot symbol XC2 in a jackpot symbol display presentation C, thereafter, a presentation is made in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA more closely than the first jackpot symbol XC1 in a jackpot symbol display presentation D, thereafter, a presentation is made in which, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is stopped and displayed in a jackpot symbol display presentation E. According to this configuration, after an effect is produced in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 approach the ally character CRA, that is, after an effect is produced in which the two jackpot symbols race toward the ally character CRA, one jackpot symbol (the second jackpot symbol) is determined, so that the player can be kept on the edge of his seat until the final jackpot symbol is determined, thereby increasing the interest of the effect when the jackpot is determined, and as a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the decorative symbol competition presentation B of the gaming machine 1, a jackpot symbol display presentation E is performed in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide. This configuration keeps the player on the edge of their seat until the final jackpot symbol is determined, increasing the player's excitement when the jackpot is determined. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the decorative symbol competition presentation B of the gaming machine 1, a jackpot symbol display presentation E in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide occurs between a jackpot symbol display presentation D in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 comes closer to the ally character CRA than the first jackpot symbol XC1, and a jackpot symbol display presentation G in which the second jackpot symbol XC2, of the first and second jackpot symbols XC1 and XC2, is stopped and displayed. This configuration keeps the player on the edge of their seat until the final jackpot symbol is determined, increasing the excitement of the presentation when a jackpot is determined. As a result, the excitement of the game can be enhanced.

In the decorative symbol competition presentation of the gaming machine 1, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more beneficial to the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1 (for example, a jackpot symbol that guarantees a guaranteed chance). With this configuration, after a presentation in which the two jackpot symbols race toward the ally character CRA, the second jackpot symbol that is more beneficial to the player is displayed, giving the player a thrilling moment followed by great joy, and increasing the enjoyment of the presentation when a jackpot is determined. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the decorative symbol competition presentation B of the gaming machine 1, a jackpot symbol display presentation F, in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 expands so that it extends beyond the display screen 7a, occurs after a jackpot symbol display presentation E, in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide, and before a jackpot symbol display presentation G, in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed in a stopped state, out of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2. This configuration keeps the player on the edge of their seat until the final jackpot symbol is determined, increasing the player's interest in the presentation when a jackpot is determined. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first jackpot pattern including a plurality of decorative patterns and a second jackpot pattern including a plurality of decorative patterns,
the second display effect is an effect in which the first jackpot symbol is closer to a predetermined location than the second jackpot symbol,
the third display effect is an effect in which the second jackpot symbol is closer to a predetermined location than the first jackpot symbol,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed among the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, then the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect in which the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol collide with each other,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed between the third display effect and the fourth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
The second jackpot symbol is more profitable to the player than the first jackpot symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect in which the second jackpot symbol expands so as to protrude from the display means,
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the fifth display effect and before the fourth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Logo moving contact effects A to C are explained below using Figures 75 to 77. These logo moving contact effects can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a logo moving contact effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Logo moving contact effects A to C are executed in a high probability high base state and a low probability high base state. They can also be executed in a low probability low base state.

[Logo moving contact effect A]
75 is a diagram for explaining the logo moving contact effect A. The logo moving contact effect A is an effect of a pattern that results in a big win.
First, as shown in Figure 75 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time, or the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop first, and then the left symbol 8L may temporarily stop. In this case, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, and the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. In addition, the hold icon 9B and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed when the fluctuation started are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (C), logo movement performance A is executed. Logo movement performance A is a performance related to the second movable device 15. The second movable device 15 is a rectangular component (decorative part) marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable device 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position above the image display device 7 (Figure 1), and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. This advanced position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the bottom of the display screen 7a. Logo movement performance A is a performance in which the second movable device 15 moves from the retracted position toward the intermediate position as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (D), a logo contact effect is executed. In this effect, the second movable device 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "1" and "2" symbols. Specifically, when viewed from the front (player), an image is displayed aligned with the bottom edge of the second movable device 15 stopped at an intermediate position, making it appear as if the "1" and "2" symbols are touching the bottom edge of the second movable device 15. Here, an image of the "1" and "2" symbols being vertically crushed is displayed. Alternatively, the second movable device 15 stopped at an intermediate position may be moved up and down in small increments to create an effect that suggests the device is not easily crushed. In this case, the "1" and "2" symbols may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable device 15. Additionally, a button image BG resembling the effect button 63 is displayed. This effect encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. If the player operates the effect button 63 at this point, the next effect will be executed. Note that even if the effect button 63 is not operated, the next effect will be executed when the valid period for input from the effect button 63 ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (E), logo movement effect B is executed. Logo movement effect B is an effect in which the second movable part 15 moves from the middle position to the lower position. This indicates that the "1" and "2" symbols have been successfully crushed. Specifically, while the second movable part 15 is moving from the middle position to the lower position, an image is displayed in which the "1" and "2" symbols appear to have exploded and disappeared. Then, as the second movable part 15 stops at the lower position, left, center, and right symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed below the second movable part 15 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a jackpot mode. A jackpot mode generally occurs when the left, center, and right symbols (more specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same. In this example, the left symbol 8L, the center symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R all represent the "3" symbol. Additionally, only the top part of the "3" design is visible, with the rest being framed out.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (F), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect in which the symbol moves upward. Specifically, the symbol 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are in the jackpot mode, are displayed slowly moving upward as shown by arrow Z. At this time, the portion covered by the second movable device 15 is difficult to see. In this case, the upper part of the "3" symbol is covered by the second movable device 15, making it difficult to see. The "3" symbol moves upward and stops near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (G), logo movement effect C is executed. Logo movement effect C is an effect in which the second movable part 15 moves from the lower position towards the retracted position. As the second movable part 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as shown by arrow X, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a difficult to see state to an easily visible state. Here, the second movable part 15 moves to above the "3" symbol when viewed from the front, making the "3" symbol easily visible.

Next, as shown in Figure 75 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot manner. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop at the fixed "3" symbol. In addition, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Logo moving contact effect B]
76 is a diagram for explaining the logo moving contact effect B. The logo moving contact effect B is an effect with a pattern that indicates a loss, as opposed to the logo moving contact effect A, which indicates a big win.
First, as shown in Figure 76 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Note that the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop at the same time, or the right symbol 8R may temporarily stop first, and then the left symbol 8L may temporarily stop. In this case, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, and the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. In addition, the hold icon 9B and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed when the fluctuation started are hidden.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (C), logo movement performance A is executed. Logo movement performance A is a performance related to the second movable device 15. The second movable device 15 is a rectangular component (decorative part) marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable device 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position above the image display device 7 (Figure 1), and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. This advanced position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the bottom of the display screen 7a. Logo movement performance A is a performance in which the second movable device 15 moves from the retracted position toward the intermediate position, as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (D), a logo contact effect is executed. In this effect, the second movable device 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "1" and "2" symbols. Specifically, when viewed from the front (player), an image is displayed aligned with the bottom edge of the second movable device 15 stopped at an intermediate position, making it appear as if the "1" and "2" symbols are touching the bottom edge of the second movable device 15. Here, an image of the "1" and "2" symbols being vertically crushed is displayed. Alternatively, the second movable device 15 stopped at an intermediate position may be moved up and down in small increments to create an effect that suggests the device is not easily crushed. In this case, the "1" and "2" symbols may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable device 15. Additionally, a button image BG resembling the effect button 63 is displayed. This effect encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. If the player operates the effect button 63 at this point, the next effect will be executed. Note that even if the effect button 63 is not operated, the next effect will be executed when the valid period for input from the effect button 63 ends.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (E), logo movement effect D is executed. Logo movement effect D is an effect in which the second movable device 15 moves from the intermediate position to the retracted position. This indicates that the "1" and "2" symbols have failed to be crushed. Specifically, as the second movable device 15 moves from the intermediate position to the retracted position, the "1" and "2" symbols that had been crushed vertically are displayed returning to their original state.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (F), a slow-moving middle symbol effect is executed. In this slow-moving middle symbol effect, the speed of movement (movement speed) of the middle symbol 8C moving downward as indicated by arrow Y slows down, making it visible. Here, the speed of movement of the "5" symbol is slowed down.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (G), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the center effect symbol 8C temporarily stops, causing the left, center, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to temporarily stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at the "1" symbol, the center effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at the "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at the "2" symbol.

Next, as shown in Figure 76 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at a "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at a "2" symbol. In addition, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

[Logo movement contact effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating the logo moving contact effect C. The logo moving contact effect C is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are promoted after a jackpot has been announced. The promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R signals a transition to a more advantageous jackpot game. Specifically, while it appears as if a 16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing jackpot has been won, the promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R signals a 16RV passing jackpot.

First, as shown in Figure 77 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown starting to change and changing at high speed. Three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area, second memory area, and third memory area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. At this time, the symbol 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop in any order. Furthermore, within that order, two or more of the symbol 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop at the same time. Here, the symbol 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop in the form of a jackpot. A jackpot typically occurs when the left, center, and right display symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the display symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same. In this case, the left display symbol 8L, the center display symbol 8C, and the right display symbol 8R are all "2" symbols. The "2" symbol (an even number symbol) indicates a 16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot. Note that the pending icon 9B and the change icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the change will no longer be displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (C), logo movement performance A is executed. Logo movement performance A is a performance related to the second movable device 15. The second movable device 15 is a rectangular component (decorative part) marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable device 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position above the image display device 7 (Figure 1), and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. This advanced position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a, and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the bottom of the display screen 7a. Logo movement performance A is a performance in which the second movable device 15 moves from the retracted position toward the intermediate position, as indicated by arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (D), a logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact effect is an effect in which the second movable device 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "2" symbol. Specifically, when viewed from the front (player), an image is displayed aligned with the bottom edge of the second movable device 15 stopped at an intermediate position, making it appear as if the "2" symbol is touching the bottom edge of the second movable device 15. Here, an image of the "2" symbol being vertically crushed is displayed. Note that the second movable device 15 stopped at an intermediate position may be moved up and down in small increments to create an effect that suggests it is difficult to crush. In this case, the "2" symbol may be moved up and down in accordance with the movement of the second movable device 15.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (E), logo movement effect B is executed. Logo movement effect B is an effect in which the second movable part 15 moves from the middle position to the lower position. This indicates that the "2" symbol has been successfully crushed. Specifically, while the second movable part 15 is moving from the middle position to the lower position, an image is displayed in which the "2" symbol appears to explode and disappear. Then, as the second movable part 15 stops at the lower position, left, center, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed below the second movable part 15 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the form of a jackpot. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all represent the "3" symbol. The "3" symbol (odd number symbol) indicates that a jackpot is expected to occur after 16RV has passed. In other words, at this stage, the "2" symbol that was displayed in jackpot mode has been upgraded to a "3" symbol. Here, only the top part of the "3" symbol is displayed, with the rest being framed out.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (F), a symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect in which the symbol moves upward. Specifically, the symbol 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are in the jackpot mode, are displayed slowly moving upward as shown by arrow Z. At this time, the portion covered by the second movable device 15 is difficult to see. In this case, the upper part of the "3" symbol is covered by the second movable device 15, making it difficult to see. The "3" symbol moves upward and stops near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (G), logo movement effect C is executed. Logo movement effect C is an effect in which the second movable part 15 moves from the lower position towards the retracted position. As the second movable part 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as shown by arrow X, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a difficult to see state to an easily visible state. Here, the second movable part 15 moves to above the "3" symbol when viewed from the front, making the "3" symbol easily visible.

Next, as shown in Figure 77 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot manner. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop at the fixed "3" symbol. In addition, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

Note that logo moving contact effect C is used when the promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is successful, but if the promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fails, it can be configured in the same way as logo moving contact effect B. In other words, the logo contact effect in Figure 77(D) is the same, then logo moving effect D shown in Figure 76(E) is executed, and the "2" symbol remains, and the confirmed stop effect (win) shown in Figure 77(H) is executed.

In addition, the logo contact effects (Fig. 75(D), Fig. 76(D), Fig. 77(D)) may be configured to include an effect that prompts the player to operate an operating unit such as the effect button 63, and transition to the next effect (Fig. 75(E), Fig. 76(E), Fig. 77(E)) when the operating unit is operated.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of logo movement and contact.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable device 15 moves from the retracted position to the intermediate position to promote a win in a predetermined lottery (FIGS. 75(C)(D), 76(C)(D), 77(C)(D)). Then, the second movable device 15 moves from the intermediate position to the lower position to notify a win in a predetermined lottery (FIGS. 75(E), 77(E)). With this configuration, the second movable device 15 performs promotional effects and notification effects of a win, resulting in a more impressive effect than a simple notification effect, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second movable device 15 corresponds to the "movable member," the retracted position corresponds to the "first position," the middle position corresponds to the "second position," and the lower position corresponds to the "third position." Furthermore, the logo movement effect A and logo contact effect (Figures 75 (C) (D), 76 (C) (D), 77 (C) (D)) correspond to the "first effect," while the logo movement effect B, the pattern movement effect, and the logo movement effect C correspond to the "second effect." The jackpot lottery and the jackpot type lottery correspond to the "predetermined lottery."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a logo contact effect is executed, and the second movable device 15 stops at an intermediate position and performs an effect of crushing the temporarily stopped effect symbol. In other words, when viewed from the front (player), an image is displayed aligned with the bottom edge of the second movable device 15 stopped at the intermediate position, making it appear as if the effect symbol is in contact with the bottom edge of the second movable device 15. With this configuration, the movement of the effect symbol is linked to the movement of the second movable device 15, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The temporarily stopped performance pattern corresponds to the "pattern."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the left, center, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so that they are below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front (Fig. 75(E), Fig. 77(E)). With this configuration, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear to be pressed down by the second movable accessory 15 that has moved to the lower position, making the movement of the second movable accessory 15 to the lower position more noticeable and increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a symbol movement effect is executed (FIG. 75(F), FIG. 77(F)). Specifically, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed slowly moving upward as shown by the arrow Z, and move to the back side of the second movable role device 15. With this configuration, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that move so as to overlap with the second movable role device 15 are more likely to be focused on, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the logo movement effect C is executed (FIGS. 75(G), 77(G)). Specifically, as the second movable device 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as shown by the arrow X, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a difficult-to-see state to an easily visible state. With this configuration, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from a difficult-to-see state to an easily visible state, increasing the likelihood that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be focused on, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a logo movement effect D is executed (FIG. 76(E)), and a loss in a predetermined lottery can be notified. Specifically, as the second movable device 15 moves from the intermediate position to the retracted position, the effect symbols that were crushed vertically are displayed returning to their original state. With this configuration, the second movable device 15 performs a provocative effect and a loss notification effect, which is more impressive than a simple notification effect and can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that logo movement effect D (Figure 76 (E)) corresponds to the "third effect."

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the logo contact effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (Figures 75 (D), 76 (D)). When the effect button 63 is pressed, the next effect (logo movement effect B, logo movement effect D) is executed (Figures 75 (E), 76 (E)). According to this configuration, pressing the effect button 63 notifies the player of whether they have won or lost, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation unit," and the logo contact effect (Figures 75(D) and 76(D)) that displays the button image BG corresponds to the "promotion effect."

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the logo moving contact effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "1" and "2" symbols temporarily stopped, and after a logo contact effect, the jackpot state was reached (Fig. 75 (B) to (H)). In contrast, the temporarily stopped symbols may be in a reach state. A reach state is generally a state in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are the same (more specifically, the identification information of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R is the same).

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the temporarily stopped effect symbols are crushed by the second movable device 15 to indicate a jackpot or the type of jackpot. However, this is not limited to this, and the result of the lottery as to whether or not an effect will be executed may also be announced. For example, the temporarily stopped symbols are crushed to indicate the confirmation of the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect. In this case, it is conceivable that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again on the back side of the second movable device 15 in accordance with the execution of the logo movement effect B (Fig. 75(E), Fig. 77(E)).

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect A9-1]
a display screen for displaying an image;
A gaming machine comprising: a movable member that is movable between a first position, a second position different from the first position, and a third position different from the first position and the second position, and that is capable of stopping at the first position, the second position, and the third position;
a first effect in which the movable member moves from the first position to the second position to encourage a win in a predetermined lottery;
and a second performance in which the movable member moves from the second position to the third position after the first performance, thereby informing the player of a win in the predetermined lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A9-1,
In the first performance, a pattern is displayed on the display screen in accordance with the movable member that has moved to the second position, thereby executing a performance in which the movable member appears to come into contact with the pattern displayed on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A9-1 or A9-2,
In the second performance, a pattern is displayed on the display screen so that the pattern can be seen below the movable member in accordance with the movable member that has moved to the third position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A9-3,
In the second performance, a performance is executed in which the pattern displayed on the display screen moves in a direction overlapping the movable member and moves to the rear side of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A9-4,
In the second performance, a performance in which the movable member moves from the third position to the first position is executed in accordance with the performance in which the pattern moves to the rear side of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
The phrase "in accordance with the effect of the symbol moving to the rear side of the movable member" is intended to include a configuration in which the movement of the movable member is performed in parallel with the movement of the symbol. In other words, it includes not only a configuration in which the movable member moves after the movement of the symbol has finished, but also a configuration in which the movable member moves before the movement of the symbol has finished. For example, it includes a configuration in which the movable member moves so as to cover the symbol that is being displayed.

[Aspect A9-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A9-1 to A9-5,
After the first performance, the movable member moves from the second position to the first position, and a third performance is executed to notify the player of a loss in the predetermined lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A9-6,
Further provided with an operation unit operable by a player,
In the first performance, a promotion performance is executed to promote the operation of the operation unit, and the second performance or the third performance is executed in response to the promotion performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A9-1 to A9-6,
Further provided with an operation unit operable by a player,
In the first performance, a promotion performance is executed to promote the operation of the operation unit, and the second performance is executed in response to the promotion performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains the continuous pattern count effects A to C using Figures 78 to 80. This continuous pattern count effect can be executed during a variation effect of the effect pattern. In more detail, the effect executed during the variation effect is executed continuously across multiple variations. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the continuous pattern count effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The continuous pattern count effects A to C are executed in a high probability high base state and a low probability high base state. They can also be executed in a low probability low base state.

[Pattern Count Continuous Performance A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect A.
After the previous variation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which two of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are identical (more specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). In normal play, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach state, but in the pattern count continuous effect A, the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R form a reach state. In other words, the final stopped symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, which has a different variation area from the center effect symbol 8C, which is the final stopped symbol in normal play. The same applies below. Here, the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively. The explanation will continue assuming that the hold does not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (B), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "5" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at an "8" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at an "8" symbol. Three hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 78 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "8" symbol. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. Two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area and second memory area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (D), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at an "8" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at an "8" symbol. Two hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 78 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "8" symbol. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The one hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold corresponds to the first memory area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (F), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "7" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at an "8" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at an "8" symbol. One pending icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 78 (G), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "8" pattern. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same time. The corresponding fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 78 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. A fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "8" state. The variable icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

The symbol count continuous effect A is a continuous effect spanning four variations. In the symbol count continuous effect A, a reach is formed with the "8" symbol each time a reach formation effect is executed. Then, the final stopping symbol in the confirmed stop effect counts up from "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "8". Furthermore, after the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R stop simultaneously, the left effect symbol 8L stops. In other words, a reach is formed at the first timing, and a jackpot or miss is announced at the second timing. Furthermore, during normal play, the center effect symbol 8C is the final stopping symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stopping symbol.

Note that while the symbol count continuous effect A is a pattern in which the final change out of four changes results in a jackpot, it is also possible to have it result in a miss. In that case, instead of the confirmed stop effect (win) of Figure 78 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. For example, the final stopping pattern, left effect pattern 8L, could be a "7" or a "9".

[Pattern count continuous effect B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect B.
After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 79 (A), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which two of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). In normal play, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach state, but in the pattern count continuous effect B, the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R form a reach state. In other words, the final stopped symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, which has a different fluctuation area from the center effect symbol 8C, which is the final stopped symbol in normal play. The same applies below. Here, the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively. The explanation will continue assuming that the hold does not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (B), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "9" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at an "8" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at an "8" symbol. Three hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 79 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "7" symbol. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. Two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area and second memory area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (D), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at an "8" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at a "7" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at a "7" symbol. Two hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 79 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "6" symbol. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The one hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold corresponds to the first memory area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (F), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L stops at a "7" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C stops at a "6" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R stops at a "6" pattern. One pending icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 79 (G), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "5" pattern. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same time. The corresponding fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. A fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "5" state. The variable icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

The symbol count continuous effect B is a continuous effect spanning four variations. In the symbol count continuous effect B, each time a reach formation effect is executed, a reach is formed in the following order: "8" → "7" → "6" → "5". The final stopping symbols in the confirmed stop effect are "9" → "8" → "7" → "5". This means that, with the exception of the "5" symbol in the final confirmed stop effect (win), the final stopping symbols are counting down. Furthermore, after the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R stop simultaneously, the left effect symbol 8L stops. In other words, a reach is formed at the first timing, and a jackpot or miss is announced at the second timing. Furthermore, during normal play, the center effect symbol 8C is the final stopping symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stopping symbol.

Note that while the symbol count continuous effect B is a pattern that results in a jackpot in the final variation of the four variations, it is also possible to have it result in a miss. In that case, instead of the confirmed stop effect (win) of Figure 79 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. For example, the final stopping pattern, the left effect pattern 8L, could be a "6" pattern.

[Pattern count continuous effect C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect C.
After the previous variation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R vary at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which two of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are identical (more specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). In normal play, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach state, but in the pattern count continuous effect C, the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R form a reach state. In other words, the final stopped symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, which has a different variation area from the center effect symbol 8C, which is the final stopped symbol in normal play. The same applies below. Here, the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively. The explanation will continue assuming that the hold does not increase during the performance.

Next, as shown in Figure 80 (B), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "4" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at an "8" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at an "8" symbol. Three hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 80 (C), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "2" symbol. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. Two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first memory area and second memory area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 80 (D), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "5" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at a "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at a "2" symbol. Two hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 80 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "0" symbol. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The one hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold corresponds to the first memory area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b.

Next, as shown in Figure 80 (F), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at a "0" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at a "0" symbol. A single pending icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

After the previous fluctuation has been confirmed and stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in Figure 80 (G), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R both temporarily stop at the "7" symbol. Note that the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same time. The corresponding fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 80 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. A fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "7" state. The variable icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

The symbol count continuous effect C is a continuous effect spanning four variations. In the symbol count continuous effect C, each time a reach formation effect is executed, a reach is formed in the following order: "8" → "2" → "0" → "7". This is an example of randomly selecting reach symbols. However, the final "7" symbol is selected based on the count-up of the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stopping symbol. The final stopping symbols in the confirmed stopping effect count up as follows: "4" → "5" → "6" → "7". Furthermore, after the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R stop simultaneously, the left effect symbol 8L stops. In other words, a reach is formed at the first timing, and a jackpot or miss is announced at the second timing. Furthermore, during normal play, the center effect symbol 8C is the final stopping symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stopping symbol.

Note that while the symbol count continuous effect C is a pattern that results in a jackpot in the final variation of the four variations, it is also possible to have it result in a miss. In that case, instead of the confirmed stop effect (win) of Figure 80 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. For example, the final stopping pattern, the left effect effect 8L, could be a "6" or an "8" symbol.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the continuous pattern counting effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeating the reach formation effect and the reach miss mode fixed stop effect, the effect symbols are encouraged to stop in the jackpot mode indicating a transition to a jackpot game (FIGS. 78(A)-(F), 79(A)-(F), 80(A)-(F)). According to this configuration, the repetition of the reach miss mode can create a sense of expectation in the player, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Note that the reach formation effect and the confirmed stop effect (miss) correspond to "reach miss effects," the left effect pattern 8L corresponds to the "final stop pattern," and the center effect pattern 8C and right effect pattern 8R correspond to "reach patterns." Furthermore, a jackpot mode in which the left, center, and right effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the patterns is the same) corresponds to a "special mode."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (miss) are repeated in successive fluctuations (FIGS. 78(A)-(F), 79(A)-(F), 80(A)-(F)). According to this configuration, the fixed stop effect (miss) of the reach miss mode is executed in each successive fluctuation, so that the player can be made to look forward to the next fluctuation, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R stop simultaneously in the reach formation effect, and the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, stops in the fixed stop effect (miss). This configuration creates a rhythm in the series of effects consisting of the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (miss), which can increase the interest in the game.

The timing at which the center effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R stop corresponds to the "first timing," and the timing at which the left effect pattern 8L stops corresponds to the "second timing."

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the center effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol during normal play, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol, and the variable range of the final stop symbol is different from normal play. With this configuration, the reach formation effect and the confirmed stop effect (miss) effect stand out, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L is changed each time the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (miss) are repeated. With this configuration, the change of the final stop symbol can give the player hope that the next big win may come, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, each time the reach formation effect and the confirmed stop effect (miss) are repeated, the left effect symbol 8L is counted up or down (FIGS. 78(A)-(F), 79(A)-(F), 80(A)-(F)). With this configuration, the final stop symbol is counted up or down, which gives the player more hope that the next big hit may be the one, and increases the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the repeatedly executed reach formation effects and confirmed stop effects (misses), the center effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R that form the reach state are always "8" symbols (Figures 78 (A) to (F)). Then, the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is counted up. With this configuration, the count up of the left effect symbol 8L is prominent, and the count up of the left effect symbol 8L can give the player a sense of approaching a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the continuous symbol count effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, under the assumption that the left effect symbol 8L → right effect symbol 8R → center effect symbol 8C will stop in this order during normal play, the left effect symbol 8L is set as the final stop symbol. In contrast, the right effect symbol 8R may be set as the final stop symbol. Also, the center effect symbol 8C, which is the same as during normal play, may be set as the final stop symbol. By determining the final stop symbol, the remaining effect symbols become reach symbols that form a reach mode.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, which are reach symbols, are configured to stop simultaneously. In contrast, the reach symbols may be configured to stop at different timings. Also, either effect symbol may stop first. In this case, if the three effect symbols, including the timing of the final stop symbol, are configured to stop at similar intervals, a rhythm is created in the stopping of the effect symbols, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (miss) are repeated in successive variations. In contrast to this, the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (miss) may be repeated in one variation. Also, both may be repeated. For example, they may be repeated twice in the first variation and three times in the next variation.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect A10-1]
A gaming machine having a display screen for displaying images,
On the display screen, by repeatedly executing a reach miss effect in which symbols displayed in a plurality of rows are stopped so that the final stop symbol that stops at the end is a reach miss symbol different from the reach symbol that forms the reach symbol, the symbols are encouraged to stop in a special symbol that indicates a transition to a special game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1,
The reach miss effect is executed and repeated in successive fluctuations.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A10-1 or A10-2,
In the reach miss effect, the reach symbol stops at a first timing, and then the final stop symbol stops at a second timing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A10-1 to A10-3,
In the reach miss effect, on the display screen, a variable area of the final stop pattern is different from a variable area of the final stop pattern in normal times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A10-1 to A10-4,
Each time the reach miss effect is repeatedly executed, the final stop symbol is changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5,
The change of the final stop symbol is a count-up or a count-down.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A10-5 or A10-6,
In the reach miss performances that are repeatedly executed, the reach symbols are common.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-8]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A10-5 or A10-6,
In the reach miss performance that is repeatedly executed, the reach symbol is changed by counting up or counting down.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-9]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A10-5 or A10-6,
In the reach miss effect that is repeatedly executed, the reach symbol is selected at random.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Image flip expectation suggestion effects A to C are explained below using Figures 81 to 83. These image flip expectation suggestion effects are executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an image flip expectation suggestion effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Image flip expectation suggestion effect A]
81 is a diagram for explaining the image reversal expectation suggestion effect A. The image reversal expectation suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the expectation of a win by reversing a specific image (reserved icon) that suggests the expectation of a win by changing color. In the image reversal expectation suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a reserved icon 9A, and a variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the static display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, when the game state is normal (low probability, low base state), a variable display corresponding to special symbol 1 variation is displayed.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a base image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have the shape of a flag. This flag shape has a two-part ridge on the right side and a rod-shaped pole located to the left of the flag. Note that the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C can be any shape that represents a specific object. Here, specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, specific objects here include any form in which the number of specific objects can be determined when there are multiple specific objects. Here, the four flag-shaped hold icons 9A are blue.

During this change, as shown in Figure 81 (B), the color of the second-from-the-right of the four hold icons 9A changes from blue to green due to a pre-read. The colors of the hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C indicate the likelihood of a jackpot at the time of the change corresponding to the hold icon. Here, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with blue having a 2% likelihood, green having a 10% likelihood, purple having a 20% likelihood, red having a 30% likelihood, and gold having a 40% likelihood. The change in color of the second-from-the-right hold icon 9A suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot at the time of the change (next change) corresponding to this hold icon 9A has increased from 2% to 10%.

Figure 81(C) shows the state of the next special chart change following the special chart changes in Figures 81(A) and (B). In Figure 81(B), the reserved icon 9A, whose color has changed from blue to green, shifts one position to the right and becomes the rightmost of the three reserved icons 9A, as shown in Figure 81(C). During this change, the rightmost reserved icon 9A whose color has changed is displayed in reverse, as shown in Figure 81(D), due to a pre-read. "Inverted display" here refers to the display of the object (flag) represented by the reserved icon 9A in a horizontally inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the reserved icon 9A is inverted horizontally, with the stem positioned to the right of the bamboo-like section and the split portion of the flag displayed to the left of the flag. When the reserved icon 9A is displayed in reverse, it indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot than if it were not inverted. In this case, inversion increases the likelihood of a jackpot by 43%. In this embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is flipped, the expectation level is the sum of the expectation level of the color of the hold icon 9A plus the expectation level of the flip of 43%. For example, when a blue hold icon 9A is flipped, it is suggested that the expectation level has increased from 2% to 45%. In this case, the green hold icon 9A is flipped, which suggests that the expectation level has increased from 10% to 53%. In this embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is expressed not only by the color of the hold icon 9A, but also by whether it is flipped or not. In this embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is flipped, the expectation level is higher than when the color changes.

Figure 81 (E) shows the state at the time of the next special pattern change following the special pattern changes in Figures 81 (C) and (D). In Figure 81 (D), the inverted green reserved icon 9A shifts one position to the right and becomes the changed icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C as shown in Figure 81 (E), and a change corresponding to this changed icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C occurs. The expected probability of a jackpot in this change is 53%, and when a win occurs, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in the form of a jackpot, as shown in Figure 81 (F).

Figures 81(G) to (L) show other examples of image reversal expectation indication effect A. In this example, first, as shown in Figure 81(A), while the change display corresponding to the special chart 1 change is displayed, four hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The four hold icons 9A are blue. During this change, as shown in Figure 81(G), the third hold icon 9A from the right of the four hold icons 9A is displayed in reverse due to pre-reading. This reversal is the same as the reversal in Figure 81(D). In other words, when the hold icon 9A is displayed in reverse, the expectation increases by 43%, suggesting a higher chance of a jackpot than if it were not reversed. In this case, the blue hold icon 9A is reversed, suggesting that the expectation has increased from 2% to 45%. Thus, in this embodiment, the hold icon 9A may be displayed in reverse not only after the color change but also before the color change.

Figure 81 (H) shows the state at the time of the next special chart change following those in Figures 81 (A) and (G). A winning combination adds another reserved icon 9A. In Figure 81 (G), the inverted reserved icon 9A shifts two spaces to the right and becomes the rightmost of the three reserved icons 9A, as shown in Figure 81 (H). During this change, the rightmost inverted reserved icon 9A changes color from blue to green as shown in Figure 81 (I) due to a predictive read. The color change here is the same as that in Figure 81 (B). In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with blue having a 2% likelihood, green having a 10% likelihood, purple having a 20% likelihood, red having a 30% likelihood, and gold having a 40% likelihood. When the color of the reserved icon 9A changes while it is inverted, the likelihood of a jackpot is increased by the amount of the color change. Here, the expected rate for the color increases from 2% to 10%, and the 43% for the inverted display is added to this, so the overall expected rate increases from 45% to 53%.

This inverted display of the hold icon 9A, displayed in green, may invert again at a specific timing to return to its original orientation (non-inverted display). There is a 20% chance that the inverted display will return to its original orientation, and if it does, it may do so during the same fluctuation, or after the next fluctuation. Here, as shown in Figure 81 (J), during the same fluctuation as Figure 91 (I), an effect is executed in which the inverted hold icon 9A returns to its original orientation (non-inverted display). This reduces the expected probability of a jackpot during the fluctuation corresponding to this hold icon 9A to the expected probability before the inverted display. Here, the expected probability decreases from 53% (43 + 10) to 10% (0 + 10).

Figure 81 (K) shows the state at the time of the next special pattern change following the special pattern changes in Figures 81 (H) to (J). In Figure 81 (J), the green reserved icon 9A, which has returned to its original orientation (non-endpoint display), shifts one position to the right and becomes the changing icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C, as shown in Figure 81 (K), and a change corresponding to this changing icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C occurs. The expected probability of a jackpot in this change is 10%, and when a loss occurs, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a losing state, as shown in Figure 81 (L).

[Image flip expectation suggestion effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating the image flip expectation suggestion effect B. The image flip expectation suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the expectation of a win by inverting a specific image (reserved icon) that suggests the expectation of a win by changing color. FIG. 82(A) shows the same state as FIG. 81(B) of the image flip expectation suggestion effect A. That is, in the image flip expectation suggestion effect B, the same effect as FIG. 81(A) and (B) of the image flip expectation suggestion effect A is first executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a reserved icon 9A, and a variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and a variable display corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation is displayed.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The color of the second hold icon 9A from the right of the four hold icons 9A has changed from blue to green due to a pre-read. The colors of the hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C indicate the likelihood of a jackpot at the time of the change corresponding to the hold icon. Here, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with blue having a 2% expectation, green having a 10% expectation, purple having a 20% expectation, red having a 30% expectation, and gold having a 40% expectation. The change in color of the second hold icon 9A from the right suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot at the time of the change (next change) corresponding to this hold icon 9A has increased from 2% to 10%.

During this change, as shown in Figure 82 (B), the green reserve icon 9A second from the right undergoes a spinning effect based on a look-ahead. Here, the second reserve icon 9A from the right rotates counterclockwise around the normal to the display screen 7a as its axis of rotation. The rotation speed then increases, and as shown in Figure 82 (C), the second reserve icon 9A from the right becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in Figure 82 (D), the vortex image disappears and an inverted version of the hold icon 9A is displayed in the display position of the second hold icon 9A from the right. "Inverted display" here refers to the display of the object (flag) represented by the hold icon 9A in a horizontally inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the hold icon 9A is inverted horizontally, with the stem positioned to the right of the slat, and the split portion of the flag displayed to the left of the flag. When the hold icon 9A is inverted, it indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot than if it were not inverted. In this case, inversion increases the likelihood by 43%. In this embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is inverted, the likelihood of the color of the hold icon 9A plus the 43% likelihood of inversion is added to the likelihood of the inversion, resulting in a total likelihood. For example, inverting a blue hold icon 9A indicates that the likelihood has increased from 2% to 45%. In this case, inverting a green hold icon 9A indicates that the likelihood has increased from 10% to 53%. In this way, in this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot is indicated not only by the color of the pending icon 9A, but also by whether it is inverted or not. In this embodiment, when the pending icon 9A is inverted, the likelihood is higher than when the color changes.

Figure 82 (E) shows the state at the time of the next special pattern change following the special pattern changes in Figures 82 (A) to (D). In Figure 82 (D), the inverted green reserved icon 9A shifts two spaces to the right and becomes the changed icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C as shown in Figure 82 (E), and a change corresponding to this changed icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C occurs. The expected probability of a jackpot in this change is 53%, and when a win occurs, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped jackpot mode as shown in Figure 82 (F).

Figures 82 (G) to (L) show other examples of image reversal expectation indication effect B. In this example, first, as shown in Figure 82 (G), while the change display corresponding to the special pattern 1 change is displayed, the hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C are blue flag-shaped. During this change, as shown in Figure 82 (H), the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is enlarged and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a based on a pre-read, and a rotation effect is executed in which it rotates at a first position overlapping with the change display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C rotates counterclockwise at the first position on the display screen 7a, with the normal to the display screen 7a as the axis of rotation. The rotation speed then increases, and as shown in Figure 82 (I), the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 82 (J), an inverted variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C appears from the vortex image at the first position on the display screen 7a and rotates toward the second position at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. In this context, inversion refers to the display of the object represented by the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C in an inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is inverted from left to right, with the stem positioned to the right of the rafters and the two halves of the flag displayed to the left of the flag. The number (here, "3") displayed in the flag is also inverted. When the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is inverted, it indicates a higher likelihood of winning a jackpot than if it were not inverted. In this case, inversion increases the likelihood by 43%. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is inverted, the likelihood of winning is the sum of the likelihood of the color of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C plus the likelihood of inversion (43%). Here, the blue variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is inverted, suggesting that the expected rate has increased from 2% to 45%. In this embodiment, the expected rate of a jackpot is indicated not only by the color of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C, but also by whether it is inverted or not. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is inverted, the expected rate is higher than when the color changes. After this, a countdown effect is executed using the inverted numbers displayed on the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C displayed in the second position.

When the countdown effect begins, as shown in Figure 82 (K), the number displayed in inverted in the flag section of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C displayed in the second position on the display screen 7a is decremented by one. Here, the inverted "3" changes to an inverted "2". After that, the inverted number continues to decrement, and when an inverted "0" is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols. Figure 82 (L) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols in the form of a jackpot.

[Image flip expectation suggestion effect C]
Figure 83 is a diagram illustrating the image flip expectation suggestion effect C. The image flip expectation suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the expectation of a win by inverting a specific image (reserved icon) that suggests the expectation of a win by changing color. In the image flip expectation suggestion effect C, the same effect as that of the image flip expectation suggestion effect A shown in Figure 81 (A) is first executed. That is, as shown in Figure 81 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a reserved icon 9A, and a variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and a variable display corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation is displayed. Four reserved icons 9A are displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is displayed in a variable icon display area at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Here, a base image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a flag shape. This flag shape has a two-part ridge on the right side and a rod-shaped pole located to the left of the flag. Note that the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C can be any shape that represents a specific object. Here, specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, specific objects here include any form in which the number of specific objects can be determined when there are multiple of them. Here, the four flag-shaped hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are blue.

During this change, as shown in Figure 83(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped at "2" and "4", and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a changing pattern. Then, as shown in Figure 83(B), by predicting ahead, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a flag-shaped image (pattern) that is the same as the reserved icon 9A or the reserved icon 9C at the stopping position. This image (pattern) is blue in color and larger than the reserved icon 9A and the changing icon 9C.

After that, as shown in Figure 83(C), a rotation effect is executed in which the image (design) displayed as the stationary middle decorative design 8C rotates. Here, the image (design) displayed as the stationary middle decorative design 8C rotates counterclockwise around the normal to the display screen 7a as the axis of rotation. The rotation speed then increases, and as shown in Figure 83(D), the image (design) displayed as the stationary middle decorative design 8C becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in Figure 83 (E), an inverted flag-shaped image appears from the vortex image at the stopping position of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and moves while rotating toward the display position of the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C. In this case, inverted display means that the object (flag) represented by the image (pattern) stopped and displayed at the stopping position of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in an inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the image (pattern) stopped and displayed at the stopping position of the middle decorative pattern 8C is reversed left to right, with the stem portion located to the right of the bamboo screen portion, and the split part of the flag portion displayed to the left of the flag portion. This inverted flag-shaped image is the same as the inverted display of the variable icon (the reserved icon in question) 9C in Figure 83 (A).

The effect of Figure 83 (E) causes the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C to be displayed inverted, as shown in Figure 83 (F). When the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is displayed inverted, it suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than when it is not inverted. In this case, inversion increases the likelihood by 43%. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is inverted, the likelihood is the sum of the likelihood of the color of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C plus the likelihood of the inversion, 43%. In this case, the blue variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is inverted, suggesting that the likelihood has increased from 2% to 45%. In this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot is expressed not only by the color of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C, but also by whether it is inverted or not. In this embodiment, when the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is inverted, the likelihood is higher than when the color changes.

After that, as shown in Figure 83 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were statically displayed as "2" and "4," are displayed again. Here, nothing is displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C. Note that after a number pattern is statically displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C, a pseudo consecutive effect may be executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again.

After that, as shown in Figure 83 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are again displayed as "2" and "4" and, due to a pre-read, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable, and then an inverted flag-shaped image (pattern) is displayed as a variable at the stop position. The inverted flag-shaped image (pattern) is green, and has the same shape as the blue variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C but a different color. The inverted flag-shaped image (pattern) is larger than the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in Figure 83 (I), the green flag-shaped image (pattern) displayed as the center decorative pattern 8C moves toward the display position of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C. At this time, the image (pattern) may or may not rotate. This effect causes the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C to change color to green, and the number (here, "3") is displayed in reverse in the flag section. It also increases in size. Specifically, the image becomes the same size as the image (pattern) displayed as the center decorative pattern 8C. The color changes here indicate increasing odds of winning in the following order: blue, green, purple, red, and gold, with blue having an expected odds of 2%, green having an expected odds of 10%, purple having an expected odds of 20%, red having an expected odds of 30%, and gold having an expected odds of 40%. When the color of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C changes while in the reversed state, the expected odds are increased by the amount of the color change. In this case, the expected rate for the color increases from 2% to 10%, and the inverted 43% is added to this, so the overall expected rate increases from 45% to 53%. After this, a countdown effect is performed using the inverted numbers displayed on the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C.

When the countdown effect begins, as shown in Figure 83 (J), the number displayed in inverse on the flag section of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is decremented by one. Here, the inverse "3" changes to an inverse "2." Then, as shown in Figure 83 (K), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were statically displayed as "2" and "4," are displayed again. Here, nothing is displayed on the center decorative pattern 8C. Note that after a number pattern is statically displayed on the center decorative pattern 8C, a pseudo-consecutive effect may be executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are again statically displayed. The number displayed in inverse on the flag section of the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C continues to decrement, and when a statically displayed "0" is displayed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed statically. Figure 83 (L) shows an example in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are statically displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the image reversal suggesting the degree of expectation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 81, the hold icon 9A, which indicates the likelihood of a win by changing color, also indicates the likelihood of a win by inverting. This configuration allows for a novel and unprecedented presentation that visually entertains the player and increases their interest. The same applies to Figs. 82 and 83.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 81, the reserved icon 9A is displayed in an uninverted state, and then the first effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9A is inverted. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest. The same applies to Figs. 82 and 83.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 82 and 83, in the first effect, the reserved icon 9A is displayed in an uninverted state, then the reserved icon 9A rotates, and after the rotation, the reserved icon 9A is displayed in an inverted state. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 82 and 83, the reserved icon 9A includes letters (including numbers), and after the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the letters included in the reserved icon 9A are inverted and changed to other letters. With this configuration, a novel effect that has not been seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 81 to 83, the first effect is executed during the special symbol change, and after the reserved icon 9A is displayed in an uninverted state, the reserved icon 9A may or may not be inverted during the change, and the reserved icon 9A indicates the expected probability of a win during the change. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 82 and 83, in the first effect, the reserved icon 9A is displayed in an uninverted state at a first position on the display screen 7a, and is displayed in an inverted state at a second position on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the image reversal expectation indication effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the image inversion expectation suggestion effects A to C, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon (reserved icon) 9C is displayed inverted, it is assumed that it is inverted left and right. However, the inversion method is not limited to left and right inversion, and may be, for example, upside down inversion.

[Modification 2]
In the image inversion expectation suggestion effects B and C, the characters displayed in inversion on the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C are numbers, but characters other than numbers may also be displayed in inversion.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the image reversal expectation suggestion effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. In addition, the specific image that suggests the expectation of a win by changing color and also by reversing may be an image other than a hold icon.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image that suggests the probability of winning by changing color,
The reversal of the specific image also indicates the likelihood of winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
After the specific image is displayed in an uninverted state, a first effect can be executed in which the specific image is inverted.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2,
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed in an uninverted state, then the specific image is rotated, and after the rotation, the specific image is displayed in an inverted state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2 or B1-3,
The specific image includes text,
After the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the characters included in the specific image are inverted and changed to other characters.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-2 to B1-4,
The first effect is executed during a special chart change, and after the specific image is displayed in an uninverted state, the specific image may or may not be inverted during the change, and the specific image indicates the expected probability of a hit in the change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-2 to B1-5,
In the first performance, the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state at a first position on the display means, and is displayed in an inverted state at a second position on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific mode pseudo consecutive effects A to C will be explained below using Figures 84 to 86. These specific mode pseudo consecutive effects can be executed during the performance of a variable effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific mode pseudo consecutive effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that specific mode pseudo consecutive effect C will be explained assuming that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Specific mode pseudo consecutive performance A]
Figure 84 is a diagram to explain specific mode pseudo consecutive performance A.
First, as shown in Figure 84 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol. Note that the stopping of the "NEXT" symbol confirms the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (C), image display effect A is executed. Image display effect A is an effect in which the first image G1, which indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the first image G1 is displayed moving in a downward right direction on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. The first image G1 may be displayed so that it frames out of the display screen 7a, or may be displayed so that it bounces off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This change may be a display in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R clearly begin to change, or it may be a display in which only the first image G1 is displayed. The first image G1 has the words "NEXT" and "Second Time" written on it. "NEXT" indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, and "Second Time" indicates that this is the second change, including the first change.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (D), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is an "8" symbol, the right symbol 8R is a "4" symbol, and the middle symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol. Note that the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect is confirmed when the "NEXT" symbol stops.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (E), image display effect B is executed. Image display effect B is an effect in which the second image G2, which indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, is displayed moving. Here, the second image G2 is displayed moving toward the lower right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. The second image G2 may be displayed to frame out of the display screen 7a, or may bounce off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of second image G2, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This change may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R clearly begin to change, or it may be a display in which only the second image G2 is displayed. The second image G2 has the words "NEXT" and "3rd time" written on it. "NEXT" indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, and "3rd time" indicates that this is the third change, including the first change.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols is the same). Identification information refers to the numbers that make up the effect symbols (the same applies below). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (G), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Specific mode pseudo consecutive performance B]
Figure 85 is a diagram to explain the specific mode pseudo consecutive performance B.
First, as shown in Figure 85 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle symbol 8C is a "SPECIAL" symbol. The "SPECIAL" symbol is a "NEXT" symbol with the word "SPECIAL" added to it. Furthermore, when the "SPECIAL" symbol stops, the execution of the pseudo consecutive effects is confirmed.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (C), image display effect A is executed. Image display effect A is an effect in which the first image G1, which indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the first image G1 is displayed moving in a downward right direction on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. The first image G1 may be displayed so that it frames out of the display screen 7a, or so that it bounces off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This change may be a display in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R clearly begin to change, or it may be a display in which only the first image G1 is displayed. The first image G1 has the words "NEXT" and "Second Time" written on it. "NEXT" indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, and "Second Time" indicates that this is the second change, including the first change.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (D), image display effect B is executed. Image display effect B is an effect in which the second image G2, which indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, is displayed moving. Here, the second image G2 is displayed moving in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. The second image G2 may be displayed so that it frames out of the display screen 7a, or may be displayed so that it bounces off the edge of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This change may be a display in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R clearly begin to change, or it may be a display in which only the second image G2 is displayed. The second image G2 has the words "NEXT" and "3rd time" written on it. "NEXT" indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, and "3rd time" indicates that this is the third change, including the first change. However, after image display effect A, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not temporarily stop, which indicates that this is the third change in the effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (E), image display effect C is executed. Image display effect C is an effect in which a third image G3, which suggests the effect to be executed next, is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the third image G3 is displayed moving in a downward right direction on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The third image G3 may be displayed so that it frames out of the display screen 7a, or so that it bounces off the edge of the display screen 7a. The word "battle" is written on the third image G3. "Battle" indicates that a battle effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle effect, a big win is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other. Furthermore, the changing effect symbol temporarily stops in a reach mode and is displayed in the corner of the display screen 7a. A reach mode is generally an effect in which the left and right effect symbols are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "3" symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB turns rainbow colored, notifying the player of the victory of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a confirmed "3" state. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

[Specific mode pseudo consecutive performance C]
Figure 86 is a diagram to explain specific mode pseudo consecutive performance C.
First, as shown in Fig. 86 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the display screen 7a shows the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starting to change and changing at high speed. On the display screen 7b below the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 86 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle symbol 8C is a "SPECIAL" symbol. The "SPECIAL" symbol is a "NEXT" symbol with the word "SPECIAL" added to it. Furthermore, when the "SPECIAL" symbol stops, the execution of the pseudo consecutive effects is confirmed.

Next, as shown in Figure 86 (C), image display effect A is executed. Image display effect A is an effect in which the first image G1, which indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, is displayed moving. Here, the first image G1 is displayed moving in a downward right direction on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. The first image G1 frames out of the display screen 7a and frames in on the display screen 7b. Here, along with the display of the first image G1, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This change may be a display in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R clearly begin to change, or it may be a display in which only the first image G1 is displayed. The first image G1 has the words "NEXT" and "Second Time" written on it. "NEXT" indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, and "Second Time" indicates that this is the second change, including the first change.

Next, as shown in Figure 86 (D), image display effect B is executed. Image display effect B is an effect in which the second image G2, which indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, is displayed moving. Here, the second image G2 is displayed moving in a downward right direction on the display screen 7a, as indicated by arrow Y. The second image G2 frames out of the display screen 7a and frames in on the display screen 7b. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again. This change may be a display in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R clearly begin to change, or it may be a display in which only the second image G2 is displayed. The second image G2 has the words "NEXT" and "3rd time" written on it. "NEXT" indicates the execution of a pseudo-consecutive effect, and "3rd time" indicates that this is the third change including the first change. However, after image display effect A, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R do not temporarily stop, which indicates that this is the third change in the effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 86 (E), image display effect C is executed. Image display effect C is an effect in which a third image G3, which suggests the effect to be executed next, is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the third image G3 is displayed moving in a downward right direction on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. The third image G3 frames out of the display screen 7a and frames in on the display screen 7b. The word "battle" is written on the third image G3. "Battle" indicates that a battle effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 86 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle effect, a big win is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face off against each other. Furthermore, the changing effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach mode and are displayed in the corner of the display screen 7a. A reach mode is generally a mode in which the left and right effect symbols are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "3" symbols. Furthermore, the ally character CRA is displayed across both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 86 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB is rainbow-colored, notifying the player of the victory of the ally character CRA. Furthermore, the ally character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across both display screen 7a and display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 86 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the display screen 7a shows the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stopping at a fixed "3" symbol. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed on display screen 7b below display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears as soon as the fixed stop occurs.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of specific pseudo-consecutive performances.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, when the center effect symbol 8C stops on the "NEXT" symbol, a first image G1 indicating the first execution of the pseudo consecutive effect is displayed, and a pseudo consecutive effect is executed (FIGS. 84(A)-(C)). Furthermore, when the center effect symbol 8C stops on the "NEXT" symbol, a second image G2 indicating the second execution of the pseudo consecutive effect is displayed, and a pseudo consecutive effect is executed (FIGS. 84(D)(E)). On the other hand, after the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, when the center effect symbol 8C temporarily stops on the "SPECIAL" symbol, the first image G1 and the second image G2 are displayed in succession, and a pseudo consecutive effect is executed (FIGS. 85(A)-(D), 86(A)-(D)). According to this configuration, the stopping of the "SPECIAL" symbol causes a pseudo consecutive performance to be performed continuously, which can surprise the player and increase the interest in the game.

The mode in which the middle performance symbol 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "first mode of the specific modes," and the mode in which it stops at the "SPECIAL" symbol corresponds to the "second mode of the specific modes." Also, the first image G1 corresponds to the "first image," and the second image G2 corresponds to the "second image."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the middle effect symbol 8C stops on the "SPECIAL" image, the first image G1, the second image G2, and then the third image G3 suggesting the execution of a battle effect are displayed, and then the battle effect is executed. With this configuration, the stopping of the "SPECIAL" symbol causes a series of pseudo consecutive effects to be performed, and furthermore, the execution of a battle effect is suggested by the third image G3 thereafter, which can give the player an even greater surprise and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the battle effect corresponds to the "special effect," and the third image G3 corresponds to the "third image."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are displayed moving on the display screen 7a (7a and 7b) (FIGS. 84(C)(E), 85(C)-(E), 86(C)-(E)). With this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out more than when the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are simply displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are displayed in a moving manner, and then frame out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 86(C) to 86(E)). This configuration makes the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are displayed in a moving manner, and then they frame out of the display screen 7a and frame in on the display screen 7b (FIGS. 86(C) to 86(E)). This configuration makes the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Note that display screen 7a corresponds to the "display screen" and display screen 7b corresponds to the "other display screen."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "first mode" is when the middle performance symbol 8C among the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is the "NEXT" symbol. With this configuration, the first mode in which the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance is confirmed becomes easy to understand, and the interest in the game can be increased. Note that the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "special symbol."

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "second mode" is when the middle performance symbol 8C among the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a "SPECIAL" symbol, which is a "NEXT" symbol with the word "SPECIAL" added to it. This configuration makes it easy to understand the second mode, which determines the execution of the pseudo-consecutive performance and the special performance, and can increase the interest in the game. The word "SPECIAL" corresponds to the "predetermined image."

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of specific pseudo-consecutive effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the temporary stop pattern performance (Figures 84 (B) (D), 85 (B), and 86 (B)), the left performance pattern 8L → right performance pattern 8R → center performance pattern 8C were configured to stop in this order.In contrast to this, the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R may be configured to stop simultaneously, or the left, center, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be configured to stop simultaneously.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the temporary pattern stop performance (Figures 84 (B) (D), 85 (B), and 86 (B)), the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R stopped with different patterns.In contrast, the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R may also be configured to stop with the same pattern (stop in a reach mode).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the temporary stop pattern performance (Figures 84 (B) (D), 85 (B), and 86 (B)), the "NEXT" and "SPECIAL" patterns are configured to stop on the center performance pattern 8C. In contrast, the "NEXT" and "SPECIAL" patterns may be configured to stop on the left performance pattern 8L, or the "NEXT" and "SPECIAL" patterns may be configured to stop on the right performance pattern 8R. Furthermore, the "NEXT" and "SPECIAL" patterns may be configured to stop on two or more of the temporary stop performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop performance (Figures 84(B)(D), 85(B), and 86(B)), all of the left, center, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to temporarily stop. In contrast, it is also possible to configure at least one of the left, center, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to temporarily stop. In this case, at least one of the temporarily stopped performance symbols may be a "NEXT" symbol or a "SPECIAL" symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b are arranged adjacent to each other, but the display screens 7a and 7b may be arranged apart from each other.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 is described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but the same effect may be achieved using the sub-display screen 64.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the third image G3 suggesting the execution of a battle effect is displayed, and then the battle effect is executed (FIGS. 85(E) to (G), 86(E) to (G)). However, a configuration may be adopted in which effects other than battle effects can be selectively executed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
a display screen for displaying an image;
When the changing symbols stop in a specific manner on the display screen, a pseudo consecutive effect, which is a pseudo consecutive change effect, is executed.
After the symbols start to vary, when the symbols stop in a first mode among the specific modes, a first image indicating a first execution of the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, and thereafter, when the symbols stop in the first mode, a second image indicating a second execution of the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed,
After the symbol starts to vary, when the symbol stops in a second mode among the specific modes, the first image and the second image are displayed in succession, and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
After the variation of the symbols starts, when the symbols stop in the second mode, a third image suggesting the next special effect to be executed is displayed following the display of the first image and the second image, and then the special effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is displayed in a moving manner on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3,
At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is moved and displayed on the display screen, and then frames out of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
the first image, the second image, and the third image that have been framed out of the display screen are framed in a display screen different from the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least one of the stopped symbols is a special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-6,
The second aspect is an aspect in which at least one of the stopped symbols is a symbol in which a predetermined image is added to the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains the variable crossover continuous effects A to C using Figures 87 to 89. These variable crossover continuous effects can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable crossover continuous effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Continuous performance across fluctuations A]
Figure 87 is a diagram to explain the variable crossover continuous performance A.
First, as shown in Figure 87 (A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (C), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the NEXT image G is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed again along with the display of the NEXT image G. This change may be a clear indication that the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have begun to change, or it may be a display of only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (D), a symbol confirmation stop effect is executed. The symbol confirmation stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. After that, the left, middle, and right symbol 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped. Here, the left symbol 8L is an "8" symbol, the right symbol 8R is a "4" symbol, and the middle symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol. Three pending icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears as soon as the confirmation stop occurs.

Next, when the next change begins, an image display effect is executed, as shown in Figure 87 (E). The image display effect is an effect in which the next image G is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the next image G is displayed moving to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left and right effect symbols are the same (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols is the same). Identification information refers to the numbers that make up the effect symbols (the same applies below). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, a jackpot is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing off against each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 87 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Continuous performance across fluctuations B]
Figure 88 is a diagram to explain the variable crossover continuous performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively. Hereinafter, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as the "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as the "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area will be referred to as the "third hold icon 9A." Furthermore, on the display screen 7a, the area in which the hold icon 9A is displayed will be referred to as the "hold area," and the area in which the change icon 9C is displayed will be referred to as the "change area."

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the NEXT image G is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-varied along with the display of the NEXT image G. This re-variation may be a clear indication that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have begun to change, or it may be a display of only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" symbol. Three hold icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the display color of the variable icon 9C is changing. Specifically, it changes from white to green. The colors of the hold icons are set in stages according to the likelihood of a jackpot; for example, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order white → blue → green → purple → red → gold.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (D), a symbol confirmation stop effect is executed. The symbol confirmation stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, the middle symbol 8C, and the right symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. After that, the left, middle, and right symbol 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped. Here, the left symbol 8L is an "8," the right symbol 8R is a "4," and the middle symbol 8C is a "5." Three pending icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the variable icon 9C remains. Then, when the next change begins, the hold icon 9A shifts. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A in the hold area moves to the change area as shown by arrow Y3 and becomes the change icon 9C. In the hold area, the second hold icon 9A also moves as shown by arrow Y2 and becomes the first hold icon 9C. The third hold icon 9A moves as shown by arrow Y1 and becomes the second hold icon 9C. In particular, the green change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change remains in the change area, and an effect is produced in which the first hold icon 9A collides with the change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (E), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. In particular, due to the collision of the first hold icon 9A with the corresponding change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change, the corresponding change icon 9C corresponding to the current change has changed to a hold red. If the corresponding change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change is green, the corresponding change icon 9C corresponding to the current change will be green or a display color indicating a higher expectation level.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C, which has changed to red, are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, a jackpot is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing off against each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 88 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Continuous performance across fluctuations C]
Figure 89 is a diagram to explain the variable crossover continuous performance C.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively. Hereinafter, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as the "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as the "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area will be referred to as the "third hold icon 9A." Furthermore, on the display screen 7a, the area in which the hold icon 9A is displayed will be referred to as the "hold area," and the area in which the change icon 9C is displayed will be referred to as the "change area."

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (B), a symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left symbol 8L, middle symbol 8C, and right symbol 8R temporarily stop. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left symbol 8L slows down, and the left symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right symbol 8R slows down, and the right symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle symbol 8C slows down, and the middle symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (C), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the NEXT image G is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, along with the display of the NEXT image G, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-varied. This re-variation may be a clear indication that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have begun to change, or it may be a display of only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" symbol. Three hold icons 9A and the corresponding variable icons are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the display color of the variable icon 9C is changing. Specifically, it changes from white to green. The colors of the hold icons are set in stages according to the likelihood of a jackpot; for example, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. In addition, the pending icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed larger than when the change started.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (D), a pattern confirmation stop effect is executed. The pattern confirmation stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are confirmed and stopped. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left performance pattern 8L slows down, and the left performance pattern 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right performance pattern 8R slows down, and the right performance pattern 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle performance pattern 8C slows down, and the middle performance pattern 8C temporarily stops. After that, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is an "8" pattern, the right performance pattern 8R is a "4" pattern, and the middle performance pattern 8C is a "NEXT" pattern. Three hold icons 9A and the corresponding fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the variable icon 9C remains and does not disappear. Then, when the next variation begins, the hold icon 9A shifts. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A in the hold area moves to the variable area as shown by arrow Y3 and becomes the variable icon 9C. In the hold area, the second hold icon 9A also moves as shown by arrow Y2 and becomes the first hold icon 9C. The third hold icon 9A moves as shown by arrow Y1 and becomes the second hold icon 9C. Here, in particular, the green variable icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation remains in the variable area, and an effect is produced in which the first hold icon 9A collides with the variable icon 9C corresponding to the previous variation.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (E), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the NEXT image G is displayed in a moving manner. Here, the NEXT image G is displayed moving to the right on the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. Two hold icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C corresponding to the first special pattern hold are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, due to the collision of the first hold icon 9A with the change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change, the change icon 9C corresponding to the current change has changed to a green hold. If the change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change is green, the change icon 9C corresponding to the current change will be green or a display color indicating a higher expectation level.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C, which has changed to green, are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, a jackpot is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing off against each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 89 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. The hold icon 9A returns to its original size.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the continuous fluctuation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the middle effect pattern 8C of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is fixed and stopped as a "NEXT" pattern, an image display effect is executed in which the NEXT image G is displayed at the beginning of the next change (FIGS. 87(D)(E), 89(D)(E)). Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the change icon 9C has changed to a reserved state and remains when the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, an effect is executed in which the reserved change is continued (FIGS. 88(D)(E), 89(D)(E)). This configuration allows the effect performed within one change to be performed across multiple changes, thereby expanding the range of effects and increasing the interest in the game. The shift of the reserved icon 9A after the fixed stop in the pattern fixed stop effect, and the subsequent image display effect and change start effect correspond to "change crossing effects."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "NEXT" symbol is fixed and stopped on the middle effect symbol 8C, an image display effect is executed in the next variation (Fig. 87(D)(E), Fig. 89(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the stopping of the "NEXT" symbol and the image display effect are executed across multiple variations, so the range of effects is expanded and the interest in the game can be increased.

Note that the mode in which the middle effect pattern 8C among the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes the "NEXT" pattern corresponds to a "specific mode," and the image display effect corresponds to a "specific effect."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "NEXT" symbol temporarily stops on the middle performance symbol 8C, an image display performance is executed during the corresponding variation following this temporary stop (FIGS. 87(B)(C), 88(B)(C), 89(B)(C)). With this configuration, the stopping of the "NEXT" symbol and the image display performance are executed within a single variation, making it difficult to distinguish from a case where the performance is executed across multiple variations, and the range of performance can be expanded without causing any sense of incongruity, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the variable icon 9C has changed to a reserved state and remains when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, a performance is performed to continue the reserved change (Fig. 88 (D) (E), Fig. 89 (D) (E)). With this configuration, the reserved change is carried over across the change, which can increase the interest in the game. Note that the shift movement of the reserved icon 9A after the fixed stop in the pattern fixed stop performance, and the subsequent image display performance and change start performance (Fig. 88 (D) (E), Fig. 89 (D) (E)) correspond to the "hold continuation performance".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the variable icon 9C changes to green when the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, the first variable icon 9A in the reserve area moves to the variable area and becomes the variable icon 9C in green or red, which has a higher expectation than green (Figures 88 (D) (E), 89 (D) (E)). With this configuration, the same reserve change or a more expectation reserve change occurs across the change, which can increase the interest in the game. Note that the green variable icon 9C corresponds to the "first reserve mode," and the red variable icon 9C corresponds to the "second reserve mode."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the pattern determination stop effect, the green change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change remains in the change area, and the effect of the first reserved icon 9A colliding with the change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change is performed (Figure 88 (D), Figure 89 (D)). According to this configuration, the effect of the hold change across the change stands out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the continuous performance across fluctuations is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop effect (FIGS. 87(B), 88(B), 89(B)) and the symbol fixed stop effect (FIGS. 87(D), 88(D), 89(D)), the left symbol 8L, the right symbol 8R, and the center symbol 8C are stopped in this order. In contrast, the left and right symbols 8L and 8R may be stopped simultaneously, or the left, center, and right symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped simultaneously.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop effect (FIGS. 87(B), 88(B), 89(B)) and the symbol fixed stop effect (FIGS. 87(D), 88(D), 89(D)), the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R are configured to stop with different symbols. In contrast, the left symbol 8L and the right symbol 8R may be configured to stop with the same symbol (stop in a reach mode).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop effect (FIGS. 87(B), 88(B), 89(B)) and the symbol fixed stop effect (FIGS. 87(D), 89(D)), the "NEXT" symbol was configured to stop on the center effect symbol 8C. In contrast, the "NEXT" symbol may be configured to stop on the left effect symbol 8L, or the "NEXT" symbol may be configured to stop on the right effect symbol 8R. Also, the "NEXT" symbol may be configured to stop on two or more of the temporary stop effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop effect (Fig. 87(B), Fig. 88(B), Fig. 89(B)), all of the left, center, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to be temporarily stopped. In contrast, at least one of the left, center, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be configured to be temporarily stopped. In this case, at least one of the temporarily stopped effect symbols may be the "NEXT" symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, when the variable icon 9C is changed to a reserved state, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are enlarged (FIGS. 89(C) to 89(F)). Instead of enlarging the display, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A may be changed to a character icon related to the theme of the gaming machine 1. In this case, it is possible to use the variable icon 9C and at least one of the three reserved icons 9C as a character icon.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
a display screen for displaying an image;
When the changing pattern on the display screen is fixed and stopped, in the next change, it is possible to execute a change straddling effect, which is an effect having continuity from the end of the current change to the beginning of the next change.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The variation straddle effect includes an effect in which, when the varying pattern on the display screen is fixed and stopped in a specific manner, a specific effect is executed in the next variation so as to be continuous with the fixed stop,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
When the changing pattern on the display screen is temporarily stopped in the specific mode, the specific effect can be executed in the change so as to be continuous with the temporary stop.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
The change-over effect includes a hold continuation effect that takes over the hold change of the change icon in the next change when the change icon displayed in the change area is hold changed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the hold continuation effect, when the variable icon changes to a hold state and is in a first hold state, in the next change, when the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the variable area and becomes the variable icon, the state changes to the first hold state, or the state changes to a second hold state which has a higher expectation of transitioning to a favorable game that is more advantageous to the player than the first hold state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-5,
When the reserved icon displayed in the reserved area moves to the variable area, the variable icon of the previous variable remains in the variable area, and an effect is executed in which the reserved icon collides with the variable icon of the previous variable.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains reserved icon linked effects A to C using Figures 90 to 92. These reserved icon linked effects are executed during special symbol variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a reserved icon linked effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Hold icon linked effect A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating the reserved icon linkage effect A. This reserved icon linkage effect A is an effect that occurs during one change of the special symbol. In the reserved icon linkage effect A, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a decorative symbol change effect is first performed. This decorative symbol change effect shows the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changing, and displays the variable icon 9C, the variable icon holding unit 9CC, four reserved icons 9A, and four reserved holding units 9AA. The variable icon holding unit 9CC is located below the variable icon 9C and is a holding unit for supporting the variable icon 9C. The four reserved holding units 9AA are each a holding unit for supporting the reserved icon 9A. The reserved icons 9A, up to a maximum of four, are placed on the reserved holding units 9AA from left to right in the first starting slot 20 in order of winning. In the hold icons 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the first hold icon, in the hold icons 9A, the second hold icon from the left (the second oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the second hold icon, the third hold icon from the left (the third oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the third hold icon, and the fourth hold icon from the left (the most recent entry into the first start port 20) is also called the fourth hold icon. Also, in the hold holding unit 9AA, the hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon is also called the first hold holding unit, the hold holding unit that holds the second hold icon is also called the second hold holding unit, the hold holding unit that holds the third hold icon is also called the third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the fourth hold icon is also called the fourth hold holding unit.
The four hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are composed of white circles.
In addition, the fourth reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A is also called the target reserved icon because it is the reserved icon that triggers the reserved icon movement effect described later. In other words, the reserved icon movement effect described later is performed based on the display of the fourth reserved icon (more specifically, when there are three reserved icons and a game ball has entered the first start hole 20).

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (B), hold icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding part among hold holding parts 9AA both move upward (rise). In this case, the movement speed of the fourth hold icon and the fourth hold holding part is the same. In the hold icon movement effect described below, when the hold icon and the hold holding part move together, their movement speeds are the same. However, this is not limited to this, and when the hold icon and the hold holding part move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold holding part, or the hold holding part may move faster than the hold icon. Note that the movement direction of the hold icon (hold holding part) is different from the shift direction of the hold icon (to the left).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), hold icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding section among hold holding sections 9AA further move upward (rise), and the third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding section among hold holding sections 9AA both move upward (rise). In this case, the third hold icon (third hold holding section) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding section) move at the same speed. However, this is not limited to this, and the third hold icon (third hold holding section) may move faster than the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding section), or the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding section) may move faster than the third hold icon (third hold holding section).

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (D), hold icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward and move downward (descend), the third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA move further upward (rise), and the second hold icon among hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise). In this case, the movement speed of the second hold icon (second hold holding portion) and the third hold icon (third hold holding portion) is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the second hold icon (second hold holding section) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold holding section), or the third hold icon (third hold holding section) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), hold icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA return to their pre-movement positions and stop, the third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (descend), the second hold icon among hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA move further upward (rise), and the first hold icon among hold icons 9A and the first hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise). In this case, the movement speeds of the first hold icon (first hold holding portion) and the second hold icon (second hold holding portion) are the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the first hold icon (first hold holding section) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding section), or the second hold icon (second hold holding section) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), a hold icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA return to their pre-movement positions and stop, the second hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (descend), the first hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the first hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA move further upward (rise), and the floating icon 9C moves upward (rise). In this case, the floating icon holding portion 9CC does not move together with the floating icon 9C. However, this is not limited to this, and the floating icon 9CC may move upward together with the floating icon holding portion 9CC. Furthermore, the moving speed of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding section), and the second hold icon (second hold holding section) is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the first hold icon (first hold holding section) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding section), or the second hold icon (second hold holding section) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding section).

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (G), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as "2", "3", and "4" losing symbols, and the second reserved icon of the reserved icon 9A and the second reserved holding part of the reserved holding part 9AA, the first reserved icon of the reserved icon 9A and the first reserved holding part of the reserved holding part 9AA, and the variable icon 9C return to their positions before moving and stop.
In this way, in the pending icon movement presentation, a wave-like presentation can be created by the movements of the pending icon 9A, the pending holding section 9AA, and the variable icon 9C.
In the above-described hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon 9A moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Also, when the hold holding unit 9AA moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (for example, like hopping).

Next, as shown in Figure 90 (H), a hold icon shift effect is performed. In this hold icon shift effect, of the hold icons 9A, the first hold icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, the second hold icon moves to the first hold holding section and becomes the first hold icon, the third hold icon moves to the second hold holding section and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding section and becomes the third hold icon.

Then, the above-described hold icon movement effect is performed using the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding section, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding section, the new third hold icon (target hold), and the third hold holding section. Thereafter, each time a hold icon shift effect is performed, the above-described hold icon movement effect is performed after the hold shift. Then, when the target hold becomes the variable icon, an effect is performed in which the variable icon 9C moves upward, as in the above-described hold icon movement effect E, and this series of effects ends.

[Hold icon linked effect B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating the reserved icon linkage effect B. This reserved icon linkage effect B is an effect that occurs during one change of the special symbol. In the reserved icon linkage effect B, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a decorative symbol change effect is first performed. This decorative symbol change effect shows the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changing, and displays the variable icon 9C, the variable icon holding section 9CC, four reserved icons 9A, and four reserved holding sections 9AA. The variable icon holding section 9CC is located below the variable icon 9C and is a holding section for supporting the variable icon 9C. The four reserved holding sections 9AA are each a holding section for supporting the reserved icon 9A. The reserved icons 9A, up to a maximum of four, are placed on the reserved holding sections 9AA from left to right in the first starting slot 20 in order of winning. In the hold icons 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the first hold icon, in the hold icons 9A, the second hold icon from the left (the second oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the second hold icon, the third hold icon from the left (the third oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the third hold icon, and the fourth hold icon from the left (the most recent entry into the first start port 20) is also called the fourth hold icon. Also, in the hold holding unit 9AA, the hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon is also called the first hold holding unit, the hold holding unit that holds the second hold icon is also called the second hold holding unit, the hold holding unit that holds the third hold icon is also called the third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the fourth hold icon is also called the fourth hold holding unit.
The four hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are composed of white circles.
In addition, the fourth reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A is also called the target reserved icon because it is the reserved icon that triggers the reserved icon movement effect described later. In other words, the reserved icon movement effect described later is performed based on the display of the fourth reserved icon (more specifically, when there are three reserved icons and a game ball has entered the first start hole 20).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), hold icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise), and the fourth hold icon (target hold) changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91(B), the change to red is indicated by cross-hatching). In this case, the fourth hold icon and the fourth hold holding portion move at the same speed. In the hold icon movement effects described below, when the hold icon and the hold holding portion move together, their movement speeds are the same. However, this is not limited to this; when the hold icon and the hold holding portion move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold holding portion, or the hold holding portion may move faster than the hold icon. Note that the movement direction of the hold icon (hold holding portion) is different from the shift direction of the hold icon (to the left).

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (C), hold icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA further move upward (rise), and the third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise), and the third hold icon changes from white to red (in the example of Figure 91 (C), the change to red is shown by cross-hatching). In this case, the movement speed of the third hold icon (third hold holding portion) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding portion) is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the third hold icon (third hold holding section) may be faster than the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding section), or the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding section) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold holding section).

Next, as shown in Figure 91(D), hold icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward and move downward (descend), the third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA move further upward (rise), the second hold icon among hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise), and the second hold icon changes color from white to red (in the example of Figure 91(D), the change to red is indicated by cross-hatching). In this case, the movement speeds of the second hold icon (second hold holding portion) and the third hold icon (third hold holding portion) are the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the second hold icon (second hold holding section) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold holding section), or the third hold icon (third hold holding section) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding section).

Next, as shown in Figure 91(E), hold icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA return to their original positions and stop, the third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (descend), the second hold icon among hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA move further upward (rise), the first hold icon among hold icons 9A and the first hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise), and the first hold icon changes color from white to red (the change to red is indicated by cross-hatching in the example of Figure 91(E)). In this case, the movement speed of the first hold icon (first hold holding unit) and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the first hold icon (first hold holding unit) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding unit), or the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding unit).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a hold icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA return to their pre-movement positions and stop. The second hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (descend). The first hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the first hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA move further upward (rise). As the variable icon 9C moves upward (rises), it changes color from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91(F), the change to red is indicated by cross-hatching). In this case, the variable icon holding portion 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, this is not limited to this; the variable icon 9CC may also move upward together with the variable icon holding portion 9CC. Furthermore, the moving speed of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding section), and the second hold icon (second hold holding section) is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the first hold icon (first hold holding section) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding section), or the second hold icon (second hold holding section) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding section).

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (G), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as "2,""3," and "4" missing symbols, and the second reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A and the second reserved holding portion among the reserved holding portion 9AA, the first reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A and the first reserved holding portion among the reserved holding portion 9AA, and the variable icon 9C return to their positions before moving and stop. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain changed to red reserved.
In this way, in the hold icon movement presentation, the hold icon 9A changes to red hold each time it moves, and the movements of the hold icon 9A, hold holding section 9AA, and the variable icon 9C create a wave-like presentation.
In the above-described hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon 9A moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Also, when the hold holding unit 9AA moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (for example, like hopping).

Next, as shown in Figure 91 (H), a hold icon shift effect is performed. In this hold icon shift effect, of the hold icons 9A, the first hold icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, the second hold icon moves to the first hold holding section and becomes the first hold icon, the third hold icon moves to the second hold holding section and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding section and becomes the third hold icon.

Then, the above-mentioned hold icon movement effect is performed using the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding section, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding section, the new third hold icon (target hold), and the third hold holding section. At this time, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain as smiling characters. Thereafter, each time a hold icon shift effect is performed, the above-mentioned hold icon movement effect is performed after the hold shift. Then, when the target hold becomes the variable icon, the variable icon 9C is moved upward as in the above-mentioned hold icon movement effect E while the variable icon is in a red hold state, and this series of effects ends.

[Hold icon linked effect C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating the reserved icon linkage effect C. This reserved icon linkage effect C is an effect that occurs during one change of the special symbol. In the reserved icon linkage effect C, as shown in FIG. 92(A), a decorative symbol change effect is first performed. This decorative symbol change effect shows the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changing, and displays the variable icon 9C, the variable icon holding section 9CC, four reserved icons 9A, and four reserved holding sections 9AA. The variable icon holding section 9CC is located below the variable icon 9C and is a holding section for supporting the variable icon 9C. The four reserved holding sections 9AA are each a holding section for supporting the reserved icon 9A. The reserved icons 9A, up to a maximum of four, are placed on the reserved holding sections 9AA from left to right in the first starting slot 20 in order of winning. In the hold icons 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the first hold icon, in the hold icons 9A, the second hold icon from the left (the second oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the second hold icon, the third hold icon from the left (the third oldest entry into the first start port 20) is also called the third hold icon, and the fourth hold icon from the left (the most recent entry into the first start port 20) is also called the fourth hold icon. Also, in the hold holding unit 9AA, the hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon is also called the first hold holding unit, the hold holding unit that holds the second hold icon is also called the second hold holding unit, the hold holding unit that holds the third hold icon is also called the third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the fourth hold icon is also called the fourth hold holding unit.
The four hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are composed of white circles.
In addition, the fourth reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A is also called the target reserved icon because it is the reserved icon that triggers the reserved icon movement effect described later. In other words, the reserved icon movement effect described later is performed based on the display of the fourth reserved icon (more specifically, when there are three reserved icons and a game ball has entered the first start hole 20).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), hold icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise), and the fourth hold icon (target hold) changes from a circular shape to a smiling character (hereinafter also referred to as a smiling character). In this case, the fourth hold icon and the fourth hold holding portion move at the same speed. In the hold icon movement effects described below, when the hold icon and the hold holding portion move together, their movement speeds are the same. However, this is not limited to this; when the hold icon and the hold holding portion move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold holding portion, or the hold holding portion may move faster than the hold icon. Note that the movement direction of the hold icon (hold holding portion) is different from the shift direction of the hold icon (to the left).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), hold icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding section among hold holding sections 9AA further move upward (rise), and the third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding section among hold holding sections 9AA both move upward (rise), causing the third hold icon to change from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the third hold icon (third hold holding section) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding section) move at the same speed. However, this is not limited to this, and the third hold icon (third hold holding section) may move faster than the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding section), or the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding section) may move faster than the third hold icon (third hold holding section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), hold icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward and move downward (descend), the third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA move further upward (rise), the second hold icon among hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise), and the second hold icon changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the movement speed of the second hold icon (second hold holding portion) and the third hold icon (third hold holding portion) is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the second hold icon (second hold holding section) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold holding section), or the third hold icon (third hold holding section) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(E), hold icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) among hold icons 9A and the fourth hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA return to their original positions and stop. The third hold icon among hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (descend). The second hold icon among hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA move further upward (rise). The first hold icon among hold icons 9A and the first hold holding portion among hold holding portions 9AA both move upward (rise). The first hold icon changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the movement speeds of the first hold icon (first hold holding portion) and the second hold icon (second hold holding portion) are the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the movement speed of the first hold icon (first hold holding section) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding section), or the second hold icon (second hold holding section) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a hold icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the third hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA return to their pre-movement positions and stop. The second hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the second hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA change direction from upward to downward and move downward (descend). The first hold icon among the hold icons 9A and the first hold holding portion among the hold holding portions 9AA further move upward (rise). As the variable icon 9C moves upward (rises), the variable icon 9C changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the variable icon holding portion 9CC does not move along with the variable icon 9C. However, this is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9CC may move upward along with the variable icon holding portion 9CC. Furthermore, the moving speed of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding section), and the second hold icon (second hold holding section) is the same. However, this is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the first hold icon (first hold holding section) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold holding section), or the second hold icon (second hold holding section) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold holding section).

Next, as shown in Figure 92 (G), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as "2,""3," and "4" missing symbols, and the second reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A and the second reserved holding section among the reserved holding section 9AA, the first reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A and the first reserved holding section among the reserved holding section 9AA, and the variable icon 9C return to their positions before moving and stop. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain changed to smiling characters.
In this way, in the hold icon movement presentation, the hold icon 9A changes into a smiling character each time it moves, and the movements of the hold icon 9A, the hold holding section 9AA, and the variable icon 9C can create a wave-like presentation.
In the above-described hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon 9A moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Also, when the hold holding unit 9AA moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Furthermore, the hold icon 9A may move upward or downward while moving up and down (for example, like hopping).

Next, as shown in Figure 92 (H), a hold icon shift effect is performed. In this hold icon shift effect, of the hold icons 9A, the first hold icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC and becomes the variable icon, the second hold icon moves to the first hold holding section and becomes the first hold icon, the third hold icon moves to the second hold holding section and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding section and becomes the third hold icon.

Then, the above-mentioned hold icon movement effect is performed using the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold holding section, the new second hold icon, the second hold holding section, the new third hold icon (target hold), and the third hold holding section. At this time, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain as smiling characters. Thereafter, each time a hold icon shift effect is performed, the above-mentioned hold icon movement effect is performed after the hold shift. Then, when the target hold becomes the variable icon, the variable icon 9C is moved upward as in the above-mentioned hold icon movement effect E while the variable icon remains as a smiling character, and this series of effects ends.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned reserved icon linkage effect C, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C moves in the reserved icon movement effect, all of them change to smiling characters, but this is not limited to this, and each icon may change to a different character. For example, in the reserved icon movement effect B, when the third reserved icon moves, it changes from a circle to a character AA different from the smiling character, in the reserved icon movement effect C, when the second reserved icon moves, it changes from a circle to a character BB different from the smiling character, in the reserved icon movement effect D, when the first reserved icon moves, it changes from a circle to a character CC different from the smiling character, and in the reserved icon movement effect E, when the variable icon moves, it changes from a circle to a character DD different from the smiling character. In this way, it is possible to create an impactful effect.

In the above-mentioned reserved icon linked effect C, after the reserved icon shifts in the reserved icon shift effect, if the reserved icon movement effect is performed again, the smiling character remains the same. However, this is not limited to this, and after the reserved icon shift effect, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C begins moving in the reserved icon movement effect, it may change to a character different from the smiling character. For example, after the reserved icon shifts in the reserved icon shift effect (e.g., after FIG. 92 (H)), when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C begins moving in the reserved icon movement effect, it changes to character XX, which is different from the smiling character. Then, when the reserved icon shifts again in the reserved icon shift effect and the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C begins moving in the reserved icon movement effect, it changes to character YY, which is different from character XX. This can create an impactful effect.

In the above-mentioned hold icon linked effects A to C, the hold icon movement effect is performed based on the display of the fourth hold icon among the hold icons 9A, but this is not limited to this, and the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of a hold icon other than the fourth hold icon among the hold icons 9A. For example, the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of the third hold icon among the hold icons 9A, or the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of the second hold icon among the hold icons 9A, or the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of the first hold icon among the hold icons 9A.

[Example of effect]
In the reserved icon linked effects A to C, a decorative pattern change effect is performed that displays the reserved icon 9A and the reserved holding section 9AA for holding the reserved icon 9A, and then a reserved icon movement effect is performed in which the reserved icon 9A and the reserved holding section 9AA move together. With this configuration, the effect in which the reserved icon 9A moves and the reserved holding section 9AA moves together can increase the sense of anticipation for a jackpot for the target reserved item, and can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned reserved icon linked effects B and C, the reserved icon 9A changes from a first state (white reserved) to a second state (green reserved, or first character reserved) while moving together with the reserved holding section 9AA. With this configuration, in addition to the effect of the reserved icon 9A moving and the reserved holding section 9AA moving, the reserved icon 9A changes from a first state (white reserved) to a second state (green reserved, or first character reserved), which further increases anticipation for a jackpot for the target reserved item and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned reserved icon linked effects A to C, the reserved icon 9A and reserved holding section 9AA are displayed, along with the variable icon 9C and the variable icon holding section 9CC for holding the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C then moves in accordance with the movement of the reserved icon 9A and the reserved holding section 9AA. With this configuration, the variable icon 9C also moves in accordance with the movement of the reserved icon 9A and the reserved holding section 9AA, further increasing anticipation for a jackpot for the target reserved item and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned reserved icon linked effects A to C, the variable icon 9C moves, but the variable icon holding unit 9CC does not. With this configuration, while the variable icon 9C also moves in accordance with the movement of the reserved icon 9A and reserved holding unit 9AA, by not moving the variable icon holding unit 9CC as well, the sense of unity is intentionally lost and the variable icon 9C can be emphasized, which can further increase anticipation of a jackpot for the target reserved item and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned hold icon linked performances A to C, the hold icon 9A includes a first hold icon (e.g., the leftmost hold icon) and a second hold icon (e.g., the second hold icon from the left), the hold holding unit 9AA includes a first hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon and a second hold holding unit that holds the second hold icon, and the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit are displayed, along with the second hold icon and the second hold holding unit, and then the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit move together, and the second hold icon and the second hold holding unit move together, and the direction of movement of the first hold holding unit and the direction of movement of the second hold holding unit may differ. With this configuration, the movement of the first reserve icon and first reserve holding unit and the movement of the second reserve icon and second reserve holding unit appear to be opposite or passing each other, making the movement of the reserve icon 9A and reserve holding unit 9AA stand out, further increasing anticipation of a jackpot for the target reserve and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect that displays a hold icon and a hold holding section for holding the hold icon,
The second display effect is a display effect in which the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the combination performance, in the second display performance, the hold icon changes from a first state to a second state while moving together with the hold holding unit,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the combination performance, in the first display performance, the hold icon and the hold holding unit are displayed, and the variable icon and the variable icon holding unit for holding the variable icon are displayed, and then, in the second display performance, the variable icon moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon and the hold holding unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
In the combination performance, in the second display performance, the variable icon holding unit does not move even though the variable icon moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
the hold icons include a first hold icon and a second hold icon;
The hold icon holding unit includes a first hold icon holding unit that holds the first hold icon and a second hold icon holding unit that holds the second hold icon,
In the combination presentation, in the first display presentation, the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit are displayed, and the second hold icon and the second hold holding unit are displayed, and then in the second display presentation, the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit move together, and the second hold icon and the second hold holding unit move together, and the moving direction of the first hold holding unit and the moving direction of the second holding unit may differ.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Special hold change effects A to C are explained below using Figures 93 to 95. These special hold change effects can be executed during the change effect of the effect pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special hold change effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Special hold change performance A]
Figure 93 is a diagram to explain special hold change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a variation effect is executed. The variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols change at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first, second, and third storage areas of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively. Hereinafter, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as the "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as the "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area will be referred to as the "third hold icon 9A." Furthermore, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed will be referred to as the "hold area," and the area where the variable icon 9C is displayed will be referred to as the "variable area." Furthermore, an information image IG stating "544 spins remaining" is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a. This indicates the number of rotations (number of fluctuations) until the ceiling is reached.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (B), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L stops at a "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C stops at a "6" pattern, and the right effect pattern 8R stops at a "2" pattern. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop. In addition, an information image IG stating "544 spins remaining" is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (C), the change start effect (first half) is executed. The change start effect (first half) is an effect that occurs before the effect pattern begins to change. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area changes from "white" to "green." The color of the hold icon is set in stages according to the likelihood of a jackpot; for example, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. In addition, the information image in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a has been updated to read "543 spins remaining." In particular, the appearance of the information image IG has changed. Specifically, the text of the information image IG, which was displayed in black, has now become white text. The change in the appearance of the information image IG is based on the likelihood of a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (D), the change start effect (second half) is executed. The change start effect (second half) is an effect in which the first hold icon 9A, which has turned "green" in the hold area, moves to the change area and becomes the change icon 9C, and the effect pattern begins to change. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. An information image IG in white text is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left and right effect symbols are the same (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols is the same). Identification information refers to the numbers that make up the effect symbols (the same applies below). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. The variable icon 9C is "green". At the bottom right of the display screen 7a, an information image IG is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (F), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, a jackpot is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing off against each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a jackpot has been confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB is rainbow.

Next, as shown in Figure 93 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the fixed stop.

[Special hold change effect B]
Figure 94 is a diagram to explain special hold change effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 94(A), a variation effect is executed. The variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols change at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed on the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively. Hereinafter, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as the "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as the "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area will be referred to as the "third hold icon 9A." Furthermore, on the display screen 7a, the area in which the hold icon 9A is displayed will be referred to as the "hold area," and the area in which the variable icon 9C is displayed will be referred to as the "variable area." Also, the display screen 7b displays an information image IG saying "544 spins remaining." This indicates the number of spins (number of fluctuations) remaining until the ceiling is reached. The display screen 7b is arranged so as to overlap the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 94 (B), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at a "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at a "2" symbol. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop. In addition, an information image IG stating "544 spins remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 94 (C), the change start effect (first half) is executed. The change start effect (first half) is an effect that occurs before the effect pattern begins to change. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area changes from "white" to "green." The color of the hold icon is set in stages according to the likelihood of a jackpot; for example, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. In addition, the information image on the display screen 7b has been updated to read "543 spins remaining." In particular, the appearance of the information image IG has changed. Specifically, the text of the information image IG, which was displayed in black, is now in white. The change in the appearance of the information image IG is based on the likelihood of a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 94 (D), the change start effect (second half) is executed. The change start effect (second half) is an effect in which the first hold icon 9A, which has turned "green" in the hold area, moves to the change area and becomes the change icon 9C, and the effect pattern begins to change. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. An information image IG in white text is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 94 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. The variable icon 9C is "green". In addition, an information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face off against each other. Note that during the battle presentation, the information image IG on display screen 7b is hidden, and the ally character CRA is displayed across display screen 7a and display screen 7b. In other words, display screen 7b displays an image covering the portion of display screen 7a. This display of display screen 7b is continuous during the battle presentation, and the enemy character CRB may also be displayed on display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 94 (G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect that notifies players that a jackpot has been confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB is rainbow. At this time, the ally character CRA and background image RB are displayed across both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In other words, even during the jackpot confirmation effect, the display screen 7b displays an image that covers the part of the display screen 7a. This display on the display screen 7b is continued during the jackpot confirmation effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 94 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears as soon as the fixed stop occurs. Nothing is displayed on the display screen 7b. This is because the information image GI indicating the ceiling becomes unnecessary information in the event of a jackpot.

[Special hold change effect C]
Figure 95 is a diagram to explain special hold change presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a variation effect is executed. The variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols change at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed on the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special symbol hold memory area 85a, respectively. Hereinafter, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will be referred to as the "first hold icon 9A," the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area will be referred to as the "second hold icon 9A," and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area will be referred to as the "third hold icon 9A." Furthermore, on the display screen 7a, the area in which the hold icon 9A is displayed will be referred to as the "hold area," and the area in which the variable icon 9C is displayed will be referred to as the "variable area." Also, the display screen 7b displays an information image IG saying "544 spins remaining." This indicates the number of spins (number of fluctuations) remaining until the ceiling is reached. The display screen 7b is arranged so as to overlap the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (B), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a miss mode. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L stops at a "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C stops at a "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R stops at a "2" symbol. In addition, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop. In addition, an information image IG stating "544 spins remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (C), the change start effect (first half) is executed. The change start effect (first half) is an effect that occurs before the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area changes from "white" to "green". The color of the hold icon is set in stages according to the expectation of a jackpot; for example, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. In addition, the information image on the display screen 7b has been updated to read "Congratulations". In other words, the appearance of the information image IG has changed. The change in the appearance of the information image IG is based on the expectation of a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (D), the change start effect (second half) is executed. The change start effect (second half) is an effect in which the first hold icon 9A, which has turned "green" in the hold area, moves to the change area and becomes the change icon 9C, and the effect pattern begins to change. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. An information image IG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed. The variable icon 9C is "green". In addition, an information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (F), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle presentation, a big win is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face off against each other. Note that during the battle presentation, the information image IG on display screen 7b is hidden, and the ally character CRA is displayed across display screen 7a and display screen 7b. In other words, display screen 7b displays an image covering the part of display screen 7a. This display of display screen 7b is continuous during the battle presentation, and the enemy character CRB may also be displayed on display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a jackpot has been confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB is rainbow. At this time, the ally character CRA and background image RB are displayed across both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In other words, even during the jackpot confirmation effect, the display screen 7b displays an image that covers the part of the display screen 7a. This display on the display screen 7b is continued during the jackpot confirmation effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 95 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears as soon as the fixed stop occurs. Nothing is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of special hold change effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pending change (state change) of the variable icon 9C at the start of the change of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed by changing the first pending icon 9A in the pending area, and then moving the changed first pending icon 9A to the variable area (Figures 93 (C) (D), 94 (C) (D), 95 (C) (D)). With this configuration, the pending change of the pending icon becomes noticeable, which can increase the interest in the game. Note that the variable icon 9C corresponds to the "variable icon" and the first pending icon 9A corresponds to the "reserved icon".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the appearance of the information image IG changes in accordance with the change in the reservation status of the first reservation icon 9A (Fig. 93(C), Fig. 94(C), Fig. 95(C)). This configuration makes the player feel a sense of anticipation for a big win, and increases the enjoyment of the game. Note that the information image IG corresponds to the "information image."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the appearance of the information image IG is changed by changing the black characters to white characters (FIGS. 93(C) and 94(C)). This configuration makes the change in the appearance of the information image IG more noticeable, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of rotations (number of fluctuations) until the ceiling is reached is used as the information image IG (FIGS. 93(A)-(E), 94(A)-(E), 95(A)(B)). With this configuration, since the information image IG contains useful information, changes in the appearance of the information image IG become noticeable, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information image IG is displayed on a display screen 7b separate from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 94(A)-(E), 95(A)-(E)). This configuration makes changes in the appearance of the information image IG stand out, increasing the interest in the game. Note that the display screen 7a corresponds to the "display screen," and the display screen 7b corresponds to the "separate display screen."

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the state of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation of a jackpot. According to this configuration, the change in the state of the information image IG can arouse a sense of expectation in the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Modification]
Below are some variations of the special hold change presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the information image IG indicates the number of rotations (number of variations) until the ceiling is reached, but the information image IG is not particularly limited. For example, it may be information that the player may visually recognize during play, such as the number of variations (number of games) from the jackpot, the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive wins, etc.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the display color of the variable icon 9C (first hold icon 9A) is changed. Alternatively, the shape of the variable icon 9C (first hold icon 9A) may be changed. For example, the variable icon 9C (first hold icon 9A) may be changed to a character icon of the theme of the gaming machine 1.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the change in the appearance of the information image IG is achieved by changing the black characters to white characters (FIGS. 93C and 94C). However, the change may be to any display color, such as blue, green, purple, red, or gold.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the appearance of the information image IG was changed based on the expectation of transition to a big win game. However, the appearance of the information image IG may be changed based on the expectation of transition to a small win game or the expectation of the type of big win in the case of a big win.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a variation of a pattern on a display screen, in which, before the pattern starts to vary, a reserved icon displayed in a reserved area of the display screen moves to the variable area of the display screen and becomes the variable icon, and the pattern starts to vary,
The change in the state of the variable icon accompanying the start of the change in the pattern is performed by changing the state of the reserved icon in the reserved area, and then moving the changed reserved icon to the variable area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The state of the information image displaying the predetermined information is changed in accordance with the timing of the change in the state of the hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2,
The change in the appearance of the information image is performed by changing the display color of the information image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2 or C2-3,
The information image is an image that displays information related to the variation of the pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-4,
the information image is an image displayed on a display screen separate from the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-5,
The change in the state of the information image is performed based on the expectation of transition to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-6,
The change in the state of the information image changes the predetermined information displayed by the information image, and can notify the player of the confirmation of a transition to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold expectation effects A to C are explained below using Figures 96 to 98. These hold expectation effects can be executed during the effect symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold expectation effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The hold expectation effects A to C are executed in a high probability high base state and a low probability high base state. Note that they can also be executed in a low probability low base state. Furthermore, in hold expectation effect B, the image display device 7 is assumed to have two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Holding expectations performance A]
Figure 96 is a diagram to explain the pending expectation presentation A.
First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first hold icon 9B," the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as the "second hold icon 9B," and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area is referred to as the "third hold icon 9B." The area in which the hold icon 9B is displayed is referred to as the "hold area," and the area in which the change icon 9C is displayed is referred to as the "change area."

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (B), hold change effect A is executed. Hold change effect A is an effect in which the hold icon 9B changes to an expectation icon that resembles an expectation image. Here, the state of the third hold icon 9B changes to an expectation icon that reads "Is it hot?" The expectation icon that reads "Is it hot?" means that it is unknown whether the bet is hot or not, and is a first state icon that reserves an indication of the expectation level.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (C), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed and stopped in a miss mode. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect pattern 8L slows down, and the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect pattern 8R slows down, and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C slows down, and the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops. Then, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped. Note that the order in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop is not limited to this. In addition, two or more of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop at the same time. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. Three hold icons 9B are also displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. One of these is an expectation icon (first mode icon) that reads "Is it hot?" The variable icon 9C disappears from view as soon as the fixed stop occurs.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (D), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. Two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. One of the hold icons 9B is an expectation icon (first mode icon) that reads "Is it hot?"

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (E), hold change effect B is executed. Hold change effect B is an effect in which the first mode expectation icon (first mode icon) changes to the second mode expectation icon (second mode icon). Here, the "Is it hot?" expectation icon (first mode icon) changes to the "hot" expectation icon (second mode icon). As the icon changes to the second mode icon, an expectation image MG that reads "hot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the expectation icon is composed of a reduced image of this expectation image MG. Specifically, it is composed of a reduced image of the character images "hot" and "hot".

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (F), an image movement effect is executed. The image movement effect is an effect in which the expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y. At this time, the expectation image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its appearance is changed. Specifically, the horizontally written "hot" changes to the vertically written "hot."

After that, after multiple fluctuations, the expectation icon (second mode icon) moves into the fluctuation area, and the fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in Figure 96 (G). The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have begun to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, the expectation icon (second mode icon) is displayed in the fluctuation area.

Next, as shown in Figure 96 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a jackpot mode. A jackpot mode is generally one in which the three effect symbols are the same (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols is the same). The identification information indicates the numbers that make up the effect symbols (the same applies below). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a confirmed "3" mode. The expectation icon (second mode icon) for the variable area disappears at the same time as the confirmed stop.

[Holding expectations performance B]
97 is a diagram for explaining the hold expectation effect B. In the hold expectation effect B, the screen display device 7 has a display screen 7a and a display screen 7b arranged adjacent to the lower right of the display screen 7a.
First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a change start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. Three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first hold icon 9B," the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as the "second hold icon 9B," and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area is referred to as the "third hold icon 9B." The area in which the hold icon 9B is displayed is referred to as the "hold area," and the area in which the change icon 9C is displayed is referred to as the "change area."

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (B), hold change effect A is executed on the display screen 7a. Hold change effect A is an effect in which the hold icon 9B changes to an expectation icon that resembles an expectation image. Here, the appearance of the third hold icon 9B has changed to an expectation icon that reads "Is it hot?" The expectation icon that reads "Is it hot?" means that it is unknown whether the bet is hot or not, and is a first-appearance icon that reserves an indication of the expectation level.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (C), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. The confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed and stopped in a miss mode. First, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect pattern 8L slows down, and the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect pattern 8R slows down, and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stops. Next, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect pattern 8C slows down, and the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops. Then, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped. Note that the order in which the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop is not limited to this. In addition, two or more of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily stop at the same time. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. Three hold icons 9B are also displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. One of these is an expectation icon (first mode icon) that reads "Is it hot?" The variable icon 9C disappears from view as soon as the fixed stop occurs.

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (D), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. One of the hold icons 9B is an expectation icon (first mode icon) that reads "Is it hot?"

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (E), hold change effect B is executed. Hold change effect B is an effect in which the first mode expectation icon (first mode icon) changes to the second mode expectation icon (second mode icon). Here, the "Is it hot?" expectation icon (first mode icon) changes to the "hot" expectation icon (second mode icon). As the icon changes to the second mode icon, an expectation image MG that reads "hot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the expectation icon includes a reduced image of this expectation image MG. Specifically, it includes a reduced image of the character images "hot" and "hot".

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (F), an image movement effect is executed. In the image movement effect, the expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y, and then displayed on the display device 7b. At this time, the expectation image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its appearance is changed. Specifically, the horizontally written "hot" changes to the vertically written "hot."

After that, after multiple fluctuations, the expectation icon (second mode icon) moves into the fluctuation area, and the fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in Figure 97 (G). The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to fluctuate. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have begun to fluctuate and are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of display screen 7a, the expectation icon (second mode icon) is displayed in the fluctuation area. Additionally, display screen 7b displays an expectation image MG that reads "hot."

Next, as shown in Figure 97 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the three effect symbols are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. The expectation icon (second state icon) for the variable area disappears at the same time as the fixed stop. In addition, an expectation image MG saying "hot" is displayed on the display screen 7b. Of course, the expectation image MG on the display screen 7b may be hidden in response to a fixed stop.

[Holding expectations performance C]
Figure 98 is a diagram to explain the hold expectation presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols begin to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change and are shown changing at high speed. Three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special symbol hold memory area 85b, respectively. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is referred to as the "first hold icon 9B," the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is referred to as the "second hold icon 9B," and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area is referred to as the "third hold icon 9B." The area in which the hold icon 9B is displayed is referred to as the "hold area," and the area in which the change icon 9C is displayed is referred to as the "change area."

Next, as shown in Figure 98 (B), an expectation image display effect is executed. The expectation image display effect is an effect in which an expectation image is displayed in a specified area of the display screen 7a. Here, an expectation image MG saying "hot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 98 (C), an image movement effect is executed. The image movement effect is an effect in which the expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen 7a as indicated by arrow Y. At this time, the expectation image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its appearance is changed. Specifically, the horizontally written "hot" changes to the vertically written "hot."

Next, as shown in Figure 98 (D), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol temporarily stops in a reach state. A reach state is generally an effect in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (more specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the "3" symbol. In addition, three hold icons 9A corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 98 (E), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins this battle performance, a jackpot is confirmed. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing off against each other.

Next, as shown in Figure 98 (F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB turns rainbow colored, notifying the player of the victory of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in Figure 98 (G), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed jackpot state. A jackpot state is generally one in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (more specifically, the identification information that makes up the effect symbols) are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop in a fixed "3" state. In addition, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears as soon as the fixed stop occurs.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the hold expectation presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an expectation image MG indicating the expectation of transition to a jackpot game is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 98(B)). Then, under this configuration, when changing the appearance of the reserve icon 9B displayed in the reserve area of the display screen 7a to indicate the expectation, the appearance of the reserve icon 9B is changed to an expectation icon imitating the expectation image MG (FIGS. 96(B)(E), 97(B)(E)). With this configuration, the reserve icon changes to an expectation icon imitating the expectation image, which can surprise the player and increase their interest in the game.

Note that a jackpot game corresponds to a "profitable game state," the expectation image MG corresponds to an "expectation image," and the central area of the display screen 7a where the expectation image MG is displayed corresponds to a "predetermined area."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation icon includes an image that is a reduced version of the character images "hot" and "good" in the expectation image MG (Figs. 96(B)(E), 97(B)(E)). This configuration makes it easy to understand that the expectation icon indicates the expectation level in the same way as the expectation image, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there is a first mode expectation icon "Hot?" which reserves a suggestion of the expectation level, and a second mode expectation icon "Hot" which suggests the expectation level (Figs. 96(B)(E), 97(B)(E)). With this configuration, the player will expect the first mode expectation icon to change to the second mode expectation icon, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the expectation icon of the first mode changes to the expectation icon of the second mode, an expectation image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 96(E), FIG. 97(E)). According to this configuration, the display of the expectation image MG in addition to the change in the icon is likely to increase the player's expectations, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved to another area (FIGS. 96(F), 97(F), 98(C)). With this configuration, compared to when the expectation image MG is simply displayed, the player is more likely to focus on the expectation image MG, and the prominent expectation image MG can create a greater sense of expectation in the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation image MG is moved to and displayed on a display screen 7b separate from the display screen 7a (FIG. 97(F)). With this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will focus on the expectation image MG, and the prominent expectation image MG can further heighten the player's sense of anticipation and increase their interest in the game. Furthermore, by displaying it on a separate display screen 7b, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game without interfering with the presentation of the display screen 7a. Note that the display screen 7a corresponds to the "display screen," and the display screen 7b corresponds to the "separate display screen."

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the expectation image MG is displayed in a different area, it is changed to a different form from when it is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the horizontally written "hot" is changed to a vertically written "hot." This configuration makes it possible to realize an effect that effectively utilizes the area of the display screen 7a (7b), thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the hold expectation presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expectation image MG that is displayed in a moving image movement effect is not displayed in subsequent effects (FIGS. 96(F)-(H), 98(C)-(G)). In contrast, the expectation image MG that is displayed in a moving image may be continuously displayed until the change in the corresponding reserved memory is completed. Of course, it may also be temporarily hidden while the corresponding reserved memory is changing.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b are arranged adjacent to each other, but the display screens 7a and 7b may be arranged apart from each other. Also, the display screen 7b may be arranged so as to overlap the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 is described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but the same effect may be achieved using the sub-display screen 64.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying an expectation image in a predetermined area of a display screen, the expectation image indicating the expectation of a transition to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player,
When indicating the degree of expectation by changing the state of the hold icon displayed in the hold area of the display screen, it is possible to change the state of the hold icon to an expectation icon that imitates the expectation image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
the expectation icon includes a reduced image obtained by reducing at least a part of the expectation image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or C3-2,
The expectation degree icon includes a first mode icon that reserves a suggestion of the expectation degree, and a second mode icon that suggests the expectation degree.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3,
After the hold icon changes to the first mode icon, when the first mode icon changes to the second mode icon, the expectation degree image is displayed in the predetermined area of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-4,
the expectation degree image displayed in the predetermined area of the display screen is then moved to an area different from the predetermined area and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
the other area is set on a display screen different from the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5 or C3-6,
When the expectation degree image is displayed in the separate area, the expectation degree image is changed to a different state from when the expectation degree image is displayed in the predetermined area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operating means operation status notification effects A to C are explained below using Figures 99 to 101. These operating means operation status notification effects are executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an operating means operation status notification effect, it reads corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and on the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and top sub-display screen 64U). It also reads corresponding sound data from ROM 103 and outputs sound from the speaker 67.

[Operation Means Operation Status Notification Rendering A]
99 is a diagram illustrating the operation means operation status notification effect A. The display screen 7a and the state of the effect button 63 are shown in FIG. 99. The operation means operation status notification effect is an effect in which a predetermined notification is given to the player when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed while the effect button 63 is operated. The effect button 63 can be changed between a first state (a protruding state) when not operated (pressed) by the player and a second state (a state in which the protruding amount is reduced or a state in which the button is not protruding) when operated (pressed), and is maintained in the first state by the force of an internal spring when not operated (pressed) by the player.

In image reversal expectation indication effect A, first, as shown in Figure 99 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a. The effect button 63 is in an OFF state, not being operated (pressed) by the player.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the static display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state) and special symbol 1 variation is being executed. Also, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in Figure 99(A), when the display screen 7a is not prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (outside the valid operation period), as shown in Figure 99(B), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 will begin counting. This counter is intended to alert the player to unintentional operation.

When a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed while the player is operating (pressing) the effect button 63 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in Figure 99(C), a character image of a black human silhouette is displayed on the display screen 7a, along with a text image that reads "Oi oi oi." Then, as shown in Figure 99(D), an enlarged version of the character image and a text image that reads "How long are you holding down the button?" are displayed. In other words, the text image indicates that the effect button 63 has been operated (pressed). This makes it possible to notify the player if, for example, the player has unintentionally pressed the effect button 63.

Figure 99 (E) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification in Figure 99 (D). When the player stops pressing (applying force to) the effect button 63, the character image and the text image "How long are you going to keep pressing the button?" disappear. The timing at which the character image and text image disappear may be immediately after it is detected that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has passed since detection.

After that, as shown in Figure 99 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a are displayed as still symbols. In this case, they are displayed as a missing number "567".

When the next special symbol change begins after the special symbol change that ended in Figure 99 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 99 (G). If the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again when the display screen 7a is not prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (outside the valid operation period), the counter (not shown) will start counting again.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed while the player is operating (pressing) the effect button 63 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), a black human silhouette character image will again be displayed on the display screen 7a, along with the text image "Oi oi oi" as shown in Figure 99 (H).

After that, as shown in Figure 99(I), an enlarged character image and the text image "Are you holding it down again?" are displayed. In other words, the text image indicates that the effect button 63 has been operated (pressed) again. This is because the effect button 63 was pressed twice for a predetermined period of time when the player was not being prompted to operate the effect button 63 (outside of the valid operation period). In this case, because the effect button 63 was operated twice consecutively, during the previous change and the current change, after the text image "Hey hey hey," the text image "Are you holding it down again?" in Figure 99(I) is displayed instead of the text image "How long are you holding down the button?" in Figure 99(D). Note that if the effect button 63 is operated again within a predetermined number of changes (e.g., five times) after the first display of the text image "How long are you holding down the button?", the text image "Are you holding it down again?" is displayed.

If a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has passed since the text image "Pressing it again?" was displayed and the player is still operating (pressing) the effect button 63 (maintaining the pressed state), the content of the text image will change, as shown in Figure 99 (J). Here, the text image switches (changes) from "Pressing it again?" to "Let go of the button!". Here, because it is highly likely that the player is intentionally pressing the effect button 63, the text image switches to a stronger expression to encourage the player to stop pressing the effect button 63.

Figure 99 (K) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification in Figure 99 (J). When the player stops pressing (applying force to) the effect button 63, the character image continues to be displayed, but the content of the text image changes. Here, the text image changes from "Take your hands off the button!" to "Yes. Well done." Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the text image "Yes. Well done" was displayed, both the character image and the text image disappear.

On the other hand, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again in the state shown in Figure 99 (K), a character image and an image of the text "Oi oi oi" will be displayed immediately after the operation. In this case, it is highly likely that the player is intentionally pressing the effect button 63, and a comment is being made.

[Operation Means Operation Status Notification Rendering B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating the operation means operation status notification effect B. FIG. 100 shows the display screen 7a and the state of the effect button 63. The operation means operation status notification effect is an effect that provides a predetermined notification to the player when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed while the effect button 63 is operated. The effect button 63 can be changed between a first state (protruding state) when not operated (pressed) by the player and a second state (reduced protrusion state or no protrusion state) when operated (pressed), and is maintained in the first state by the force of an internal spring when not operated (pressed) by the player.

In image reversal expectation indication effect B, first, as shown in Figure 100 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a. The effect button 63 is in an OFF state, not being operated (pressed) by the player.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the static display of the set of patterns announces the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state) and special pattern 1 variation is being executed. Also, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in Figure 100(A), when the display screen 7a is not prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (outside the valid operation period), as shown in Figure 100(B), if the player operates (presses, turns ON) the effect button 63, a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 will begin counting. This counter is intended to alert the player to unintentional operation.

As shown in Figure 100(B), if the player releases (stops pressing) the effect button 63 while operating (pressing) it before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed (before the counter reaches a predetermined value), the counter will stop counting and the counter value will be reset. Thereafter, if the player is not prompted to operate the effect button 63 (outside the valid operation period), as shown in Figure 100(D), and the player operates (presses, turns ON) the effect button 63 again, the counter will start counting again.

When a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed while the player is operating (pressing) the effect button 63 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), a character image of a black human silhouette is displayed on the display screen 7a, along with the text image "Oi oi oi" as shown in Figure 100 (E). This allows the player to be notified if, for example, the player has unintentionally pressed the effect button 63. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed frozen at "2".

Figure 100 (F) shows the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification in Figure 100 (E). When the player stops pressing (applying force to) the effect button 63, the character image and the "Oi Oi Oi" text image disappear. The timing for the character image and text image to disappear may be immediately after it is detected that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds) has passed since detection. Note that if the player continues to press the effect button 63 without stopping, the character image and text image in Figure 99 (D) of the image reversal expectation indication effect A are displayed. In Figure 100 (F), the right decorative pattern 8R is also displayed stopped at "2", indicating a reach state.

In Figure 100 (G), in the "2↓2" reach state, the button image BTN, an operation prompt image RND consisting of the words "Press it!!", and a timer bar image TBI indicating the valid operation period are displayed. Here, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63 (valid operation period). At this time, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player, the counter does not start counting. This is because the operation of the effect button 63 is performed at the appropriate time, so there is no need to warn against unintended operation.

After that, as shown in Figure 100 (H), if the effect progresses by operating the effect button 63 during the valid operation period, that is, if the player continues to press the effect button 63 without releasing their hand after the valid operation period has ended, a counter (not shown) will start counting again.

When a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed while the player is operating (pressing) the effect button 63 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in Figure 100(I), a character image of a black human silhouette is again displayed on the display screen 7a, along with the text image "Oi Oi Oi." Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped "3," and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a stopped "232" losing combination.

When the next special symbol change begins after the special symbol change that ended in Figure 100 (I), as shown in Figure 100 (J), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. If the player continues to press the effect button 63 at this time, the character image and the "Oi Oi Oi" text image will continue to be displayed, and then the character image and text image of the image reversal expectation indication effect A in Figure 99 (D) will be displayed. On the other hand, if the player stops pressing the effect button 63, the character image and the "Oi Oi Oi" text image will disappear as shown in Figure 100 (J). The timing at which the character image and text image disappear may be immediately after it is detected that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has passed since detection.

After that, as shown in Figure 100(K), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating, the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a, and if the player begins operating (pressing) the effect button 63 just before the valid operation period begins, the counter will start counting. This is because even though it is just before the valid operation period, it is still outside the valid operation period. After that, as shown in Figure 100(L), in addition to the button image BTN, a timer bar image TBI is displayed, and once the valid operation period begins, the counter will stop counting and the count value will be reset, even if the player continues to operate (press) the effect button 63.

[Operation Means Operation Status Notification Rendering C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating the operation means operation status notification effect C. (A) to (F) of FIG. 101 show the state of the left sub-display screen 64L and the sword 65. (G) to (L) of FIG. 101 show the state of the left sub-display screen 64L and the select button 68. The operation means operation status notification effect is an effect that provides a predetermined notification to the player when a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed while operating an operation unit such as the sword 65 or the select button 68. The sword 65 can be changed between a first state (protruding state) in which it is not pushed downward by the player and a second state (a state in which it is pushed downward less) in which it is pushed downward. When it is not pushed downward by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of an internal spring. The select button 68 can be changed between a first state (protruding state) when not operated (pressed) by the player, and a second state (reduced protrusion or not protruding state) when operated (pressed), and is maintained in the first state by the force of an internal spring when not operated (pressed) by the player.

In image reversal expectation indication effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), nothing is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and the sword component 65 is in a state (OFF) where it has not been operated (pushed downward) by the player. The left sub-display screen 64L may display at least a portion of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, or may display a function display image of the gaming machine 1, a hold icon 9A, a change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C, etc. Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state), and a special symbol 1 change is being executed.

From the state shown in Figure 101(A), when the player is not being prompted to operate the sword member 65 (outside the valid operation period), as shown in Figure 101(B), if the player operates the sword member 65 (pushes it downward, turns it ON), a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 will begin counting. This counter is intended to alert the player to unintentional operation.

When a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed (the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player is operating (pushing) the sword member 65, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a text image saying "The sword is being pushed in" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the sword member 65 is positioned are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, the text image indicates that the sword member 65 is being operated (pushed downward). This makes it possible to notify the player if, for example, the player is unintentionally pushing the sword member 65 in.

Figure 101 (D) shows the left sub-display screen 64L when the player stops pushing the sword member 65 after the notification in Figure 101 (C). When the player stops pushing (applying force) the sword member 65, the text image "Sword is being pushed in" and the arrow image disappear. The timing at which the text image and arrow image disappear may be immediately after it is detected that the player has stopped pushing the sword member 65, or after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the detection.

After that, as shown in Figure 101 (E), if the player operates the sword 65 again (pushes it downward) while the player is not being prompted to operate the sword 65 (outside the valid operation period), the counter (not shown) will start counting again.

When a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed while the player is operating (pushing downward) the sword 65 (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in Figure 101(F), the text image "So, do not push the sword in" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the sword 65 is positioned are again displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, the text image indicates that the sword 65 has been operated (pushed downward) again. This is because the sword 65 was pressed twice for a predetermined period of time when the player was not being prompted to operate the sword 65 (outside the valid operation period). In this case, because the sword 65 was operated twice consecutively in the same variation, the text image "So, do not push the sword in" shown in Figure 101(F) is displayed instead of the text image "The sword is being pushed in" shown in Figure 101(C). Furthermore, if the sword component 65 is operated again within a predetermined number of movements (e.g., five times) after the text image "The sword is being pushed in" is displayed for the first time, a text image "So, do not push the sword in" will be displayed.

As shown in Figure 101(G), after Figure 101(F), if the player stops operating the sword member 65 and presses the right side of the select button 68, the text image "So don't push the sword in" and the arrow image will disappear, and the counter will start counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the sword member 65 is operated.

When a player operates (long presses) the right select button 68 for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in Figure 101 (H), a text image stating "The right select button is being pressed" and an arrow image pointing in the direction of the select button 68 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, the text image indicates that the right select button 68 is being operated (long press). This makes it possible to notify the player if, for example, the player unintentionally presses and holds the right select button 68.

As shown in Figure 101 (I), after Figure 101 (H), if the player stops pressing the right select button 68 and instead presses the left and bottom select button 68, the text image "The right select button is being pressed" and the arrow image will disappear, and the counter will start counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the right select button 68 is pressed.

When a player operates (holds down) the left and bottom select buttons 68 for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in Figure 101 (J), a text image stating "The left and bottom select buttons are being pressed" and an arrow image pointing in the direction of the select button 68 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, the text image indicates that the left and bottom select buttons 68 are being operated (held down). This makes it possible to notify the player if, for example, the player unintentionally holds down the left and bottom select buttons 68.

As shown in Figure 101(K), after Figure 101(J), if the player stops pressing the left and bottom select buttons 68 and instead presses the top select button 68, the text image "The left and bottom select buttons are being pressed" and the arrow image will disappear, and the counter will start counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the left and bottom select buttons 68 are pressed.

When a player operates (holds down) the top of the select button 68 for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (when the counter reaches a predetermined value), as shown in Figure 101 (L), a text image saying "The top of the select button is being pressed" and an arrow image pointing in the direction of the select button 68 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. In other words, the text image indicates that the top of the select button 68 has been operated (held down). This makes it possible to notify the player if, for example, the player unintentionally holds down the top of the select button 68.

[Example of effect]
Examples of the effects of the operation means operation state notification presentation are shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIG. 99 , the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a presentation button 63 that can be changed by a player from a first state (protruding state) to a second state (non-protruding state). The presentation button 63 is in the first state when no force is applied by the player. When the player maintains the presentation button 63 in the second state for a predetermined period of time, a predetermined notification is issued to the player. This configuration prevents the presentation executed by the gaming machine from being unintended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, thereby enhancing the game's enjoyment. For example, if the presentation button 63 is unintendedly operated outside of the valid operation period, the presentation may progress quickly when the valid operation period begins, leaving the player confused as to what has happened. This configuration prevents such a situation from occurring. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101 .
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 99, when a player holds the effect button 63 in the second state for a predetermined period of time, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a. This configuration can prevent the effects executed by the gaming machine from being different from the intended effects due to unintended operations or operating states by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest. The same applies to Figs. 100 and 101.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 99, after a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a, when the player returns the effect button 63 to the first state, the display of the predetermined image disappears from the display screen 7a. This configuration can prevent problems such as the original effect being obscured by the predetermined image after an unintended operation or operation state by the player is resolved, thereby improving entertainment value. The same applies to Figs. 100 and 101.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 99, if the player continues to hold the effect button 63 in the second state after a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the content of the predetermined image changes. With this configuration, when there is a high possibility that the player is intentionally operating the effect button 63 outside of the valid operation period of the effect button 63, a message according to that state can be displayed. This prevents the effect executed by the gaming machine from being unintended, thereby increasing the player's interest. The same applies to Figures 100 and 101.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 99, the predetermined image indicates that the effect button 63 is in the second state. This configuration makes it easier for the player to notice when he or she is performing an unintended operation. This prevents the effects executed by the gaming machine from being unintended, thereby increasing the player's interest. The same applies to Figs. 100 and 101.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed while the player keeps the effect button 63 in the second state, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 67. This configuration can prevent the effects executed by the gaming machine from not being as intended due to unintended operations or operating states by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the operation means operation state notification presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means operation state notification presentation A, the changes in Figures 99(G) to (L) have been described as the changes following the changes in Figures 99(A) to (F). However, the changes in Figures 99(G) to (L) do not have to be the changes following the changes in Figures 99(A) to (F), and may be changes within a predetermined number of changes in Figures 99(G) to (L).

[Modification 2]
In the operation means operation status notification effects A to C, the portions displayed as text images may be output as sound from the speaker 67. For example, "Hey hey hey" in FIG. 99(C) or "How long have you been pressing the button?" in FIG. 99(D) may be output as sound from the speaker 67. Even in this case, the player can be notified accordingly. Furthermore, in conjunction with the display of text images on the display screen 7a or the left sub-display screen 64L, the same content may be output as sound from the speaker 67.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine having a movable part whose state can be changed from a first state to a second state by a player,
the movable part is in the first state when no force is applied by a player,
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed while the player has maintained the movable part in the second state, a predetermined notification is given to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1, further comprising:
The device is provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed while the player is maintaining the movable portion in the second state, a predetermined image is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
After the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, when the player returns the movable part to the first state, the display of the predetermined image disappears from the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-2 or D1-3,
a game machine characterized in that, after the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, if the player continues to maintain the movable part in the second state, the content of the predetermined image changes.
◇[Aspect D1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-2 to D1-4,
The predetermined image suggests that the movable part is in a second state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1, further comprising:
It is provided with a sound output means,
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed while the player is maintaining the movable part in the second state, a predetermined sound is output from the sound output means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Load-applying effects A to C are explained below using Figures 102 to 104. In Figures 102 to 104, the first movable device 14 and second movable device 15, which are arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, have been omitted for clarity.

This load-imparting effect can be achieved by applying a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63 in both the left-hand and right-hand game states, thereby transmitting the vibration of the effect button 63 as a load to the palm of the player's hand touching the top surface of the effect button 63. Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a load-imparting effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, the relay board 108 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a load-imparting effect is included, it outputs a signal to a vibration motor located inside the effect button 63, driving it to generate a predetermined vibration in the effect button 63, and also outputs a signal to a decorative board mounted with multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, located inside the effect button 63, driving the multiple full-color LEDs to cause the effect button 63 to emit a predetermined light. The load-applying effect is not performed as one of the so-called pre-reading effects, but rather the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the load-applying effect during the effect.

The various background images used in the decorative pattern change presentation (change display) correspond to the presentation modes described below, and include, for example, a background image that resembles the sun, a background image that resembles clouds, a background image that resembles rain, and a background image that resembles snow. These various background images may be still images or videos. In this example, a video is used as the background image.

Here, we will first explain stress-imposing effect A, then stress-imposing effect B, and finally stress-imposing effect C.

[Load imposition effect A]
First, the load-imparting effect A will be described with reference to Figure 102. Figure 102 is a diagram for explaining the load-imparting effect A. The load-imparting effect A can be implemented by applying a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63 in a gaming state of right-hitting, and the vibration of the effect button 63 is applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player touching the top surface of the effect button 63. The gaming state of right-hitting can include a state in which a time-saving game mode has been entered after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state in which a game mode has been entered into the so-called b-time-saving mode (play time).

In this embodiment, load-imparting effect A is triggered when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21, and is triggered in a gaming state known as a right-hand hit. In this right-hand hit gaming state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," and the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the top right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, where small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green)) and does not change to other colors. Because the sub-variable area is located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area as the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other display images appear, the other display images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and are not obstructed by the other display images. The sub-variable area is also located to the right of the fourth reserved display position (described below), and does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. It is also possible to not have a background image in the sub-variable area, in which case the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or they may be displayed in the same vertical line in the same order from top to bottom in the same order: small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserve icons, as shown in Figure 102 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 102 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the second special chart reserve is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserve display area is provided for the second special chart reserve. In this second reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserve display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, when a specific effect known as a super reach battle effect is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are made to disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd through the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icons are present at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 from this point onwards.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers, which represent the number of reserved balls, are displayed numerically, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the front of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L and other images positioned behind the front (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is in progress or when the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images, so they are always visible even during the load-applying performance A.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

Briefly, the reserved icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons") represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery, depending on their shape and color. For example, of the six icons—yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the green spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that a smiling spherical icon may be used instead of the green spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest chance of winning, the purple sphere icon has the second highest chance of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest chance of winning, the red sphere icon has the fourth highest chance of winning, the blue sphere icon has the fifth highest chance of winning, and the white sphere icon has the lowest chance of winning.

A display mode selection section SEL, which allows the user to select a presentation mode, is located and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, above the arrangement of the numbers (blue numbers) representing the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the number (red numbers) representing the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21. The presentation mode selection section SEL displays presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode as the reels rotate. Each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that reaches the specific region SELa as the reels rotate is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific region SELa is the selected presentation mode. In this embodiment, B mode is selected, and the theme image of B mode (in this case, a cloud-like image) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown.

The period during which the presentation mode can be selected includes not only the period during which the decorative symbols are displayed statically, but also the period during which, as the decorative symbols begin to change, a message saying "Change mode with presentation button" is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., above the presentation mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the presentation mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63. Load-imposing presentation A is performed after the period during which the presentation mode can be selected has elapsed. In other words, once load-imposing presentation A is performed, it is no longer possible to select a presentation mode, but the presentation mode selected before load-imposing presentation A is continued in load-imposing presentation A.

Although the presentation mode selection unit SEL overlaps with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are displayed behind the forefront (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, the presentation mode selection unit SEL remains visible even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) has ended, and its visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images, so that it can be seen even during the load-imposing display A. When a specific display, a battle display, which is a super reach, is displayed and initiated on the display screen 7a, the presentation mode selection unit SEL is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Additionally, if the performance mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore in the various performances being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a "sun"-themed effect is played, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun." When A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, A mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL moves downward, causing D mode, located below A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, located above A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to bottom toward the specific area SELa.

In B mode, a "cloud"-themed effect is presented, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image resembling "clouds." When B mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, B mode, which is positioned in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, moves downward, causing A mode, which is positioned below B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and C mode, which is positioned above B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area SELa.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is performed, and a background image and various presentation images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "rain." When C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the presentation mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63, C mode located in the specific area SELa of the presentation mode selection unit SEL moves downward, causing B mode, located below C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode, located above C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to bottom toward the specific area SELa.

In D mode, a "snow"-themed effect is presented, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a "snow" themed image. When the player operates (presses) effect button 63 while D mode is located in specific area SELa of effect mode selection section SEL, D mode located in specific area SELa of effect mode selection section SEL moves downward, causing C mode located below D mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward specific area SELa, and A mode is once again displayed in specific area SELa.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes, in the three presentation modes excluding A mode, namely B mode, C mode, and D mode, there is only one type of load application (load application mode) (hereinafter referred to as a "single load application mode"), and this single load application mode may be performed. In contrast, in one presentation mode (single presentation mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (load application mode) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"), and any one of these multiple load application modes may be selected and performed. In the load application presentation A in this embodiment, B mode is selected, and a single load application mode is performed.

Here, we will briefly explain the single load application mode and the multiple load application mode. The single load application mode only includes the normal load application mode, in which a "bu" sound is applied to the effect button 63. In contrast, the multiple load application modes include a first specific time load application mode in which an ippon-jime vibration is applied to the effect button 63 in the manner of "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," and "bu," a second specific time load application mode in which an ippon-jime vibration is applied three times in the manner of a san-bon-jime vibration, a third specific time load application mode in which a 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied in the manner of "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," and "bu-bu-bu-bu-bu-bu," a fourth specific time load application mode in which a vibration with a gradually increasing frequency (the frequency of vibrations increases by one each time) is applied in the manner of "bu," "bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu-bu," and "bu-bu-bu-bu-bu," and a fifth specific time load application mode in which a long vibration is applied in the manner of "booooooooooooo" (for example, a long vibration is applied for 30 seconds).

Note that the expected probability of winning during the corresponding fluctuation is preset for each single load-applying mode and each multiple load-applying mode. The expected probability of winning for the single load-applying mode (Ipponjime vibration) is preset to the white spherical icon described above. Of the multiple load-applying modes, the third specific-time load-applying mode (3-3-7 beat vibration) is preset to the yellow (gold) star icon described above, the fourth specific-time load-applying mode (vibration with gradually increasing vibration count (increasing by one vibration count)) is preset to the purple spherical icon described above, the second specific-time load-applying mode (Sanbonjime vibration) is preset to the red spherical icon described above, the first specific-time load-applying mode (Ipponjime vibration) is preset to the green spherical icon described above, and the fifth specific-time load-applying mode (long vibration) is preset to the white spherical icon described above. For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (3-3-7 beat vibration) has the highest expectation of a win, the fourth specific time load application mode (vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one each time)) has the second highest expectation of a win, the second specific time load application mode (sanbonjime vibration) has the third highest expectation of a win, the first specific time load application mode (ipponjime vibration) has the fourth highest expectation of a win, and the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) and single load application mode (ipponjime vibration) have the lowest expectation of a win.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, above the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed), a load-imposing execution permission selection section FG is displayed, indicating whether or not execution of load-imposing effect A is permitted. If execution of load-imposing effect A is permitted, an image "LOAD ON" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG, whereas if execution of load-imposing effect A is not permitted, an image "LOAD OFF" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG. In this embodiment, execution of load-imposing effect A is permitted, and an image "LOAD ON" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG. The period during which the execution of Load Imposing Effect A can be selected is the same as the period during which the execution mode can be selected, described above. In addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are displayed statically, once the decorative symbols start to change, the message "Change mode with effect button" is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., above the effect mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the execution mode can be changed by operating (pressing) effect button 63. During this period, each time select button 68, which is different from effect button 63, is operated, the user can alternate between allowing execution of Load Imposing Effect A and not allowing execution of Load Imposing Effect A (prohibiting execution of Load Imposing Effect A).

Although the load-granting execution permission selection section FG overlaps with the change area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the right decorative pattern 8R and other images displayed behind the forefront (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so that its visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images. In other words, the load-granting execution permission selection section FG remains visible even when the decorative pattern change display (change display) is in progress or when the decorative pattern change display (change display) has ended, and its visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images, so that it can be seen even during the load-granting effect A. When a specific effect, a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed and initiated on the display screen 7a, the load-granting execution permission selection section FG is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Additionally, if the load assignment execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in the various effects being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In the right-hand play mode, load-imposing effect A may begin. As shown in Figure 102 (A), when the decorative pattern variation effect (variation display) ends, the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are displayed as still symbols, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button 63 is not vibrating and is turned off.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins, as shown in Figure 102 (B), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. This results in two hold icons being stocked.

Next, the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state and begin to change rapidly. As shown in Figure 102 (C), the rapidly changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R then slow down in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and middle decorative pattern 8C, changing from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2," the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," after which the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the lose is confirmed. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed stopped (simultaneously), and a miss is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that in the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) in Figures 102(B) and (C), the effect button 63 is not vibrating, and the effect button 63 is unlit.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a decorative pattern change effect (variable display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change simultaneously from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a rapidly changing display mode. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd begins to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd also begins to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the second hold display position through the fourth hold display position. This results in one hold icon being stocked. In addition, during the decorative pattern change effect (change display) in Figure 102 (D), the effect button 63 is not vibrating and is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become translucent and change rapidly in their display mode, and then Load-imparting effect A begins. In this embodiment, as described above, B mode is selected. Therefore, a single load-imparting mode performed in B mode, C mode, and D mode is performed as Load-imparting effect A. When Load-imparting effect A begins, a single vibration is imparted to effect button 63, and when effect button 63 begins to change from a non-vibration mode to a normal load-imparting mode, effect button 63 vibrates with a "bub" sound. This vibration of effect button 63 can be imparted (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of effect button 63. In load application effect A, before the Iccho-jime vibration is applied to the effect button 63 (or immediately before or at the same time as applying the Iccho-jime vibration to the effect button 63), the effect button 63 is set to a predetermined light-emitting mode (here, white flashing as the light-emitting mode corresponding to the normal load-application mode), and this predetermined light-emitting mode is maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 ends. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load application effect A ends.

When Load-Giving Performance A ends, as shown in Figure 102(F), the rapidly fluctuating left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R slow down in the order of left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative pattern 8R, and center decorative pattern 8C, changing from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2," and the center decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," after which the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "3," the center decorative pattern 8C is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a stopped number "2," and a loss is confirmed. In other words, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all simultaneously displayed as stopped numbers, and a loss is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that in the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) in Figure 102 (F), with the end of load-applying effect A, no vibration is generated in the effect button 63, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) begins, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates rapidly. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd, no hold icons 9B are placed at the first hold display position through the fourth hold display position. This results in a state where no hold icons are stocked at all.

Incidentally, since some players prefer to activate the effect button 63 and others dislike it, players can set or cancel the prohibition of activation of the effect button 63 by pressing the select button 68 during the demo effect while waiting for customers or while playing.

Furthermore, the load-imposing effect A is executed only when the prohibition on the activation of the effect button 63 is lifted. In other words, if the prohibition on the activation of the effect button 63 is lifted, the load-imposing effect A is not executed at all. In contrast, the multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, located inside the effect button 63, are driven in accordance with the progress of the effect, regardless of whether the prohibition on the activation of the effect button 63 is lifted, so that the effect button 63 can be illuminated in a predetermined manner to indicate the likelihood of a win. For example, in FIG. 102(E), regardless of whether the prohibition on the activation of the effect button 63 is lifted, the effect button 63 flashes white, which is the illumination mode corresponding to the normal load-imposing mode. As a result, although some players prefer to activate the effect button 63 and others dislike it, the predetermined illumination mode of the effect button 63 can indicate the likelihood of a win. Therefore, even if the prohibition on the activation of the effect button 63 is lifted, preventing the player from executing the load-imposing effect A, the effect button 63 can be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The predetermined light patterns include white, blue, green, red, purple, golden (yellow), and rainbow lights, with the likelihood of a win increasing in the following order: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). In addition to the individual colors, there are also flashing colors: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). The likelihood of a win increases in the following order: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). Note that the likelihood of a win for each flashing color is generally higher than for each individual color. For example, while white flashing has a higher likelihood of winning than white, it has a lower likelihood of winning than blue, which has the second-highest likelihood of winning. The same is true for other flashing colors, except that rainbow flashing has the same likelihood of winning (high probability of winning) as rainbow flashing.

[Load imposition effect B]
Next, the load-imparting effect B will be described with reference to Figure 103. Figure 103 is a diagram for explaining the load-imparting effect B. The load-imparting effect B can be implemented by applying a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63 in a gaming state of right-hitting, and the vibration of the effect button 63 is applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player touching the top surface of the effect button 63. The gaming state of right-hitting can include a state in which a time-saving game mode has been entered after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state in which a game mode has been entered into a so-called time-saving b mode (play time).

In this embodiment, load-imparting effect B is triggered when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21, and is triggered in a gaming state known as a right-hand hit. In this right-hand hit gaming state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," and the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the top right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, where small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green)) and does not change to other colors. Because the sub-variable area is located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area as the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other display images appear, the other display images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and are not obstructed by the other display images. The sub-variable area is also located to the right of the fourth reserved display position (described below), and does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. It is also possible to not have a background image in the sub-variable area, in which case the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the fonts of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or they may be displayed in the same vertical line in the same order from top to bottom in the same order: small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserve icons, as shown in Figure 103 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 103 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the second special chart reserve is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserve display area is provided for the second special chart reserve. In this second reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserve display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, when a specific effect known as a super reach battle effect is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are made to disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd through the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icons are present at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 from this point onwards.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers, which represent the number of reserved balls, are displayed numerically, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the front of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L and other images positioned behind the front (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is in progress or when the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images, so they are always visible, even during the load-applying performance B.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

Briefly, the reserved icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons") represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery, depending on their shape and color. For example, of the six icons—yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the green spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that a smiling spherical icon may be used instead of the green spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest chance of winning, the purple sphere icon has the second highest chance of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest chance of winning, the red sphere icon has the fourth highest chance of winning, the blue sphere icon has the fifth highest chance of winning, and the white sphere icon has the lowest chance of winning.

A display mode selection section SEL, which allows the user to select a presentation mode, is located and displayed above the arrangement of the numbers (blue numbers) representing the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display mode selection section SEL displays presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode as the reels rotate. Each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that reaches the specific region SELa as the reels rotate is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific region SELa is the selected presentation mode. In this embodiment, A mode is selected, and the theme image of A mode (here, a "sun" image) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown.

The period during which the presentation mode can be selected includes not only the period during which the decorative symbols are displayed statically, but also the period during which, as the decorative symbols begin to change, a message saying "Change mode with presentation button" is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., above the presentation mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the presentation mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63. The load-imposing presentation B is performed after the period during which the presentation mode can be selected has elapsed. In other words, once the load-imposing presentation B is performed, it is no longer possible to select the presentation mode, but the presentation mode selected before the load-imposing presentation B is continued in the load-imposing presentation B.

Although the presentation mode selection unit SEL overlaps with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are displayed behind the forefront (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, the presentation mode selection unit SEL remains visible even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) has ended, and its visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images, so that it can be seen even during the load-imposing display B. When a specific display, a battle display, which is a super reach, is displayed and initiated on the display screen 7a, the presentation mode selection unit SEL is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Additionally, if the performance mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore in the various performances being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a "sun"-themed effect is played, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun." When A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, A mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL moves downward, causing D mode, located below A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, located above A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to bottom toward the specific area SELa.

In B mode, a "cloud"-themed effect is presented, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image resembling "clouds." When B mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, B mode, which is positioned in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, moves downward, causing A mode, which is positioned below B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and C mode, which is positioned above B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area SELa.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is performed, and a background image and various presentation images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "rain." When C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the presentation mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63, C mode located in the specific area SELa of the presentation mode selection unit SEL moves downward, causing B mode, located below C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode, located above C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to bottom toward the specific area SELa.

In D mode, a "snow"-themed effect is presented, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a "snow" themed image. When the player operates (presses) effect button 63 while D mode is located in specific area SELa of effect mode selection section SEL, D mode located in specific area SELa of effect mode selection section SEL moves downward, causing C mode located below D mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward specific area SELa, and A mode is once again displayed in specific area SELa.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes, the three presentation modes excluding A mode, namely B mode, C mode, and D mode, have only one type of load application (load application mode) (hereinafter referred to as a "single load application mode"), and this single load application mode may be performed. In contrast, in one presentation mode (single presentation mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (load application mode) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"), and any one of these multiple load application modes may be selected and performed. In the load application presentation B in this embodiment, A mode is selected, and any one of the multiple load application modes is selected and performed.

Here, we will briefly explain the single load application mode and the multiple load application mode. The single load application mode only includes the normal load application mode, in which a "bu" sound is applied to the effect button 63. In contrast, the multiple load application modes include a first specific time load application mode in which an ippon-jime vibration is applied to the effect button 63 in the manner of "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," and "bu," a second specific time load application mode in which an ippon-jime vibration is applied three times in the manner of a san-bon-jime vibration, a third specific time load application mode in which a 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied in the manner of "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," and "bu-bu-bu-bu-bu-bu," a fourth specific time load application mode in which a vibration with a gradually increasing frequency (the frequency of vibrations increases by one each time) is applied in the manner of "bu," "bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu-bu," and "bu-bu-bu-bu-bu," and a fifth specific time load application mode in which a long vibration is applied in the manner of "booooooooooooo" (for example, a long vibration is applied for 30 seconds).

Note that the expected probability of winning during the corresponding fluctuation is preset for each single load-applying mode and each multiple load-applying mode. The expected probability of winning for the single load-applying mode (Ipponjime vibration) is preset to the white spherical icon described above. Of the multiple load-applying modes, the third specific-time load-applying mode (3-3-7 beat vibration) is preset to the yellow (gold) star icon described above, the fourth specific-time load-applying mode (vibration with gradually increasing vibration count (increasing by one vibration count)) is preset to the purple spherical icon described above, the second specific-time load-applying mode (Sanbonjime vibration) is preset to the red spherical icon described above, the first specific-time load-applying mode (Ipponjime vibration) is preset to the green spherical icon described above, and the fifth specific-time load-applying mode (long vibration) is preset to the white spherical icon described above. For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (3-3-7 beat vibration) has the highest expectation of a win, the fourth specific time load application mode (vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one each time)) has the second highest expectation of a win, the second specific time load application mode (sanbonjime vibration) has the third highest expectation of a win, the first specific time load application mode (ipponjime vibration) has the fourth highest expectation of a win, and the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) and single load application mode (ipponjime vibration) have the lowest expectation of a win.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, above the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed), a load-imposing execution permission selection section FG is displayed, indicating whether or not execution of load-imposing effect B is permitted. If execution of load-imposing effect B is permitted, an image "LOAD ON" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG, whereas if execution of load-imposing effect B is not permitted, an image "LOAD OFF" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG. In this embodiment, execution of load-imposing effect B is permitted, and an image "LOAD ON" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG. The period during which execution of Load Imposing Effect B can be selected is the same as the period during which the aforementioned effect mode can be selected, and includes the period during which the decorative symbols are displayed statically, as well as the period during which the decorative symbols start to change, during which the message "Change Mode with Effect Button" is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., above the effect mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the player that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) effect button 63. During this period, each time select button 68, which is different from effect button 63, is operated, the player can alternate between allowing execution of Load Imposing Effect B and not allowing execution of Load Imposing Effect B (prohibiting execution of Load Imposing Effect B).

Although the load-granting execution permission selection section FG overlaps with the change area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the right decorative pattern 8R and other images displayed behind the forefront (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so that its visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images. In other words, the load-granting execution permission selection section FG remains visible even when the decorative pattern change display (change display) is in progress or when the decorative pattern change display (change display) has ended, and its visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images, so that it can be seen even during the load-granting effect B. When a specific effect, a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed and initiated on the display screen 7a, the load-granting execution permission selection section FG is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Additionally, if the load assignment execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in the various effects being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In the right-hand play mode, load-imposing effect B may begin. As shown in Figure 103 (A), when the decorative pattern variation effect (variation display) ends, the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are displayed as still symbols, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, no vibration is generated in the effect button 63, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins, as shown in Figure 103 (B), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. This results in two hold icons being stocked.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become semi-transparent and change rapidly in their display mode, and load-imparting effect B begins. In this embodiment, as described above, A mode is selected. Therefore, as load-imparting effect B, one of the multiple load-imparting modes that are only performed in A mode is selected and performed.

When load effect B begins, one of the multiple load modes is selected, in this case the third specific time load effect, in which a 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied, such as "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," and "bu-bu-bu-bu-bu-bu." First, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the 3-3-7 beat vibration begins to be applied to the effect button 63, and the effect button 63 begins to change from a non-vibrating mode to the third specific time load effect mode, with the effect button 63 vibrating three consecutive "bu" sounds, such as "bu-bu-bu." This vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of the effect button 63.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time it takes for the "bub" vibration to occur), and then, as shown in Figure 103 (C), the effect button 63 vibrates three times in a row, making a "bub bub" sound. This vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of the effect button 63.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period (the time it takes for the "bu" vibration), and then, as shown in Figure 103 (D), the effect button 63 vibrates seven times in a row, like "bu bu bu bu bu bu." This vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of the effect button 63. In load-applying effect B, before the 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied to the effect button 63 in Figures 103 (B) to (D) (or immediately before or simultaneously with the application of the 3-3-7 beat vibration to the effect button 63), the effect button 63 is set to a predetermined illumination mode (here, flashing yellow (gold) as the illumination mode corresponding to the third specific-time load-applying mode in which the 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied), and this predetermined illumination mode is maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 ends. The reason why yellow (gold) is used as the light color for the specified light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 in Figures 103 (B) to (D) is because the third specific time load-giving mode (3-3-7 beat vibration) has a preset winning expectation corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above, and so the effect button 63 is the same color as the yellow (gold) color of this star-shaped icon. When the vibration of this effect button 63 ends, load-giving effect B ends.

When Load-Giving Effect B ends, as shown in Figure 103 (E), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2," the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2," and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change (change display), no vibration is occurring in the effect button 63, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

Next, as shown in Figure 103 (F), a battle effect, which is a super reach, begins. When the battle effect begins, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and an effect unfolds in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle effect is an effect in which the expectation of a jackpot is preset high. During the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9B disappear (are hidden) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the effect mode selection unit SEL and the load assignment execution permission selection unit FG disappear (are hidden) from the display screen 7a. During the battle performance, once Load Imposing Performance B has ended, the performance button 63 no longer vibrates and remains unlit.

When ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB is defeated during a battle, the left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as the same symbol (confirmed display), indicating a win and the winning game (win effect) then begins. When a win is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the effect mode selection unit SEL and load execution permission selection unit FG are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation. In contrast, if ally character CRA is defeated and enemy character CRB wins in a battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed) at the same time, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R do not line up as the same pattern, resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on display screen 7a, and further, the performance mode selection unit SEL and load execution permission selection unit FG are displayed on display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation.

Incidentally, since some players prefer to activate the effect button 63 and others dislike it, players can set or cancel the prohibition of activation of the effect button 63 by pressing the select button 68 during the demo effect while waiting for customers or while playing.

Furthermore, stress-imposing effect B is executed only when the prohibition on the activation of effect button 63 is released. In other words, stress-imposing effect B is not executed at all when the prohibition on the activation of effect button 63 is released. In contrast, multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light and located inside effect button 63 are driven in accordance with the progress of the effect, regardless of whether the prohibition on the activation of effect button 63 is released, so that effect button 63 can emit a predetermined light-emitting mode that indicates the likelihood of a win. For example, in Figures 103(B) to (D), regardless of whether the prohibition on the activation of effect button 63 is released, effect button 63 flashes yellow (gold), which is the light-emitting mode corresponding to the third specific-time stress-imposing mode in which a 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied. As a result, although some players like to activate the effect button 63 and others dislike it, the effect button 63 can indicate the likelihood of a win by lighting up in a specific manner, so even if the activation of the effect button 63 is prohibited and the execution of load-imposing effect B is prevented by the player, the effect button 63 can still be set to light up in a specific manner.

The predetermined light patterns include white, blue, green, red, purple, golden (yellow), and rainbow lights, with the likelihood of a win increasing in the following order: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). In addition to the individual colors, there are also flashing colors: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). The likelihood of a win increases in the following order: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). Note that the likelihood of a win for each flashing color is generally higher than for each individual color. For example, while white flashing has a higher likelihood of winning than white, it has a lower likelihood of winning than blue, which has the second highest likelihood of winning after white. The same is true for other flashing colors, except that rainbow flashing has the same likelihood of winning (high probability of winning) as rainbow flashing.

[Load imparting performance C]
Next, the load-imparting effect C will be described with reference to Figure 104. Figure 104 is a diagram for explaining the load-imparting effect C. The load-imparting effect C can be implemented by applying a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63 in a gaming state of right-hitting, and the vibration of the effect button 63 is applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player touching the top surface of the effect button 63. The gaming state of right-hitting can include a state in which a game has transitioned to a time-saving game after the end of a jackpot game, as well as a state in which a game has transitioned to a so-called b-time-saving (play time) mode.

In this embodiment, the load-imparting effect C is triggered when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21, and is performed in a gaming state known as a right-hand hit. In this right-hand hit gaming state, an image titled "Right Hand" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Because the image titled "Right Hand" is positioned on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, by positioning it as the foremost image, the right decorative pattern 8R and other effect images are positioned behind the image titled "Right Hand," and the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. In other words, the visibility of the image titled "Right Hand" is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other effect images. Furthermore, if the image "Right Hit" becomes an eyesore in the various effects unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image "Right Hit" may be displayed continuously on the top right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the start of the right hit game state until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until three minutes have passed or until the number of decorative pattern changes reaches 10), and then the image "Right Hit" may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

To briefly explain the multiple decorative symbols, a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, showing a left three-dimensional decorative symbol 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative symbol 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative symbol 8R, begins, and a variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9"). In the variable effect (variable display) of the multiple decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the decorative pattern change effect (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed as still moves upward slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the decorative pattern's stopped display is released, and the decorative pattern is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then it gradually increases its speed downward from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state and changing at a high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a translucent state back to an opaque state and then displayed as temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the decorative pattern moves slowly up and down in small, slow movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, where small opaque left decorative patterns, small opaque middle decorative patterns, and small opaque right decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable area is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark-dark color) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green)) and does not change to other colors. Because the sub-variable area is located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the variable area of the right decorative pattern 8R, but by positioning the sub-variable area as the foremost side, the right decorative pattern 8R is positioned behind the sub-variable area and is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R. Even if other display images appear, the other display images are positioned behind the sub-variable area and are not obstructed by the other display images. The sub-variable area is also located to the right of the fourth reserved display position (described below), and does not overlap with the fourth hold display position and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. In other words, the visibility of the content displayed in the sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R, other effect images, the fourth hold display position, and the hold icon placed at the fourth hold display position. It is also possible to not have a background image in the sub-variable area, in which case the sub-variable area becomes a transparent area so that only the variable effects (variable displays) of the small opaque left decorative pattern, small opaque middle decorative pattern, and small opaque right decorative pattern can be seen in the sub-variable area, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be seen at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, and is in a font (e.g., Mincho) different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. It is unified in another solid color (e.g., a light color (yellow or white)) that contrasts highly with the solid color of the background image of the sub-variable area, and does not change to other colors. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image of the sub-variable area and is always opaque; it does not become translucent even when it begins to change, and it does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Note that the small decorative pattern does not have to be in a font different from the font of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and may instead be a similar shape that is a reduced version of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

Unlike the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the small decorative patterns do not undergo a variable effect (variable display) as the reels rotate, but rather undergo a variable effect (variable display) as opaque number symbols of the same size appear one after another in the same display position.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R begins, a variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern begins in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed frozen, while the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed frozen.

Even when one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed (for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily displayed as the same pattern and a reach is formed), the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern all continue to display a variable effect (variable display). Specifically, even when the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small left decorative pattern continues, and even when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily displayed, the variable effect (variable display) of the small right decorative pattern continues, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, the small left decorative pattern, small center decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are also all displayed as stopped.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they do not line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1," the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3," the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "1," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "3," or the small left decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "5," the small center decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the small right decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed as the number "7."

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a win, the small left decorative pattern, the small center decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a sub-variable area located on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Alternatively, the sub-variable area may be located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, so that the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (displayed) in a variable manner. In this case, the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern may be displayed in the same vertical line in the order from top to bottom.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icons and reserve icons, as shown in Figure 104 (A), variable icons 9C (see, for example, Figure 104 (B)) corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the second special chart reserve is consumed are displayed (placed) in variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the center of the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the right of variable display position 9Cd, a second reserve display area is provided for the second special chart reserve. In this second reserve display area, reserve icons can be displayed (placed) in each of the four reserve display positions 9Bd (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four reserve icons can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, and fourth hold display position 9Bd, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the right edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Bd (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold display position 9Bd.

In addition, although the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd overlap with the variable areas of the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are positioned so that they are at the front, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C or right decorative pattern 8R, and even if other performance images appear, the other performance images are positioned behind the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd, so the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the other performance images. In other words, the visibility of the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd is not obstructed by the middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, or other effect images. Furthermore, when a specific effect known as a super reach battle effect is displayed and started on the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, and hold display position 9Bd are made to disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a.

Here, white spherical hold icons 9B are displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd through the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icons are present at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, there are only three white spherical hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored. Note that the following explanation assumes that no game balls will enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 from this point onwards.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative symbol variation presentation (variation display), the first special symbol hold based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other (in other words, these numbers are arranged spaced apart from each other on the same horizontal line), and are always displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

These numbers, which represent the number of reserved balls, are displayed numerically, making them difficult to distinguish among the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, they are positioned at the front of the display screen 7a, with the left decorative pattern 8L and other images positioned behind the front (i.e., the foreground) of the display screen 7a, so their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. In other words, these numbers are always displayed, even when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative pattern variable effect (variable display) has ended, and their visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images, so they are always visible even during the load-applying effect C.

In addition, instead of placing the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displaying them, they may also be placed on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R and always displayed. In this case, the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the left side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line, spaced apart from each other on the left and right), or the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 may be displayed as blue numbers on the top side, and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 may be displayed as red numbers on the bottom, spaced apart from each other (i.e., these numbers are arranged on the same vertical line, spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom). Furthermore, when the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed) is located on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, the number of first special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special patterns reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 (red numbers) are placed above the sub-variable area so that the arrangement of these numbers does not overlap with the arrangement of the sub-variable area.

Briefly, the reserved icon 9B and variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icons") represent different expectations of winning during the corresponding lottery, depending on their shape and color. For example, of the six icons—yellow (gold) star icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon—the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the green spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. Note that a smiling spherical icon may be used instead of the green spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest chance of winning, the purple sphere icon has the second highest chance of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest chance of winning, the red sphere icon has the fourth highest chance of winning, the blue sphere icon has the fifth highest chance of winning, and the white sphere icon has the lowest chance of winning.

A display mode selection section SEL, which allows the user to select a presentation mode, is located and displayed above the arrangement of the numbers (blue numbers) representing the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21, on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display mode selection section SEL displays presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode as the reels rotate. Each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that reaches the specific region SELa as the reels rotate is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific region SELa is the selected presentation mode. In this embodiment, A mode is selected, and the theme image of A mode (here, a "sun" image) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown.

The period during which the presentation mode can be selected includes not only the period during which the decorative symbols are displayed statically, but also the period during which, as the decorative symbols begin to change, a message saying "Change mode with presentation button" is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., above the presentation mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the presentation mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63. The load-imposing presentation C is performed after the period during which the presentation mode can be selected has elapsed. In other words, once the load-imposing presentation C is performed, it is no longer possible to select the presentation mode, but the presentation mode selected before the load-imposing presentation C is continued in the load-imposing presentation C.

Although the presentation mode selection unit SEL overlaps with the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L and other images are displayed behind the forefront (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images. In other words, the presentation mode selection unit SEL remains visible even when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) is in progress or when the decorative pattern variable display (variable display) has ended, and its visibility is not obstructed by the left decorative pattern 8L and other images, so that it can be seen even during the load-imposing display C. When a specific display, a battle display, which is a super reach, is displayed and initiated on the display screen 7a, the presentation mode selection unit SEL is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Additionally, if the performance mode selection section SEL becomes an eyesore in the various performances being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

Here, we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a "sun"-themed effect is played, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating the "sun." When A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, A mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL moves downward, causing D mode, located below A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, located above A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to bottom toward the specific area SELa.

In B mode, a "cloud"-themed effect is presented, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image resembling "clouds." When B mode is positioned in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, B mode, which is positioned in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, moves downward, causing A mode, which is positioned below B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and C mode, which is positioned above B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area SELa.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is performed, and a background image and various presentation images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a theme image imitating "rain." When C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the presentation mode selection unit SEL and the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63, C mode located in the specific area SELa of the presentation mode selection unit SEL moves downward, causing B mode, located below C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode, located above C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to bottom toward the specific area SELa.

In D mode, a "snow"-themed effect is presented, and a background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a "snow" themed image. When the player operates (presses) effect button 63 while D mode is located in specific area SELa of effect mode selection section SEL, D mode located in specific area SELa of effect mode selection section SEL moves downward, causing C mode located below D mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward specific area SELa, and A mode is once again displayed in specific area SELa.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes, in the three presentation modes excluding A mode, namely B mode, C mode, and D mode, there is only one type of load application (load application mode) (hereinafter referred to as a "single load application mode"), and this single load application mode may be performed. In contrast, in one presentation mode (single presentation mode) called A mode, there are multiple types of load application (load application mode) (hereinafter referred to as "multiple load application modes"), and any one of these multiple load application modes may be selected and performed. In the load application presentation C in this embodiment, A mode is selected, and any one of the multiple load application modes is selected and performed.

Here, we will briefly explain the single load application mode and the multiple load application mode. The single load application mode only includes the normal load application mode, in which a "bu" sound is applied to the effect button 63. In contrast, the multiple load application modes include a first specific time load application mode in which an ippon-jime vibration is applied to the effect button 63 in the manner of "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," and "bu," a second specific time load application mode in which an ippon-jime vibration is applied three times in the manner of a san-bon-jime vibration, a third specific time load application mode in which a 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied in the manner of "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," and "bu-bu-bu-bu-bu-bu," a fourth specific time load application mode in which a vibration with a gradually increasing frequency (the frequency of vibrations increases by one each time) is applied in the manner of "bu," "bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu-bu," and "bu-bu-bu-bu-bu," and a fifth specific time load application mode in which a long vibration is applied in the manner of "booooooooooooo" (for example, a long vibration is applied for 30 seconds).

Note that the expected probability of winning during the corresponding fluctuation is preset for each single load-applying mode and each multiple load-applying mode. The expected probability of winning for the single load-applying mode (Ipponjime vibration) is preset to the white spherical icon described above. Of the multiple load-applying modes, the third specific-time load-applying mode (3-3-7 beat vibration) is preset to the yellow (gold) star icon described above, the fourth specific-time load-applying mode (vibration with gradually increasing vibration count (increasing by one vibration count)) is preset to the purple spherical icon described above, the second specific-time load-applying mode (Sanbonjime vibration) is preset to the red spherical icon described above, the first specific-time load-applying mode (Ipponjime vibration) is preset to the green spherical icon described above, and the fifth specific-time load-applying mode (long vibration) is preset to the white spherical icon described above. For this reason, the third specific time load application mode (3-3-7 beat vibration) has the highest expectation of a win, the fourth specific time load application mode (vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one each time)) has the second highest expectation of a win, the second specific time load application mode (sanbonjime vibration) has the third highest expectation of a win, the first specific time load application mode (ipponjime vibration) has the fourth highest expectation of a win, and the fifth specific time load application mode (long vibration) and single load application mode (ipponjime vibration) have the lowest expectation of a win.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, above the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative pattern, small middle decorative pattern, and small right decorative pattern are displayed (variably displayed), a load-imposing execution permission selection section FG is displayed, indicating whether or not the execution of the load-imposing effect C is permitted. If the execution of the load-imposing effect C is permitted, an image "LOAD ON" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG, whereas if the execution of the load-imposing effect C is not permitted, an image "LOAD OFF" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG. In this embodiment, the execution of the load-imposing effect C is permitted, and an image "LOAD ON" is displayed in the load-imposing execution permission selection section FG. The period during which the execution of the load-imposing effect C can be selected is the same period as the period during which the above-mentioned effect mode can be selected, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbols are displayed statically, when the decorative symbols start to change, the message "Change mode with effect button" is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., above the effect mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63. During this period, each time the select button 68, which is different from the effect button 63, is operated, the user can alternate between allowing the execution of the load-imposing effect C and not allowing the execution of the load-imposing effect C (prohibiting the execution of the load-imposing effect C).

Although the load-granting execution permission selection section FG overlaps with the change area of the right decorative pattern 8R, it is positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a, with the right decorative pattern 8R and other images displayed behind the forefront (i.e., front) of the display screen 7a, so that its visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images. In other words, the load-granting execution permission selection section FG remains visible even when the decorative pattern change display (change display) is in progress or when the decorative pattern change display (change display) has ended, and its visibility is not obstructed by the right decorative pattern 8R or other images, so that it can be seen even during the load-granting effect C. When a specific effect, a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed and initiated on the display screen 7a, the load-granting execution permission selection section FG is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a. Additionally, if the load assignment execution permission selection section FG becomes an eyesore in the various effects being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R.

In the right-hand play mode, the load-imposing effect C may begin. As shown in Figure 104 (A), when the decorative pattern change effect (change display) ends, the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative pattern 8R (here, the number "3") are displayed as still symbols, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button 63 is not vibrating, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

Next, when the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move towards the variable display position 9Cd to consume it, the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) begins, as shown in Figure 104 (B), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a translucent state, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed at the first hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed at the second hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the first hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed at the third hold display position 9Bd starts to move toward the second hold display position 9Bd and is placed at the second hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd or the fourth hold display position. This results in two hold icons being stocked.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become semi-transparent and change rapidly, and the load-imposing effect C begins. In this embodiment, as described above, A mode is selected. Therefore, as the load-imposing effect C, one of the multiple load-imposing effects that are only performed in A mode is selected and performed.

When load-imparting effect C begins, one of the multiple load-imparting modes is selected, in this case the fourth specific-time load-imparting mode, in which vibrations are imparted at a gradually increasing frequency (increasing by one vibration each time) such as "bu," "bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu," "bu-bu-bu-bu," and "bu-bu-bu-bu." First, as shown in FIG. 104(B), vibrations are imparted to the effect button 63 at a gradually increasing frequency (increasing by one vibration each time), and the effect button 63 begins to change from a non-vibrating mode to the fourth specific-time load-imparting mode, and the effect button 63 vibrates only once, such as "bu." This vibration of the effect button 63 can be imparted (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of the effect button 63.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time it takes for the "bub" vibration to occur), and then, as shown in Figure 104 (C), the effect button 63 vibrates twice in a row, making a "bub bu" sound. This vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of the effect button 63.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time it takes for the "bu" vibration to occur), and then, as shown in Figure 104 (D), the effect button 63 vibrates three times in a row, making a "bu-bu-bu" sound. This vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of the effect button 63.

When this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period of time (the time it takes for the "bu" vibration to occur), and then, as shown in Figure 104 (E), the effect button 63 vibrates four times in a row, making a "bu-bu-bu-bu" sound. This vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of the effect button 63.

After this vibration ends, there is no vibration for a predetermined period (the time it takes for the "bub" vibration to occur), and then, as shown in Figure 104 (F), the effect button 63 vibrates five times in a row, like a "bub bub bub bub." This vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) as a load to the palm of the player's hand, which is touching the top surface of the effect button 63. Note that in load-applying effect C, before the effect button 63 is applied with gradually increasing vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by one each time) in Figures 104 (B) to (F) (or immediately before or simultaneously with the effect button 63 being applied with gradually increasing vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by one each time)), the effect button 63 is set to a predetermined illumination mode (here, a purple flashing illumination mode corresponding to the fourth specific-time load-applying mode in which vibrations with gradually increasing vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by one each time) are applied), and this predetermined illumination mode is maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 ends. The reason why purple is used as the light color for the specified light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 in Figures 104 (B) to (F) is that the fourth specific time load-giving mode (vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one each time)) has a preset winning expectation corresponding to the purple spherical icon described above, and so the color is the same purple as the spherical icon. When the vibration of this effect button 63 ends, load-giving effect C ends.

When the load-applying effect C ends, as shown in Figure 104 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "2", and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R become the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a reach. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change (change display), no vibration is occurring in the effect button 63, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

Next, although not shown, a battle effect, which is a super reach, begins. When the battle effect begins, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and an effect unfolds in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The battle effect is an effect in which the expectation of a jackpot is preset high. During the battle effect, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9B disappear (are hidden) from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the effect mode selection unit SEL and the load assignment execution permission selection unit FG disappear (are hidden) from the display screen 7a.

When ally character CRA wins and enemy character CRB is defeated during a battle, the left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as the same symbol (confirmed display), indicating a win and the winning game (win effect) then begins. When a win is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the effect mode selection unit SEL and load execution permission selection unit FG are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation. In contrast, if ally character CRA is defeated and enemy character CRB wins in a battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped (confirmed) at the same time, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R do not line up as the same pattern, resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, first hold display position 9Bd, second hold display position 9Bd, third hold display position 9Bd, fourth hold display position 9Bd, and hold icon 9B are displayed again on display screen 7a, and further, the performance mode selection unit SEL and load execution permission selection unit FG are displayed on display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation.

Incidentally, since some players prefer to activate the effect button 63 and others dislike it, players can set or cancel the prohibition of activation of the effect button 63 by pressing the select button 68 during the demo effect while waiting for customers or while playing.

Furthermore, stress-imposing effect C is executed only when the prohibition on the activation of effect button 63 is lifted. In other words, stress-imposing effect C is not executed at all when the prohibition on the activation of effect button 63 is lifted. In contrast, multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light and located inside effect button 63 are driven as the effect progresses, regardless of whether the prohibition on the activation of effect button 63 is lifted, to cause effect button 63 to emit a predetermined light-emitting pattern indicating the likelihood of a win. For example, in Figures 104(B) to (F), regardless of whether the prohibition on the activation of effect button 63 is lifted, effect button 63 flashes purple as a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the fourth specific-time stress-imposing pattern, in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one each time). As a result, although some players like to activate the effect button 63 and others dislike it, the effect button 63 can indicate the likelihood of a win by lighting up in a specific manner, so even if the activation of the effect button 63 is prohibited and the execution of load-imposing effect C is prevented by the player, the effect button 63 can still be set to light up in a specific manner.

The predetermined light patterns include white, blue, green, red, purple, golden (yellow), and rainbow lights, with the likelihood of a win increasing in the following order: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). In addition to the individual colors, there are also flashing colors: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). The likelihood of a win increases in the following order: white → blue → green → red → purple → golden (yellow) → rainbow (high probability of winning). Note that the likelihood of a win for each flashing color is generally higher than for each individual color. For example, while white flashing has a higher likelihood of winning than white, it has a lower likelihood of winning than blue, which has the second-highest likelihood of winning. The same is true for other flashing colors, except that rainbow flashing has the same likelihood of winning (high probability of winning) as rainbow flashing.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of stress-imposing effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load application effect A of FIG. 102, the load application effect B of FIG. 103, and the load application effect C of FIG. 104, an effect button 63 (load means) is provided that can apply a predetermined load to the player based on the progress of the effect, and the effect button 63 (load means) is operated in three effect modes (other effect modes) of B mode, C mode, and D mode excluding A mode (specific effect mode) out of the effect modes (plural effect modes) consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode, and a load is applied to the player by operating the effect button 63 (load means) consisting of a one-shot vibration. A single load (first load) is applied, and by operating the effect button 63 (load means) in A mode (specific effect mode), it is possible to execute a first effect (Figure 102 (E) for load-applying effect A, Figures 103 (B) to (D) for load-applying effect B, and Figures 104 (B) to (F) for load-applying effect C) in which the player is given multiple loads (second loads) different from the single load (first load) and consisting of one-stop vibration, three-stop vibration, three-three-seven beat vibration, vibration with gradually increasing vibration count (number of vibrations increases by one each time), and long vibration. According to this configuration, unlike the single load (first load) that is applied only in A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode, multiple loads (second loads) are applied to the player by the operation of the effect button 63 (load means). Therefore, while the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) is intentionally monotonous in B mode, C mode, and D mode, by providing variation in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) only in A mode, the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in A mode can be an operation that is completely different from the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in B mode, C mode, and D mode. In other words, by generating the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in A mode as an operation of a so-called "hidden mode" that is completely different from the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in B mode, C mode, and D mode, the player can be momentarily confused about what has happened (i.e., an unexpected event occurs), and can be surprised and delighted. Therefore, interest can be enhanced.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load application effect A of FIG. 102, the load application effect B of FIG. 103, and the load application effect C of FIG. 104, only one type of single load (first load) exists, namely, the Iccho-jime vibration, while multiple types of loads (second loads) exist, namely, the Iccho-jime vibration, the Sanbon-jime vibration, the San-san-shichi-byo vibration, the gradually increasing vibration (the number of vibrations increases by one each time), and the long vibration. With this configuration, unlike the single load (first load), the multiple loads (second loads) can provide variation in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means). This emphasizes the monotony of the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in modes B, C, and D, where only a single load (first load) exists, and makes the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) less monotonous for the player in mode A, where multiple loads (second loads) exist. Furthermore, since mode A, in which multiple loads (second loads) exist, differs from modes B, C, and D, in which only a single load (first load) exists, players can enjoy the multiple loads (second loads) as a so-called "hidden mode."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load application effect A of Fig. 102, the load application effect B of Fig. 103, and the load application effect C of Fig. 104, the effect button 63 (load means) is configured to apply a single load (first load) or multiple loads (second loads) to the palm of the player's hand. According to this configuration, when the effect button 63 (load means) is activated, the load from the effect button 63 (load means) is applied to the palm of the player's hand, so that the single load (first load) or multiple loads (second loads) from the effect button 63 (load means) is more easily transmitted to the player than to the player's fingertips or the back of the hand.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the load application effect A in Fig. 102, the load application effect B in Fig. 103, and the load application effect C in Fig. 104 can be executed when the prohibition on operation of the effect button 63 (load means) is released by the player. Some players like to operate the effect button 63 (load means), while others dislike operating the effect button 63 (load means). Therefore, if the player is allowed to set a prohibition on operation of the effect button 63 (load means) or to release the prohibition on operation of the effect button 63 (load means), the first effect can be executed only when the prohibition on operation of the effect button 63 (load means) is released.

[Effect 5]
102, the load application effect B in Fig. 103, and the load application effect C in Fig. 104, a second effect can be executed in which the full-color LED (light-emitting means) capable of emitting multiple colors and provided on the effect button 63 (load means) is set to a predetermined light-emitting mode to illuminate the effect button 63 (load means), regardless of whether the prohibition on activation of the effect button 63 (load means) has been released by the player. Although some players enjoy activating the effect button 63 (load means) and others dislike it, the predetermined light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 (load means) can indicate the likelihood of a win. Therefore, even if the prohibition on activation of the effect button 63 (load means) has been set and the execution of the first effect is prevented by the player, the effect button 63 (load means) can be set to a predetermined light-emitting mode.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the load application effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
The load application effect A in Fig. 102, the load application effect B in Fig. 103, and the load application effect C in Fig. 104 are performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a right-hand hit (a specific game state different from the normal game state). However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they may also be performed in a game state known as a left-hand hit (normal game state).

[Modification 2]
In the load-applying effect A in FIG. 102, the load-applying effect B in FIG. 103, and the load-applying effect C in FIG. 104, the effect button 63 is used as a load device capable of applying a predetermined load to the player based on the progress of the effect. However, a movable frame body 69 may also be used. As described above, the movable frame bodies 69 are normally stationary in retracted positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively, away from the handle 60. They can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the handle 60 and stop at a position where they come into contact with the handle 60. When in the advanced position, the movable frame body 69 comes into contact with the handle 60 or the player's right hand while operating the handle 60. Therefore, by providing multiple operating modes for the movable frame body 69, the manner in which it comes into contact with the player's right hand can be varied. Therefore, the same effect as that obtained by operating the effect button 63 can also be obtained by operating the movable frame body 69.

[Modification 3]
In the load-applying effect A in FIG. 102, the load-applying effect B in FIG. 103, and the load-applying effect C in FIG. 104, the effect button 63 is used as a load device capable of applying a predetermined load to the player based on the progress of the effect. However, wind may also be blown forward from the handle 60. For example, a speaker may be installed inside the handle 60, and the speaker's paper cone may be vibrated to send wind forward through the handle 60 and onto the right hand (palm) of the player operating the handle 60. By providing multiple modes of vibration for the speaker's paper cone, the manner in which the wind touches the player's right hand (palm) can be varied. Therefore, the same effect as that achieved by operating the effect button 63 can also be achieved by wind (air blowing) inside the handle 60 caused by the vibration of the speaker's paper cone. The speaker's paper cone is driven by the audio control board 106 under the control of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91).

[Modification 4]
In the stress-applying effect A in FIG. 102, the stress-applying effect B in FIG. 103, and the stress-applying effect C in FIG. 104, the effect button 63 is used as a load device capable of applying a predetermined load to the player based on the progress of the effect. However, a blower may be provided at a predetermined position inside the front frame 53 (e.g., at the top, right, or left side) to blow air toward the player's face. By providing multiple wind patterns from the blower, the wind pattern hitting the player's face can be varied. Therefore, the same effect as that achieved by operating the effect button 63 can be achieved by wind (airflow) from a blower provided at a predetermined position inside the front frame 53. The blower may be a device that rotates a propeller fan to blow air forward, or a device that vibrates a speaker cone to blow air forward. The blower is also driven by the audio control board 106 under the control of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91).

[Modification 5]
103(B) to (D), before the 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied to the effect button 63, the effect button 63 is maintained in a predetermined light-emitting mode (here, flashing yellow (gold) as the light-emitting mode corresponding to the third specific-time load-applying mode in which the 3-3-7 beat vibration is applied) until the vibration of the effect button 63 ends. This is because the third specific-time load-applying mode (3-3-7 beat vibration) has a preset winning expectation corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above, and therefore the color is the same as the yellow (gold) color of this star-shaped icon. However, the color of the light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the likelihood of winning, for example, by making the effect button 63 flash white in FIG. 103(B), flashing red in FIG. 103(C), and flashing yellow (gold) in FIG. 103(D), so that the effect button 63 finally turns yellow (gold) in FIG. 103(D). Alternatively, the color of the light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the likelihood of winning, for example, by making the effect button 63 flash white in FIG. 103(B), flashing white in FIG. 103(C), and flashing yellow (gold) in FIG. 103(D). Alternatively, the color of the light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the likelihood of a win, such as making the effect button 63 flash red in Figure 103 (B), making the effect button 63 flash red in Figure 103 (C), and making the effect button 63 flash yellow (gold) in Figure 103 (D), or the color of the light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the likelihood of a win, such as making the effect button 63 flash white in Figure 103 (B), making the effect button 63 flash yellow (gold) in Figure 103 (C), and making the effect button 63 flash yellow (gold) in Figure 103 (D).

[Modification 6]
In the load-imparting effect C in Figures 104(B) to (F), before the effect button 63 is vibrated so that the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one each time), the effect button 63 is kept in a predetermined light-emitting mode (here, flashing purple as a light-emitting mode corresponding to the fourth specific-time load-imparting mode in which vibrations of gradually increasing number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by one each time) are imparted) until the vibration of the effect button 63 ends. This is because the fourth specific-time load-imparting mode (vibrations of gradually increasing number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by one each time)) has a preset winning expectation corresponding to the purple spherical icon described above, and therefore the color is the same as the purple color of this spherical icon. However, the color of the light emission mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the likelihood of winning, for example, so that the effect button 63 finally flashes purple in Figure 104 (F), so that the effect button 63 flashes white in Figure 104 (B), flashes blue in Figure 104 (C), flashes green in Figure 104 (D), flashes red in Figure 104 (E), and flashes purple in Figure 104 (F). The color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction that increases the probability of winning, such as by making the effect button 63 flash white in FIG. 104(B), by making the effect button 63 flash white in FIG. 104(C), by making the effect button 63 flash green in FIG. 104(D), by making the effect button 63 flash red in FIG. 104(E), and by making the effect button 63 flash purple in FIG. 104(F). Alternatively, the effect button 63 may be made to flash blue in FIG. 104(B), by making the effect button 63 flash blue in FIG. 104(C), by making the effect button 63 flash green in FIG. 104(D), and by making the effect button 63 flash purple in FIG. The color of the light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in the direction of increasing the likelihood of winning, such as making the effect button 63 flash red in Figure 104 (B) and flashing purple in Figure 104 (F), or the color of the light-emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in the direction of increasing the likelihood of winning, such as making the effect button 63 flash white in Figure 104 (B), flashing blue in Figure 104 (C), flashing green in Figure 104 (D), flashing purple in Figure 104 (E), and flashing purple in Figure 104 (F).

[Modification 7]
In the load-applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load-applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load-applying effect C of FIG. 104, a display mode selection section SEL that allows the selection of a display mode is displayed in the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, above the arrangement of the numbers representing the number of first special symbols reserved (blue numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 20 and the number of second special symbols reserved (red numbers) based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 21. However, the display mode selection section SEL may be displayed on the display screen 7a only during a predetermined period from the occurrence of a jackpot game state until its end, allowing the player to select one of the display modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode by operating (pressing) the display button 63 only during this predetermined period. In other words, the display mode may be changed only during a predetermined period from the occurrence of a jackpot game state until its end. As described above, the period during which the presentation mode can be selected includes not only the period during which the decorative symbols are statically displayed, but also the period during which, as the decorative symbols start to change, a message "Change mode with presentation button" is displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) at a predetermined position (e.g., above the presentation mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, informing the player that the presentation mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63. Therefore, by limiting the period during which the presentation mode can be selected to the predetermined period from the occurrence of a jackpot game state to its end, the presentation mode selection unit SEL is not displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the right sub-display screen 64R other than the display screen 7a. Therefore, various presentations can be presented using the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R other than the display screen 7a, without the presentation mode selection unit SEL being an eyesore.

[Modification 8]
Although the load application effect A in Fig. 102, the load application effect B in Fig. 103, and the load application effect C in Fig. 104 are performed in a gaming state of right-hand hitting, they may also be performed in a gaming state of left-hand hitting, which increases the variety of effects.

[Modification 9]
The load-imposing effect A in Figure 102, the load-imposing effect B in Figure 103, and the load-imposing effect C in Figure 104 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a load means capable of applying a predetermined load to a player based on the progress of a performance,
The device is capable of executing a first effect in which the load means is actuated in a presentation mode other than a specific presentation mode among a plurality of presentation modes to impart a first load to a player, and the load means is actuated in the specific presentation mode to impart a second load different from the first load to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
the first load is of only one type;
There are a plurality of types of the second load.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or D2-2,
the load means applies the first load or the second load to the palm of the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3,
The first effect can be executed when the prohibition on the operation of the load means is released by the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
A second performance can be executed in which the light emitting means provided in the load means is set to a predetermined light emitting mode to perform light emitting decoration by the load means regardless of whether the prohibition on operation of the load means has been released by the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

105 to 107, game state continuation suggestion effects A to C are explained below. These game state continuation suggestion effects are executed during the special symbol variation effect, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a game state continuation suggestion effect, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U).
In the game states in the game state continuation suggestion effects A to C shown below, the "high probability high base state" refers to a "high probability high base state," the "time-saving state" refers to a "low probability high base state," and the "normal state" refers to a "low probability low base state."

[Game Status Continuation Indication Presentation A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect A. The game state continuation suggestion effect A is performed when the game state changes from a probability variable state to a normal state, and is an effect that is performed across multiple variations of the special symbol. Specifically, the probability variable game state effect and result effect A, which will be described later, are performed during the probability variable state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbol. In addition, the result effect B and normal game state effect are performed during the normal state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbol.

In game state continuation suggestion display A, as shown in Figure 105 (A), first, a probability variable game state display is performed. In this probability variable game state display, the probability variable background image XEA is used as the background image, and a variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, followed by a probability variable state suggestion display XE1, a right-hit suggestion display XE2, and a probability variable state end suggestion display XE3A. The probability variable state suggestion display XE1 is a display indicating that the game state is in a probability variable state, and is shown in the figure with the words "Probability Variable Mode." The right-hit suggestion display XE2 is a display encouraging the player to hit the right. The probability variable state end suggestion display XE3A is a display indicating that the probability variable state is ending, and is shown with the words "LAST" in the figure. The probability variable background image XEA is shown with crosshatching in the figure.

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (B), result presentation A is performed. In this result presentation A, a result background image XEB with a door motif is used as the background image, and a right-hit suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are displayed. The game result information display XE4 is a display that shows game result information, and displays information indicating the number of consecutive wins during a winning streak (number of jackpots during a winning streak) in a time-saving state or a special probability state, and the number of balls won during the winning streak. In the example shown, the game result information display XE4 shows that the number of consecutive wins was 10, and that 15,000 balls were won.

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (C), result presentation B is performed. In this result presentation B, the result background image XEB and the right-hit suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. This advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display that suggests that the advantageous game state (probable bonus state) for the player will continue, and specifically includes a button image representing the presentation button 63 and the words "Continue!" displayed within it. In the figure, the result background image XEB is shown with hatching that includes a rectangular pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 105 (D), a normal game mode presentation is performed. In this normal game mode presentation, the normal background image XEC is used as the background image, a presentation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changing is performed, and a normal mode suggestion display XE6 is also displayed. Also, in the normal game mode presentation, a presentation of a battle between ally character CRA and enemy character CRB is performed. The normal mode suggestion display XE6 is a display indicating that the game mode is normal, and is indicated by the words "normal mode" in the figure. The normal background image XEC is indicated by specified hatching in the figure.

[Game Status Continuation Indication Presentation B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect B. The game state continuation suggestion effect B is performed when the game state changes from a time-saving game state to a normal game state, and is an effect that is performed across multiple variations of the special symbol. Specifically, the time-saving game state effect and result effect A, which will be described later, are performed in the time-saving state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbol. Furthermore, the result effect B and normal game state effect are performed in the normal state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbol.

In game state continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in Figure 106 (A), a time-saving game state effect is first displayed. In this time-saving game state effect, the time-saving background image XED is used as the background image, a variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed, and a time-saving state suggestion display XE7, a right-hit suggestion display XE2, and a time-saving state end suggestion display XE3B are displayed. The time-saving state suggestion display XE7 is a display indicating that the game state is in the time-saving state, and is shown with the words "time-saving mode" in the figure. The right-hit suggestion display XE2 is a display encouraging the player to hit the right. The time-saving state end suggestion display XE3B is a display indicating that the time-saving state is ending, and is shown with the words "LAST" in the figure. The time-saving background image XED is shown with specified hatching in the figure.

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (B), result presentation A is performed. In this result presentation A, a result background image XEB with a door motif is used as the background image, and a right-hit suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are displayed. The game result information display XE4 is a display that shows game result information, and displays information indicating the number of consecutive wins during a winning streak (number of jackpots during a winning streak) in a time-saving state or a special probability state, and the number of balls won during the winning streak. In the example shown, the game result information display XE4 shows that the number of consecutive wins was 10, and that 15,000 balls were won.

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (C), result presentation B is performed. In this result presentation B, the result background image XEB and the right-hit suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. This advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display that suggests that the advantageous game state (time-saving state) for the player will continue, and specifically includes a button image representing the presentation button 63 and the words "Continue!" displayed within it. In the figure, the result background image XEB is shown with hatching that includes a rectangular pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 106 (D), a normal game mode presentation is performed. In this normal game mode presentation, the normal background image XEC is used as the background image, a presentation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changing is performed, and a normal mode suggestion display XE6 is also displayed. Also, in the normal game mode presentation, a presentation of a battle between ally character CRA and enemy character CRB is performed. The normal mode suggestion display XE6 is a display indicating that the game mode is normal, and is indicated by the words "normal mode" in the figure. The normal background image XEC is indicated by specified hatching in the figure.

[Game Status Continuation Indication Presentation C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect C. The game state continuation suggestion effect C is performed when the game state changes from a probability variable game state to a time-saving game state, and is an effect that is performed across multiple variations of the special symbol. Specifically, the probability variable game state effect and result effect A, which will be described later, are performed during the probability variable game state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbol. In addition, the result effect B and time-saving game state effect are performed during the time-saving game state, and these effects are performed during one variation of the special symbol.

In game state continuation suggestion display C, as shown in Figure 107 (A), first, a probability variable game state display is performed. In this probability variable game state display, the probability variable background image XEA is used as the background image, and a variation display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed, followed by a probability variable state suggestion display XE1, a right-hit suggestion display XE2, and a probability variable state end suggestion display XE3A. The probability variable state suggestion display XE1 is a display indicating that the game state is in a probability variable state, and is shown in the figure with the words "Probability Variable Mode." The right-hit suggestion display XE2 is a display encouraging the player to hit the right. The probability variable state end suggestion display XE3A is a display indicating that the probability variable state is ending, and is shown with the words "LAST" in the figure. The probability variable background image XEA is shown with crosshatching in the figure.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (B), result presentation A is performed. In this result presentation A, a result background image XEB with a door motif is used as the background image, and a right-hit suggestion display XE2 and a game result information display XE4 are displayed. The game result information display XE4 is a display that shows game result information, and displays information indicating the number of consecutive wins during a winning streak in a time-saving state, a special probability state, etc. (the number of jackpots during the winning streak), and the number of balls won during the winning streak. In the example shown, the game result information display XE4 shows that the number of consecutive wins was 10, and that 15,000 balls were won.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (C), result presentation B is performed. In this result presentation B, the result background image XEB and the right-hit suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. This advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display that suggests that the advantageous game state (probable bonus state) for the player will continue, and specifically includes a button image representing the presentation button 63 and the words "Continue!" displayed within it. In the figure, the result background image XEB is shown with hatching that includes a rectangular pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 107 (D), a time-shortened game mode presentation is performed. In this time-shortened game mode presentation, the time-shortened background image XED is used as the background image, a presentation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changing is performed, and a time-shortened game mode suggestion display XE7 is also displayed. In addition, the time-shortened game mode presentation includes a presentation of ally character CRA fighting enemy character CRB, and the right-hit suggestion display XE2 continues to be displayed. The time-shortened game mode suggestion display XE7 is a display indicating that the game mode is in the time-shortened mode, and is indicated in the figure by the words "time-shortened mode." The time-shortened background image XED is indicated in the figure by a specified hatching pattern.

In the above game state continuation indication effects A to C, the special state indication display XE1, right-hit indication display XE2, special state end indication display XE3A, time-saving state end indication display XE3B, game result information display XE4, advantageous game state continuation indication display XE5, normal state indication display XE6, time-saving state indication display XE7, ally character CRA, and enemy character CRB are each displayed in front of the background image (special state background image XEA, result background image XEB, normal state background image XEC, time-saving background image XED).
Furthermore, when the game state continuation suggestion effects A and B are used to transition from result effect B to normal game state effect, the door of the result background image XEB of result effect B opens and the normal background image XEC is displayed, and in front of that, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, normal state suggestion display XE6, ally character CRA, enemy character CRB, etc. are displayed.
In the above game state continuation suggestion effect C, when the result effect B is switched to the normal game state effect, the door of the result background image XEB of the result effect B opens, the time-saving background image XED is displayed, and in front of it, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the time-saving state suggestion display XE7, the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB, the right-hit suggestion display XE2, etc. are displayed.

[Modification]
In the above game state continuation suggestion effect A, the special game state effect and the result effect A are performed when the game is in the special game state, and the result effect B and the normal game state effect are performed when the game is in the normal state, but this is not limited to this, and the special game state effect, the result effect A and the result effect B may be performed when the game is in the special game state, and the normal game state effect may be performed when the game is in the normal state.
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned game state continuation suggestion effect B, the time-saving game state effect and the result effect A are performed when the game is in the time-saving state, and the result effect B and the normal game state effect are performed when the game is in the normal state, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state effect, the result effect A and the result effect B may be performed when the game is in the time-saving state, and the normal game state effect may be performed when the game is in the normal state.
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned game state continuation suggestion effect C, the high probability game state effect and the result effect A are performed when the game is in the high probability game state, and the result effect B and the time-saving game state effect are performed when the game is in the time-saving state, but this is not limited to this, and the high probability game state effect, the result effect A and the result effect B may be performed when the game is in the high probability game state, and the time-saving game state effect may be performed when the game is in the time-saving state.

In the above game state continuation suggestion effects A to C, the game result information display XE4 is not displayed when the result effect B is displayed with the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5, but this is not limited to this, and the game result information display XE4 may be displayed when the result effect B is displayed with the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5.

[Example of effect]
In the game state continuation suggestion presentation A, when the player is in a relatively favorable probability variable state, a probability variable state suggestion display XE1 is displayed to indicate the probability variable state. Then, even if the probability variable state transitions to a normal state that is less favorable to the player than the probability variable state, a result presentation B is displayed to suggest that the advantageous game state (probability variable state) will continue. This configuration, even if the probability variable state transitions to a normal state, deliberately displays the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5, thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation for the next probability variable state even if the game transitions to a normal state, and preventing the player from losing their motivation to continue playing. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect A, when the player is in a relatively advantageous probability variable state, a probability variable game state effect is performed in which a probability variable state suggestion display XE1 indicating that the player is in a probability variable state is displayed, followed by a result effect A in which a game result information display XE4 showing game result information is displayed. This configuration allows the player to be informed of game result information in the probability variable state, increasing the player's motivation to aim for the probability variable state. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect A, result effect A, which displays game result information XE4, indicating game result information, is displayed during a special probability state, while result effect B, which displays advantageous game state continuation suggestion XE5, indicating that the game state advantageous to the player (special probability state) will continue, is displayed during a normal state. With this configuration, by displaying result effect A, which displays game result information XE4, indicating game result information, during a special probability state, the player's motivation to aim for the special probability state can be increased, and by deliberately displaying result effect B, which displays advantageous game state continuation suggestion XE5, indicating that the game state advantageous to the player (special probability state) will continue, during a normal state, the player's anticipation for the next special probability state can be created, preventing the player from losing motivation to continue playing. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect A, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 in the result effect B is displayed after the game result information display XE4 in the result effect A disappears. This configuration makes it possible to emphasize the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5, giving the player a sense of anticipation for the next special state even in a normal state, and preventing the player from losing their motivation to continue playing. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned game state continuation suggestion effect A, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 in the result effect B is configured to include a button image representing the effect button 63. This configuration makes it possible to emphasize the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 to the player, and even in a normal state, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the next special state, preventing the player from losing their motivation to continue playing. As a result, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect that, when a first gaming state that is relatively advantageous to a player is being reached, displays a first gaming state suggestion display that indicates that the first gaming state is being reached,
The second display effect is present, and a display effect is provided in which, despite the transition from the first gaming state to a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, a display effect is provided in which an advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display is provided, suggesting that a gaming state advantageous to the player will continue;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is a display effect for displaying game result information,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the combination effects, the third display effect is performed in the first gaming state, and the second display effect is performed in the second gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
In the combination presentation, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display in the second presentation is performed after the game result information display in the third presentation disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
In the combination presentation, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display in the second display presentation includes an operation means image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 500 in the low-probability state (including the low-probability, low-base state and the normal state), the game transitions to Yu-Time (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state). In other words, after the low-probability state was entered after the previous jackpot, when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 500, the game transitions to Yu-Time (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state). This Yu-Time continues until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the game states in the in-game mode change effects A to C shown below, the "high-probability state" refers to the "high-probability, high-base state," the "time-saving state" refers to the "low-probability, high-base state," and the "normal state" refers to the "low-probability, low-base state."

Below, Figures 108 to 110 will be used to explain the in-game mode change effects A to C. These in-game mode change effects are performed when the game state is normal or time-saving. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an in-game mode change effect, it reads corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays an image for the in-game mode change effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Mode change effect during gameplay A]
108 is a diagram for explaining the in-game mode change effect A. In the in-game mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as the background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied and displayed stationary. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the game state is normal.

Next, when the number of times the special symbol has changed in normal mode reaches 500, a ceiling-reached effect is displayed, as shown in Figure 108 (B). In the ceiling-reached effect, the normal background image XF continues to be displayed, and the ceiling-reached indication XF1, the time-saving mode entry indication XF2, the right-hand hit start indication XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling-reached indication XF1 is an indication that the number of times the special symbol has changed in normal mode has reached 500 (the ceiling counter is 0), and is displayed in the figure as "Ceiling Reached!!". The time-saving mode entry indication XF2 is an indication that the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached 500 (the ceiling counter is 0), and is displayed as "Entering Time-Saving Mode (Musical Note Mark)" in the figure. The right-hand hit start indication XF3 is an indication to prompt the player to start right-hand hitting, and is displayed in the figure as "Start Right-Hit."

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (C), a time-shortened game state display effect is displayed. In this time-shortened game state display effect, the background image is changed to the time-shortened background image XFA, and a time-shortened game state indication display XF4, a right-hit indication display XF5, and a time-shortened game state duration indication display XF6 are displayed. The time-shortened game state indication display XF4 is an indication that the game state is in the time-shortened game state, and is displayed as "time-shortened" in the figure. The right-hit indication display XF5 is an indication to encourage the player to hit the right, and is displayed as "right hit" in the figure. The time-shortened game state duration indication display XF6 is an indication showing the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state (Yu-time) (equivalent to the number of times the special symbol changes), and is displayed as "350 more" in the figure.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the time-saving background image XFA, time-saving state suggestion display XF4, right-hit suggestion display XF5, time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and mode suggestion display XF7 is added. Mode suggestion display XF7 indicates the currently selected mode out of multiple game modes (display modes) during Yu-Time (time-saving state). In this mode change during play effect, when the ceiling is reached and the game transitions to Yu-Time (time-saving state), mode A is automatically selected out of the multiple game modes.

Next, as shown in Figure 108(E), a player mode change image display effect is performed. This player mode change image display effect is an effect that is performed after the special symbol has changed 50 times since the mode suggestion display effect shown in Figure 108(D). In this player mode change image display effect, the time-saving background image XFA, the time-saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-hit suggestion display XF5, the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode change display XF8 is displayed. The time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 has changed 50 times since the mode suggestion display effect, so in the figure it is written as "300 more times."
This mode change display XF8 pops up on the display screen 7a when the player operates the effect button 63 and the select button 68 while the special symbols are changing or while waiting for customers (while the special symbols are not changing). The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A and a mode selection prompt display XF8B. The mode display XF8A represents Mode A, Mode B, and Mode C. The mode selection prompt display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and the words "Select a mode with!!" adjacent to the button image; in other words, it is a display that prompts the player to select a mode with the button.
The player can select one mode display XF8A from the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8 by operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects the mode display XF8A representing mode B from the three mode displays XF8A.

Next, as shown in Figure 108 (F), a mode change completion display is performed. In this mode change completion display, the mode suggestion display XF7 changes from "Mode A" to "Mode B." In addition, in the mode change completion display, the time-saving background image XFA, time-saving state suggestion display XF4, right-hit suggestion display XF5, time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode change display XF8 is erased.

[Mode change effect during gameplay B]
109 is a diagram illustrating the in-game mode change effect B. In the in-game mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as the background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied and displayed stationary. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the game state is normal.

Next, when the number of times the special symbol has changed in normal mode reaches 500, a ceiling-reached effect is displayed, as shown in Figure 109 (B). In the ceiling-reached effect, the normal background image XF continues to be displayed, and the ceiling-reached indication XF1, the time-saving mode entry indication XF2, the right-hand hit start indication XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling-reached indication XF1 is an indication that the number of times the special symbol has changed in normal mode has reached 500 (the ceiling counter is 0), and is displayed in the figure as "Ceiling Reached!!". The time-saving mode entry indication XF2 is an indication that the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached 500 (the ceiling counter is 0), and is displayed as "Entering Time-Saving Mode (Musical Note Mark)" in the figure. The right-hand hit start indication XF3 is an indication to prompt the player to start right-hand hitting, and is displayed in the figure as "Start Right-Hit."

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (C), a time-shortened game state display effect is displayed. In this time-shortened game state display effect, the background image is changed to the time-shortened background image XFA, and a time-shortened game state indication display XF4, a right-hit indication display XF5, and a time-shortened game state duration indication display XF6 are displayed. The time-shortened game state indication display XF4 is an indication that the game state is in the time-shortened game state, and is displayed as "time-shortened" in the figure. The right-hit indication display XF5 is an indication to encourage the player to hit the right, and is displayed as "right hit" in the figure. The time-shortened game state duration indication display XF6 is an indication showing the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state (Yu-time) (equivalent to the number of times the special symbol changes), and is displayed as "350 more" in the figure.

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the time-saving background image XFA, time-saving state suggestion display XF4, right-hit suggestion display XF5, time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and mode suggestion display XF7 is added. Mode suggestion display XF7 indicates the currently selected mode out of multiple game modes (display modes) during Yu-Time (time-saving state). In this mode change during play effect, when the ceiling is reached and the game transitions to Yu-Time (time-saving state), mode A is automatically selected out of the multiple game modes.

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (E), an automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In this automatic mode change image display effect, the time-saving background image XFA, the time-saving state indication display XF4, the right-hit indication display XF5, the time-saving state duration indication display XF6, the mode indication display XF7, and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed, and the mode change display XF8 is automatically popped up. The time-saving state duration indication display XF6 has changed by 50 since the mode indication display effect, so in the figure it is written as "300 more times."
The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A and a mode selection prompt display XF8B. The mode display XF8A represents Mode A, Mode B, and Mode C. The mode selection prompt display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and the words "Select a mode with!!" adjacent to the button image; in other words, the combination of these displays encourages the player to select a mode with the button.
The player can select one mode display XF8A from the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8 by operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects the mode display XF8A representing mode B from the three mode displays XF8A.

This automatic mode change image display effect is an effect that is performed based on the fact that the special symbols have changed 500 times since the previous jackpot, entering Yu-Time (time-saving state), and further changing 50 times (the special symbols have changed 50 times since the mode suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 109(D)). In other words, this automatic mode change image display effect is an effect that is performed based on the fact that the special symbols have changed 550 times since the previous jackpot. Furthermore, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed during one change of the special symbols, without spanning multiple changes of the special symbols.
That is, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed automatically without any operation by the player, on the condition that the special symbols have changed 550 times counting from the previous big win during one change of the special symbols without spanning multiple changes of the special symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (F), a mode change completion display is performed. In this mode change completion display, the mode suggestion display XF7 changes from "Mode A" to "Mode B." Also, in the mode change completion display, the time-saving background image XFA, time-saving state suggestion display XF4, right-hit suggestion display XF5, time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode change display XF8 is erased.

[Mode change effect during gameplay C]
110 is a diagram illustrating the in-game mode change effect C. In the in-game mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as the background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied and displayed stationary. The normal background image XF is a background image that suggests that the game state is normal.

Next, when the number of times the special symbol has changed in normal mode reaches 500, a ceiling-reached effect is displayed, as shown in Figure 110 (B). In the ceiling-reached effect, the normal background image XF continues to be displayed, and the ceiling-reached indication XF1, the time-saving mode entry indication XF2, the right-hand hit start indication XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling-reached indication XF1 is an indication that the number of times the special symbol has changed in normal mode has reached 500 (the ceiling counter is 0), and is displayed in the figure as "Ceiling Reached!!". The time-saving mode entry indication XF2 is an indication that the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached 500 (the ceiling counter is 0), and is displayed as "Entering Time-Saving Mode (Musical Note Mark)" in the figure. The right-hand hit start indication XF3 is an indication to prompt the player to start right-hand hitting, and is displayed in the figure as "Start Right-Hit."

Next, as shown in Figure 110 (C), a time-shortened game state display effect is displayed. In this time-shortened game state display effect, the background image is changed to the time-shortened background image XFA, and a time-shortened game state indication display XF4, a right-hit indication display XF5, and a time-shortened game state duration indication display XF6 are displayed. The time-shortened game state indication display XF4 is an indication that the game state is in the time-shortened game state, and is displayed as "time-shortened" in the figure. The right-hit indication display XF5 is an indication to encourage the player to hit the right, and is displayed as "right hit" in the figure. The time-shortened game state duration indication display XF6 is an indication showing the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state (Yu-time) (equivalent to the number of times the special symbol changes), and is displayed as "350 more" in the figure.

Next, as shown in Figure 110 (D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the time-saving background image XFA, time-saving state suggestion display XF4, right-hit suggestion display XF5, time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and mode suggestion display XF7 is added. Mode suggestion display XF7 indicates the currently selected mode out of multiple game modes (display modes) during Yu-Time (time-saving state). In this mode change during play effect, when the ceiling is reached and the game transitions to Yu-Time (time-saving state), mode A is automatically selected out of the multiple game modes.

Next, as shown in Figure 110(E), an automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In this automatic mode change image display effect, the time-saving background image XFA, the time-saving state indication display XF4, the right-hit indication display XF5, the time-saving state duration indication display XF6, the mode indication display XF7, and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed, and the mode change display XF8 is automatically popped up. The time-saving state duration indication display XF6 has changed by 50 since the mode indication display effect, so in the figure it is written as "300 more times."
The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A, a mode selection prompt display XF8B, and a mode selection time suggestion display XF8C. The mode display XF8A represents Mode A, Mode B, and Mode C. The mode selection prompt display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and the text "Select a mode with!!" adjacent to the button image. In other words, the combination of these elements encourages the player to select a mode using the button. The mode selection time suggestion display XF8C indicates the time available for mode change, and is shown as "5 seconds remaining" in the figure. In this example, the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C displays a countdown to indicate the time remaining for mode change. However, this is not limited to this; the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C may also display a countup until a predetermined number of seconds has passed since the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C was displayed, indicating the time available for mode change. The button image of the mode selection prompt display XF8B and the countdown display (timer display) of the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C are displayed in association with each other.
The player can select one mode display XF8A from the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8 by operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects the mode display XF8A representing mode B from the three mode displays XF8A.

This automatic mode change image display effect is an effect that is performed based on the fact that the special symbols have changed 500 times since the previous jackpot, entering Yu-Time (time-saving state), and further changing 50 times (the special symbols have changed 50 times since the mode suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 110(D)). In other words, this automatic mode change image display effect is an effect that is performed based on the fact that the special symbols have changed 550 times since the previous jackpot. Furthermore, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed during one change of the special symbols, without spanning multiple changes of the special symbols.
That is, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed automatically without any operation by the player, on the condition that the special symbols have changed 550 times counting from the previous big win during one change of the special symbols without spanning multiple changes of the special symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 110 (F), a mode change completion display is performed. In this mode change completion display, the mode suggestion display XF7 changes from "Mode A" to "Mode B." In addition, in the mode change completion display, the time-saving background image XFA, time-saving state suggestion display XF4, right-hit suggestion display XF5, time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and ally character CRA continue to be displayed, and the mode change display XF8 is erased.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode change display XF8 is configured to be displayed on the display screen 7a in the change area in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R changed immediately before or in the change in question.
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects B and C, after the mode has been changed by the automatic mode change image display effect, the mode cannot be changed again until the Yu-time (time-saving state) ends or a jackpot occurs. However, even after the mode has been changed by the automatic mode change image display effect, if the above-mentioned predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol has changed 700 times since the previous jackpot) is met, the automatic mode change image display effect may be performed again.
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects B and C, the automatic mode change image display effect is performed by one variation of the special symbol, but the length of time during which the special symbol varies in the variation during which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed is configured to be longer than the length of time during which the special symbol varies in the variation before the automatic mode change image display effect is performed. Also, the length of time during which the special symbol varies in the variation during which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed is configured to be longer than the length of time during which the special symbol varies in the variation after the variation during which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed.

[Modification]
In the above-described in-game mode change effects B and C, the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the previous jackpot reaches 550. However, this is not limited to this, and the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed when the number of times the special symbol has changed since the previous jackpot reaches a predetermined number. Furthermore, even if the number of times the special symbol has changed since the previous jackpot does not reach a predetermined number, the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed based on other conditions. For example, even if the number of times the special symbol has changed since the previous jackpot does not reach a predetermined number, the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed based on the accumulation of a predetermined number of points, the appearance of a predetermined effect (such as a premium effect) during the change, or winning a predetermined lottery.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode display XF8A is displayed while the special symbol is changing, allowing the mode to be selected, but this is not limited to this. The mode display XF8A may also be displayed on the customer waiting screen (demonstration screen), allowing the mode to be selected.

In the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects A to C, the mode display XF8A is displayed during a single special symbol change, allowing the mode to be selected, without spanning multiple special symbol changes. However, this is not limited to this, and the mode display XF8A may also be displayed across multiple special symbol changes, allowing the mode to be selected.

[Example of effect]
In the above-described in-game mode change effects A to C, a time-saving state indication XF4 is displayed, indicating that the player is in a relatively advantageous time-saving state, and a mode A indication is displayed, indicating mode A, one of the multiple game modes available in the time-saving state. Then, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., the number of special symbol changes reaches 50 after hitting the ceiling, or the number of special symbol changes reaches 550 since the previous jackpot), a mode change indication XF8 is displayed to change from mode A to one of the multiple game modes (e.g., mode B). This configuration allows the mode to be changed upon the establishment of a predetermined condition in a time-saving state advantageous to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the time-saving state in multiple modes and enhancing the player's interest in the time-saving state. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the above-mentioned during-game mode change effects A to C, a mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one of a plurality of game modes (for example, mode B) is performed on the condition that the number of times the special symbols have changed reaches a predetermined number (550 times) counted after the previous big win.
According to this configuration, even if the player has not won a jackpot since the last jackpot, the mode change display XF8 can be displayed when the number of times the special symbols change reaches a predetermined number, so the player can be given an opportunity to change the mode and have a change of mood. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned during-game mode change effects A to C, a mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one of a plurality of game modes (for example, mode B) while the special symbol is changing is performed on the condition that the number of times the special symbol has changed since the last big win has reached a predetermined number THX.
According to this configuration, even if the player has not had a chance to win a jackpot since the last jackpot, if the number of times the special symbols change reaches the predetermined number THX, the mode change display XF8 can be displayed even while the special symbols are changing, so the player can be given an opportunity to change the mode as needed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned during-game mode change effects A to C, a mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one of a plurality of game modes (for example, mode B) during one special symbol change without spanning multiple changes of the special symbol is performed on the condition that the number of changes of the special symbol counted from after the previous jackpot reaches a predetermined number THX.
According to this configuration, even if the player has not had a chance to win a jackpot since the last jackpot, as long as the number of times the special symbols change reaches the predetermined number THX, the mode change display XF8 can be displayed during one special symbol change without spanning multiple special symbol changes, so that the player can be given a smooth opportunity to change their mood by changing modes. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned during-game mode change effects A to C, a mode change display XF8 for changing from mode A to one of a plurality of game modes (for example, mode B) during one special symbol change without spanning multiple changes of the special symbol is automatically performed without any operation by the player, on the condition that the number of changes of the special symbol counted after the previous jackpot reaches a predetermined number THX.
According to this configuration, even if the player has not had a chance to win a jackpot since the last jackpot, once the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number THX, the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed on the display screen 7a during one special symbol variation, without spanning multiple special symbol variations, so that the player can be smoothly given an opportunity to change modes for a change of mood, and the player can be prevented from missing the timing to change modes. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect that displays a first game state suggestion image that indicates that the player is in a first game state that is relatively advantageous to the player,
the second display effect is a display effect for displaying a first game mode display representing a first game mode that is one game mode among a plurality of game modes performed in the first game state,
The third display effect is a display effect for displaying a mode change to change from the first game mode to a second game mode, which is one game mode among a plurality of game modes, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and then a third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the mode change display is performed on the condition that the number of times the special symbols have changed since the last big win has reached a predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the mode change display is performed on the condition that the number of times the special symbols have changed since the last big win has reached a predetermined number during the change of the special symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the mode change display is performed on the condition that the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a predetermined number of times counted from after the previous jackpot during one special symbol change without spanning multiple changes of the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the mode change display is automatically performed without a player's operation, on the condition that the number of times the special symbols have changed has reached a predetermined number of times counted from the last big win during one special symbol change without spanning multiple changes of the special symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains group preview effects A to C using Figures 111 to 113. These group preview effects are executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a group preview effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Group Preview Performance A]
111 is a diagram for explaining the group preview performance A. In the group preview performance of this embodiment, there are cases where multiple specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases where a special image frames in and out together with multiple specific images. In the group preview performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 111(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the static display of the set of patterns announces the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state) and special pattern 1 variation is being executed. Also, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in Figure 111(A), an effect is executed in which multiple specific images TG depicting smiling faces frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward, as shown in Figure 111(B). Here, the specific images TG depict smiling faces (smiley faces), but they can be any shape that represents a specific object. Specific objects here are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, specific objects here include any form in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects. The multiple specific images TG are displayed in front of the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, covering the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downwards on the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley faces). At this time, as shown in Figure 111 (C), a special image SG may frame in among the multiple specific images TG (smiley faces). In this case, the special image SG represents an image of a face wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific object is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111(C), there are cases where a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), and cases where only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without any special images SG. When a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG, the likelihood of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when no special image SG frames in. For example, the likelihood of a jackpot in the case where a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG is 50%, while the likelihood of a jackpot in the case where no special image SG frames in is 30%. This forces the player to search for the special image SG among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), which increases the excitement compared to a monotonous group preview. Note that even when only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without any special images SG, the likelihood of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not frame in.

Figure 111(D) shows another embodiment different from Figure 111(C). Above, it was explained that the special image SG is an arbitrary shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may represent the same object as the specific image TG, as long as it is an image different from the specific image TG. In Figure 111(D), the special image SG is the same smiley face as the specific image TG, but is a different color from the specific image TG. Even in this case, the player can distinguish whether or not a special image SG is present among multiple specific images TG.

Figure 111 (E) shows the state in which multiple specific images TG and special images SG are framing out of the display screen 7a. When the multiple specific images TG and special images SG are framing out of the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were covered by the multiple specific images TG become visible in a stopped state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the form of a jackpot of "333."

Figures 111(G)-(L) show effects during special pattern changes that are different from those in Figures 111(A)-(F). In Figure 111(G), while the special pattern is changing, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as "3," indicating a reach state. Then, as shown in Figure 111(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "2," and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "323," indicating a loss. Then, as shown in Figure 111(I), an effect is executed in which multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. The multiple specific images TG are displayed in front of the "323" display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, covering the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downwards on the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley faces). At this time, as shown in Figure 111 (J), a special image SG may frame in among the multiple specific images TG (smiley faces). Here, the special image SG represents an image of a face wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific object is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111(J), there are cases where a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), and cases where only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without any special images SG. When a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG, the likelihood of a revival effect being executed is higher than when a special image SG does not frame in. In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot in this variation is higher. For example, the likelihood of a jackpot is 70% when a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG, and 50% when a special image SG does not frame in. This forces the player to search for the special image SG among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), which increases the excitement compared to a monotonous group preview. Furthermore, even if only multiple specific images TG (smiley marks) appear in the frame without any special images SG mixed in, there is a higher chance that a revival effect will be executed compared to when multiple specific images TG (smiley marks) do not appear in the frame.

In this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on the start timing of the group preview effect. That is, the likelihood of a jackpot differs between when the group preview effect is executed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, as in Figures 111(A) to (F), and when the group preview effect is executed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a missing stop, as in Figures 111(G) to (L).

Figure 111 (K) shows a state in which multiple specific images TG and special images SG are framing out of the display screen 7a. When the multiple specific images TG and special images SG are framing out of the display screen 7a, an effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were covered by the multiple specific images TG are displayed in a state in which they switch from the stop display of the losing pattern "323" to the stop display of the jackpot pattern "333". Note that there are also cases in which the stop display of the losing pattern is displayed without switching to the stop display of the winning pattern.

[Group Preview Performance B]
112 is a diagram for explaining the group preview effect B. In the group preview effect of this embodiment, there are cases where multiple specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases where a special image frames in and out together with multiple specific images. In the group preview effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variably manner on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the static display of the set of patterns announces the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state) and special pattern 1 variation is being executed. Also, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in Figure 112(A), an effect is executed in which multiple specific images TG depicting smiling faces frame in from the right side of the display screen 7a and move to the left, as shown in Figure 112(B). Here, the specific images TG depict smiling faces (smiley faces), but they can be any shape that represents a specific object. Specific objects here are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, specific objects here include any form in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple objects. The multiple specific images TG are displayed in front of the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, covering the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) frame in from the right side of the display screen 7a and move toward the left side of the display screen 7a, until the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley faces), as shown in Figure 112 (C).

Figure 112 (D) shows a state in which multiple specific images TG are framing out of the display screen 7a. When multiple specific images TG are framing out of the display screen 7a, a special image SG may frame in following the multiple specific images TG. Here, the special image SG represents an image of a face wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific object is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112(D), there are cases where a special image SG frames in after multiple specific images TG (smile marks), and cases where multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without a special image SG following them. When a special image SG frames in after multiple specific images TG, the likelihood of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when a special image SG does not frame in. For example, when a special image SG frames in after multiple specific images TG, the likelihood of a jackpot is 60%, while when a special image SG does not frame in, the likelihood of a jackpot is 40%. This allows players to focus on whether a special image SG follows multiple specific images TG (smile marks), which increases interest compared to a monotonous group preview. Furthermore, even if the special image SG does not continue and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) appear in the frame, the likelihood of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not appear in the frame.

When the multiple specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were covered by the multiple specific images TG become visible in a stopped state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in the form of a jackpot "333." The special image SG moves to the left at a slower speed than the multiple specific images TG, and moves slowly as it frames out. Therefore, even after the multiple specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, they remain displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time. Then, as shown in Figure 112 (F), the special image SG frames out from the left side of the display screen 7a, and only the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

Figures 112 (G) to (L) show effects during special pattern changes that are different from those in Figures 112 (A) to (F). In Figure 112 (G), the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. During this changing display, as shown in Figure 112 (H), an effect is executed in which multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. The multiple specific images TG are displayed in front of the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, covering the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

When multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downwards on the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific images TG (smiley faces). At this time, as shown in Figure 112 (I), a special image SG may frame in among the multiple specific images TG (smiley faces). In this case, the special image SG represents an image of a face wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific object is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112(I), there are cases where a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), and cases where only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without any special images SG. When a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG, the likelihood of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when no special image SG frames in. For example, the likelihood of a jackpot in the case where a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG is 50%, while the likelihood of a jackpot in the case where no special image SG frames in is 30%. This forces the player to search for the special image SG among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), which increases the excitement compared to a monotonous group preview. Even when only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without any special images SG, the likelihood of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not frame in.

In this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on the direction in which the group preview effect moves. That is, the likelihood of a jackpot differs when multiple specific images TG and special images SG move to the left, as in Figures 112 (A) to (F), and when multiple specific images TG and special images SG move downward, as in Figures 112 (G) to (L).

Figure 112 (J) shows the state in which multiple specific images TG and special images SG are framing out of the display screen 7a. When the multiple specific images TG and special images SG are framing out of the display screen 7a, nothing is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 112 (K). After a predetermined period of time has passed, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a static display, as shown in Figure 112 (L). In this case, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R suddenly appear in the form of a jackpot of "333."

[Group Preview Performance C]
113 is a diagram for explaining the group preview effect C. In the group preview effect of this embodiment, there are cases where multiple specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases where a special image frames in and out together with multiple specific images. In the group preview effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a center decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The variable display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation), and the static display of the set of patterns announces the result of the special pattern lottery. The special pattern may be either the first special pattern or the second special pattern. Here, it is assumed that the game state is normal (low probability, low base state) and special pattern 1 variation is being executed. Also, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon in question) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in Figure 113(A), as shown in Figure 113(B), a performance is executed in which multiple specific images TG depicting smiling faces frame in from the right side of the display screen 7a and move to the left. Here, the specific images TG represent smiling faces (smiley faces), but they can be any shape representing a specific object. Specific objects here are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, specific objects here include any form in which the number of specific objects present can be identified when there are multiple specific objects. The multiple specific images TG are displayed in front of the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, covering the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) frame in from the right side of the display screen 7a and move toward the left side of the display screen 7a, covering the entire display screen 7a with the specific images TG (smiley faces).

Figure 113 (C) shows a state in which multiple specific images TG are framing out of the display screen 7a. When multiple specific images TG are framing out of the display screen 7a, a special image SG may frame in following the multiple specific images TG. Here, the special image SG represents an image of a face wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can be any shape that represents a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific object is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(C), there are cases where a special image SG frames in after multiple specific images TG (smile marks), and cases where multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without a special image SG following them. When a special image SG frames in after multiple specific images TG, the likelihood of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when a special image SG does not frame in. For example, when a special image SG frames in after multiple specific images TG, the likelihood of a jackpot is 60%, while when a special image SG does not frame in, the likelihood of a jackpot is 40%. This allows players to focus on whether a special image SG follows multiple specific images TG (smile marks), which increases interest compared to a monotonous group preview. Furthermore, even if the special image SG does not continue and only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) appear in the frame, the likelihood of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when multiple specific images TG (smile marks) do not appear in the frame.

When the multiple specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were covered by the multiple specific images TG become visible in a static display. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a missing "323" pattern. The special image SG frames out after the multiple specific images TG. Then, as shown in FIG. 113(D), the multiple specific images TG and the special image SG frame out, leaving only the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed as static symbols on the display screen 7a. Then, a pseudo-consecutive suggestion image consisting of the text image "One More Time!!" is displayed. The display of this pseudo-consecutive suggestion image notifies the user that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were displayed as missing symbols, will change again. In this way, when multiple specific images TG frame in on the display screen 7a, the level of expectation increases, and when multiple specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, if a winning symbol is displayed as stopped as in Figures 112(D) to (F), or if a losing symbol is displayed as stopped and then pseudo-consecutive re-varies as in Figure 113(D), the losing symbol may be displayed as stopped and the game may end.

After the pseudo-consecutive suggestion image is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change again, as shown in Figure 113(E). While the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing, as shown in Figure 113(F), multiple specific images TG frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. In other words, a second group preview effect is executed in one change. This further increases the probability of a jackpot. Here, the first group preview effect (with special image SG) of Figures 113(B)-(C) increases the expected probability to 60%, and the second group preview effect (with special image SG) of Figures 113(F)-(G) increases the expected probability to 80%. The multiple specific images TG are displayed in front of the changing display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, covering the changing display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downwards, covering the entire display screen 7a with the specific images TG (smiley faces). At this time, as shown in Figure 113(G), a special image SG may frame in among the multiple specific images TG (smiley faces). The special image SG here is the same image as the special image SG displayed in the first group preview performance in Figure 113(C), but it may also be an image with different content.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113(G), in the second group preview effect, there are cases where a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), and cases where only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without the special image SG being mixed in. When a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG, the expectation of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when a special image SG does not frame in. For example, when a special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG, the expectation of a jackpot is 80%, and when a special image SG does not frame in, the expectation of a jackpot is 70%. This forces the player to search for the special image SG among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), which increases the interest compared to a monotonous group preview. Note that even when only multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without the special image SG being mixed in, the expectation of a jackpot in that variation is higher than when the second group preview effect is not executed.

As shown in Figure 113(H), when the multiple specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were covered by the multiple specific images TG become visible in a stopped state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a missing "565" pattern. When the multiple specific images TG frame in on the display screen 7a for the second time, the expectation level increases, and when the multiple specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, a winning symbol is displayed as stopped as shown in Figures 112(D)-(F), or a pseudo-consecutive re-variation occurs after a missing symbol is displayed as shown in Figure 113(D), or a revival effect is executed after a missing symbol is displayed as shown in Figures 113(H)-(L) described below, the losing symbol may be displayed as stopped and the game may end.

After that, as shown in Figure 113(I), a display is executed in which multiple specific images TG (smiley marks) frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downward. In other words, a third group preview display is executed in one variation. This further increases the probability of a jackpot. Here, the first group preview display (with special image SG) in Figures 113(B)-(C) increases the expected probability to 60%, the second group preview display (with special image SG) in Figures 113(F)-(G) increases the expected probability to 80%, and the third group preview display (without special image SG) in Figures 113(I)-(K) increases the expected probability to 90%. If the third group preview display includes a special image SG, the expected probability increases to 99%. The multiple specific images TG are displayed in front of the "565" decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, covering the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) frame in from the top of the display screen 7a and move downwards, covering the entire display screen 7a with the specific images TG (smiley faces). At this time, a special image SG may frame in among the multiple specific images TG (smiley faces), but in this case, the special image SG is not mixed in.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 113(I) to (K), in the third group preview effect, there are cases where multiple specific images TG (smile marks) frame in without the special image SG being mixed in with multiple specific images TG (smile marks), and cases where the special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG (smile marks). When the special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG, the likelihood of a revival effect being executed is higher than when the special image SG does not frame in. In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot in this variation is higher. For example, the likelihood of a jackpot is 99% when the special image SG frames in among multiple specific images TG, and 90% when the special image SG does not frame in. This forces the player to search for the special image SG among multiple specific images TG (smile marks), which increases the player's interest compared to a monotonous group preview. Furthermore, even if only multiple specific images TG (smiley faces) appear in the frame without any special images SG mixed in, the likelihood of a revival effect being executed is higher than if the third group preview effect is not executed.

As shown in Figure 113(K)(K), when the multiple specific images TG frame out of the display screen 7a, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were covered by the multiple specific images TG become visible in a stopped state. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the form of a jackpot of "555."

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the group preview performance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 111, a first effect can be executed in which the special image SG does not frame in during the special symbol change, but multiple specific images TG frame in and then frame out, and a second effect can be executed in which multiple specific images TG and the special image SG frame in during the special symbol change, and then frame out. This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative effects that can visually entertain players and increase their interest. The same applies to Figures 112 and 113.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 111, the probability of winning is higher when the second effect (the effect in which the special image SG is mixed) is executed during the special symbol change than when the first effect (the effect in which the special image SG is not mixed) is executed. This configuration allows players to enjoy the visuals of the game through innovative effects that have never been seen before, and can increase their interest. The same is true for Figures 112 and 113.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 112 and 113, in the second effect (the effect in which the special image SG is mixed in), the special image SG frames in after a plurality of specific images TG frames in, and frames out after a plurality of specific images TG frames out. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 111(A)-(F), the second effect (the effect incorporating the special image SG) may be executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, or as shown in Figures 111(G)-(L), it may be executed after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stop state of a losing combination. When the second effect is executed after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stop state of a losing combination, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may change to a stop state of a winning combination. This configuration allows for a visually entertaining and exciting experience for the player through a novel effect not previously available. The same applies to Figures 112 and 113.
[Effect 5]
112 and 113, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second effect (the effect in which the special images SG are mixed) may involve a plurality of specific images TG and a special image SG moving in from one side of the first direction and out of the frame from the other side, or a second direction moving in from one side of the second direction and out of the frame from the other side. This configuration allows for a novel effect that has never been seen before to visually entertain the player and increase their interest.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L, and in the second effect, the multiple specific images TG are displayed on one of the sub-display screens, then on the display screen 7a, and then on the other sub-display screen. With this configuration, an unprecedented and innovative effect can visually entertain the player and increase their interest.

[Modification]
Below are some variations of the group preview performance.
[Modification 1]
In the group preview effects A to C, only one special image SG was mixed in among multiple specific images TG. However, multiple special images SG may be mixed in among multiple specific images TG. Also, in the group preview effects A to C, the special image SG was one type of image. However, the special image SG may be different for each group preview effect, and the expectation level may differ depending on the image content. In the group preview effects A to C, the special image SG was displayed as an image of the same size as the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may be a different size from the specific image TG. For example, the special image SG may be an image larger or smaller than the specific image TG. The special image SG may move at the same speed as the multiple specific images TG, or at a different speed. In other words, the special image SG may move slower or faster than the multiple specific images TG. In the group preview effects A to C, the special image SG moves in the same direction as the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may move in a different direction from the specific image TG. After the special image SG has entered the frame, it may stop while the specific image TG is moving. The special image SG may enter the frame at a later time when multiple specific images TG have entered the frame and are moving.

[Modification 2]
In the group preview effects shown in Group Preview Effects A to C, an effect in which a special image SG is mixed among a plurality of specific images TG may also be executed as an effect in which the special image SG is not mixed among a plurality of specific images TG. Whether or not to execute a group preview effect and whether or not to mix a special image SG among a plurality of specific images TG are assigned so that they each appear with a predetermined probability.

[Modification 3]
In the group preview effects A to C, the effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a static display after the group preview effect may be another effect. For example, after the group preview effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed in a variable display and then statically displayed. Alternatively, after the group preview effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be displayed, and then the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may appear.

[Modification 4]
The degree of expectation of a jackpot in Figures 111(A) to (F) is different from the degree of expectation of a jackpot in Figures 111(G) to (L). That is, the degree of expectation of a jackpot changes depending on the timing of the appearance of the group preview effect. However, the degree of expectation due to the appearance of the group preview effect may be constant regardless of the timing.

[Modification 5]
The group preview effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, after the effects of Figures 111(G) to 111(L), the effects of Figures 112(G) to 112(L) may be executed.

[Modification 6]
In the group preview effects A to C, only the effects on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are shown. However, the group preview effects A to C may also be displayed on the sub-display screens 64 (the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) in addition to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. For example, in the effects shown in FIGS. 111(B) to (D) and (I) to (K), the multiple specific images TG may be framed in on the upper sub-display screen 64U before framing in from above the display screen 7a, and then framed out of the upper sub-display screen 64U and then framed in from above the display screen 7a. Furthermore, when the multiple specific images TG frame in from above the display screen 7a, they may also frame in from above on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112(B) to (D) and 113(B) to (C), the multiple specific images TG may frame in from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R, then frame out from the left side, then frame in from the right side of the display screen 7a and frame out from the left side, then frame in from the right side of the left sub-display screen 64L and frame out from the left side. The multiple specific images TG may also move from the right sub-display screen 64R to the upper sub-display screen 64U, and then move to the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first image;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second image;
During the special drawing change, a first effect in which a plurality of the first images frame in and then frame out;
During the special drawing change, a second performance in which the second image in addition to the plurality of first images frames in and then frames out can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The expectation of winning is higher when the second performance is executed than when the first performance is executed during the special chart change,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
In the second production, the second image frames in after the plurality of first images frames in, and frames out after the plurality of first images frames out.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-4]
4. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify winning or losing,
The second effect may be executed when the set of decorative symbols is variably displayed, or may be executed after the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a losing mode,
When the second effect is executed after the set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a losing mode, the set of decorative symbols may be changed to a stopped display in a winning mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-5]
5. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The second production may be a case where the plurality of first images and the second image move in a frame-in manner from one side in a first direction and out of a frame-out manner from the other side, or a case where the plurality of first images and the second image move in a frame-in manner from one side in a second direction and out of a frame-out manner from the other side.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-6]
6. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The display means includes a main display means and two of the sub-display means,
In the second performance, the plurality of first images are displayed on one of the sub-display means, then on the main display means, and then on the other of the sub-display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

In the above embodiment, the gaming machine 1 has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. If the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation units operated by the player are equipped with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68, but are not limited to these; the operation units operated by the player may also be levers, triggers, etc. Also, in the display effects of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effects may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display effects may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or the display effects may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but this is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form a single display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, or the display effects performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

This aspect has been described above based on embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of this aspect and are not intended to limit this aspect. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit or the scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are also included in this aspect.

1... Gaming machine 3... Play area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Hold image (hold icon)
9C...Relevant hold image (hold icon)
14... First movable device 15... Second movable device 17... Large prize opening start port 20... First start port (first ball entrance port)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64... Sub-display screen 69... Movable frame accessory 66... Frame lamp 81... Game control microcomputer 91... Performance control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

a display screen for displaying an image;
When the effect pattern fluctuating on the display screen is fixed and stopped, in the next fluctuation, it is possible to execute a fluctuation straddle effect, which is an effect having continuity from the end of the current fluctuation to the next fluctuation,
The variation straddle effect includes an effect in which, when the effect pattern varying on the display screen is fixed and stopped in a specific manner, a specific effect is executed in the next variation so as to be continuous with the fixed stop,
The combination of the performance symbols that has been determined and stopped in the specific mode includes a special image,
The special image is an image in which no other image is displayed integrally with the special image,
After the start of the next variation, within the period of the specific performance executed in the next variation, the number image included in the performance pattern that has been fixed and stopped is made difficult to see, and a performance is executed in which the area occupied by the special image is made larger using the special image than when the special image was fixed and stopped in the previous variation.
A gaming machine characterized by: